UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA 
AT   LOS  ANGELES 


Putnam's   Correspondence 
Handbook 

A  Work  of  Reference 

Designed  to 

Promote  Efficiency 

in 

Business  Correspondence 


By 
Eleanora  Banks 


G.  P.  Putnam's  Sons 

New  York  and  London 
Gbe    fmfcfterbocfter    press 

1915 


COPYRIGHT,  1912,  BY 

ELEANORA   BANKS 

(Under  the  title  Correct  Business  and  Legal  Forms) 

Second  Edition,  with  New  Material 

COPYRIGHT,  1914,  BY 

ELEANORA   BANKS 


TEbe  fmfckerbocfeer  press,  Hew  Borft 


"  It  clotK  breed  great  perfection  \v-Hen  tHe  prac- 
tice is  Hardier  tHan.  tHe  vise." — Bacon. 


PREFACE 

The  preparation  of  this  book  is  to  be  attributed  to 
the  difficulties  that  I  met  during  my  first  years  of 

§  office  work  in  obtaining  proper  forms  for  various 
documents  and  in  finding  the  thousand  and  one  bits 
of  information  necessary  to  correct  and  efficient  work. 
Had  such  a  collection  as  this  been  available  during  my 
earlier  experience  I  could  have  saved  much  time  and 

m      avoided  many  mistakes.     I  well  remember  one  book  of 

o  instructions  that  I  bought  eagerly  and  hopefully.  It 
was  entitled  A  Book  of  Business  Letters,  and  contained 
models  of  letters  on  various  subjects  for  the  guidance 
of  the  unsophisticated.  .  One  of  the  letters  commenced 

g.     thus: 

"Mess.  Page  &  Co., 

•Boston,  Mass. 
Gents : — 
The  complimentary  close  in  all  of  the  letters  had  each 

j»     word  capitalized:  "Yours  Very  Truly."    Another  of 

,3     the  letters  was  addressed  to  "Jackson  &  Sharp  M'f'g. 

B)  Co.,  Trenton,  N.  J.  Messrs: — "  The  business  schools 
teach  much  more  now  than  in  former  years,  yet  much 
that  is  essential  is  left  untaught.  Therefore,  I  believe 
that  this  book  will  be  generally  useful.  It  is  the 
outgrowth  of  years  of  endeavor  to  gather  and 
condense  into  convenient  form  for  daily  use  the 
information  most  needed  in  correspondence  and 
generally  to  be  found  only  by  rambling  and  time- 
consuming  searches  through  many  books.  As  time 


428977 


iv  Preface 

is  of  prime  importance  in  business,  the  advantage 
of  immediate  and  easy  reference  is  obvious.  And 
an  occasional  reference  to  authorities  cannot  be 
avoided  even  by  the  most  expert;  for  knowledge  is 
uncertain  and  memory  confused  at  times  of  extreme 
haste — and  it  is  always  at  times  of  extreme  haste  that 
the  particular  reference-book  needed  is  some  distance 
away  or  wholly  inaccessible. 

Much  of  the  material  contained  in  this  volume  has 
been  adapted  from  the  following  authorities,  by  per- 
mission of  the  publishers,  for  which  permission  grateful 
acknowledgment  is  hereby  made :  COMPOUND  WORDS, 
Funk  &  Wagnalls  Company's  Standard  Dictionary; 
GRAMMATICAL  CONSTRUCTION,  PLURALS,  CAPITALIZA- 
TION, Maxwell's  Advanced  Lessons  in  English  Gram- 
mar, Bain's  Higher  English  Grammar,  Century  and 
Standard  Dictionaries,  Correct  English,  and  Raub's 
Punctuation  and  Letter-Writing;  SPELLING  and  SYL- 
LABICATION, Webster's  International  Dictionary.  The 
lists  of  law  terms  and  Latin  phrases  have  been  com- 
piled chiefly  from  Bouvier's  and  Black's  Law  Diction- 
aries; the  chapter  on  Telegrams  and  Cablegrams  from 
pamphlets  furnished  by  the  Western  Union  and  the 
Commercial  Cable  Companies. 

Special  acknowledgment  is  due  to  the  American 
Book  Company  for  permission  to  use  the  matter 
based  on  Wilson's  Treatise  on  Punctuation,  Copyright 
1871,  1899,  by  John  Wilson. 

The  information  relating  to  Catholic  Titles  was 
approved  in  manuscript  by  a  prelate  of  the  Catholic 
Church ;  credit  is  due  to  H.  T.  Loomis's  book,  Letter- 
Writing,  for  the  method  of  arrangement,  and  to  H.  E. 
Gavit's  The  Etiquette  of  Correspondence  for  suggestions. 

The  model  forms  of  letters  represent  the  preference 


Preface  v 

of  a  majority  of  law  firms  and  business  houses.  The 
forms  of  the  legal  papers  are  those  in  popular  use  and 
will  give  the  student  and  novice  a  knowledge  of  what 
will  be  required  of  him  in  a  law  office.  With  the 
exception  of  names,  these  papers  are  almost  exact 
copies  of  documents  that  have  been  used  in  actual 
lawsuits. 

ELEANORA  BANKS. 
NEW  YORK, 

July  i,  1912. 


CONTENTS 

PAGE 

LETTER-WRITING  ......        i 

LETTERS  OF  INTRODUCTION      .        .         .17 
LETTERS  OF  RECOMMENDATION         .         .       18 
MODEL  FORMS  FOR  LETTERS  ...      20 
LETTERS  TO  WOMEN       .         .         .         .31 

THINGS  TO  BE  NOTICED          ...      36 

How  TO  MAKE  SYMBOLS  AND  PUNCTUATION- 
MARKS        ......      38 

ENVELOPES,  CARDS,  ETC.  39 

MANIFOLDING         .....  39 
LETTER-PRESS  COPYING           ,        .         .40 

As  TO  THE  SUBSTANCE  OF  LETTERS          .  41 

TIME-SAVING  EXPEDIENTS      ....  43 

FLAGGING 44 

RIDERS 44 

FIGURES  AND  SIGNS      .         .         .         »         .      46 

vii 


Vlll 


Contents 


PAGE 

THE  POSSESSIVE  CASE 51 

PLURALS      .......      54 

PLURALS  OF  FOREIGN  WORDS          .        .      56 
PLURALS  OF  NAMES        ....       58 

TITLES,  FORMS  OF  ADDRESS  AND  SALUTATION  59 
COMPOUND  WORDS  .  .  .  .68 

CAPITALIZATION 75 

PUNCTUATION 84 

SYLLABICATION 112 

ABBREVIATIONS  AND  CONTRACTIONS       .        .116 

SPELLING      .  127 

POETRY 135 

COURT  DOCUMENTS 137 

COURT  TESTIMONY 162 

OTHER  LEGAL  PAPERS 166 

MODEL  FORMS  FOR  LEGAL  PAPERS  AND  WILLS  168 
LAW  PHRASES  .  .  .  .  »  .186 
LATIN  WORDS  AND  PHRASES  .  .  .192 

THE  CORRECT  WORD 207 

USELESS  WORDS    ,  218 


Contents  ix 

PAGE 

"INDEX  EXPURGATORIUS "     ....  220 

TELEGRAMS 225 

CABLEGRAMS         ......  230 

GENERAL  POSTAL  INFORMATION     .        .        .  234 

PROOFREADING ,  242 


A  Manual  of  Reference 


LETTER- WRITING 

The  important  parts  of  a  letter  are : 

1 .  The  HEADING     (the  name,  place,  date,  business 

or  profession) . 

2.  The  INTRODUCTION     (comprising  the  Address 

and  the  Salutation). 

3.  The  BODY     (the  statements  made  or  informa- 

tion given  by  the  writer  to  the 
person  addressed) . 

4.  The    CONCLUSION     (comprising    the    Compli- 

mentary   Close    and    the 
Signature). 

5.  The  SUPERSCRIPTION     (direction   on  the  en- 

velope). 

THE  HEADING. 

The  HEADING  of  business  letters  contains  the  name, 
address  and  business  of  the  writer,  and  the  date. 

Generally,  engraved  or  printed  letter-heads  are 
used,  giving  all  of  the  Heading  except  the  date. 

When  it  is  necessary  to  write  the  Heading,  the 
following  is  a  proper  form : 


2  Letter-Writing 

New  York  Hotel, 

Broadway  and  Forty- fourth  Street, 
New  York,  Sept.  17,  1911. 

The  name  and  address  part  of  the  Heading  may  be 
placed  in  the  left-hand  corner  of  the  page,  or  in  the 
center,  but  in  either  case  the  date  should  be  put  at 
the  right. 

R.  E.  Lee  Young, 
145  Lawrence  Street, 
Boston,  Mass. 

August  16,  1910. 


T.  C.  Cowell  &  Son, 

Drugs,  Chemicals,  Paints,  Oils, 

133  Duane  Street, 

New  York,  August  17,  1910. 

Where  the  Heading  is  long,  make  it  compact  by 
single  spacing. 

Text-books  on  letter-writing  almost  without  ex- 
ception declare  the  rule  that  the  second  line  of  the 
Heading  should  begin  about  an  inch  to  the  right  of 
the  first  line,  and  the  third  about  an  inch  to  the  right 
of  the  second  line,  in  the  following  form: 

Franklin  College, 

New  Ycrk  City, 

Jan.    6,    1910. 

But  this  form  has  no  advantage,  either  in  appearance 
or  in  convenience,  over  the  other  forms  given;  in 
fact,  it  is  less  artistic.  A  good  form  is  to  center  the 
first  line,  if  short,  upon  the  second  line : 


THe   Heading  3 

Franklin  College, 
New  York  City,    Jan.    27,    1910. 

Do  not  begin  the  date  line  to  the  left  of  the  middle 
of  the  page. 

The  house  number  and  the  street,  or  the  room  num- 
ber and  the  building,  form  a  single  item  and  should 
not  be  separated  by  a  comma:  24  Broad  Street, 
New  York.  16  Masonic  Temple,  Chicago,  111. 

The  address  of  the  writer  is  sometimes  placed  at 
the  close  of  the  letter,  immediately  under  the  signa- 
ture, but  that  is  not  the  best  form. 

Do  not  crowd  the  Heading  close  to  the  top  of  the 
page.  Leave  a  margin  of  at  least  an  inch. 

The  date  line  should  end  half  or  three-quarters  of 
an  inch  from  the  edge  of  the  paper  on  the  right. 

It  is  not  necessary  to  write  the  ordinal  endings  d, 
rd,  ndj  st,  or  th,  after  the  day  of  the  month  in  the  date. 
Figures  alone  are  sufficient. 

When  the  forms  ist,  2d,  I5th,  etc.,  are  used,  no 
period  should  be  placed  after  them,  as  they  are  not 
abbreviations. 

It  is  permissible  in  some  cases,  but  not  desirable, 
to  use  figures  to  indicate  the  month;  as,  9/22,  1907 ;  or, 
9/22/07,  for  September  22,  1907.  The  best  way  is  to 
write  the  name  of  the  month  and  thus  save  the  reader 
the  effort  of  determining  what  the  ninth  month  is. 

In  social  notes  or  letters  of  a  friendly  nature,  the 
date  may  be  placed  at  the  end,  at  the  left  margin,  on 
the  next  line  below  that  on  which  the  signature  is 
written. 

THE  INTRODUCTION. 

The  INTRODUCTION  consists  of  the  ADDRESS  and 
the  SALUTATION,  or  greeting. 


4  Letter-Writing 

The  ADDRESS  contains  the  name,  the  title  and  the 
place  of  business  or  residence  of  the  person  to  whom 
the  letter  is  written.  In  a  business  letter  none  of 
these  items  should  be  omitted. 

If  the  place  be  a  city  of  considerable  size,  the  house 
number  and  the  street  should  be  given. 

Place  a  comma  after  each  line  of  the  Address, 
except  the  last,  where  a  period  is  necessary.  If  the 
name  ends  with  "Co."  or  "Esq."  or  any  other 
abbreviation,  the  comma  follows  the  period. 

In  business  correspondence  the  name  and  address 
are  usually  written  at  the  beginning  of  the  letter.  In 
a  social  letter  they  may  be  placed  at  the  end,  below 
the  signature,  at  the  left  margin. 

Commence  the  name  at  the  left  margin,  indent 
first  line  of  address  five  spaces,  second  line  ten  spaces, 
and  place  Salutation  at  left  margin  and  begin  first 
paragraph  ten  spaces  from  margin. 

If  the  name  and  address  occupy  more  than  three 
lines,  the  lines  may  be  single-spaced. 

When  the  Address  is  short,  it  may  be  put  in  two 
lines,  full  space  between,  indenting  second  line  five 
to  eight  spaces. 

Messrs.  Baldwin  &  Greene, 

124  Broadway,  New  York  City, 

is  a  neater  form  than 

Messrs.  Baldwin  &  Greene, 
124  Broadway, 

New  York  City. 


THe  Body  5 

The  following  is  neat,  compact,  and  in  popular 
use: 

Correct  English  Publishing  Company, 
Chicago,  111. 

When  a  letter  requires  the  special  attention  of  a 
particular  member  of  the  firm,  or  a  department 
manager,  one  of  the  following  forms  may  be  used: 

Messrs.  Smith  &  Kramer, 

Denver,  Colo. 
Mr.  James  Field,  Manager, 
Dear  Sir: 

Messrs.  Smith  &  Kramer, 

Denver,  Colo. 
Gentlemen:      (Attention  of  Mr.  Field.) 

THE  BODY. 

The  BODY  of  the  letter  contains  what  is  communi- 
cated from  the  writer  to  the  person  addressed.  It 
begins  on  the  next  line  below  the  Introduction,  in- 
dented five  or  ten  spaces  from  the  margin,  according 
to  the  judgment  of  the  operator  or  the  custom  of 
the  office. 

All  other  paragraphs  should  begin  at  the  same  point 
as  the  initial  paragraph. 

A  short  letter  is  arranged  by  artistic  operators  in 
short  lines  with  wide  margins. 

Learn  to  estimate  just  how  many  lines  of  type- 


6  Letter-Writing 

writing  a  page  of  notes  will  make,  so  that  the  page 
can  be  artistically  arranged. 

The  SUBJECT  of  the  letter  may  be  written  across 
the  page,  either  before  or  after  the  Introduction; 
preferably  before,  where  there  is  but  one  Subject, 
as  this  method  does  not  separate  the  Introduction 
from  the  Body  of  the  letter.  (See  Model  i.) 

When  there  is  more  than  one  Subject,  a  side-head  or 
a  center-head  should  introduce  each.  (See  Model  2.) 

In  some  cases  the  Subject  is  written  in  the  body  of 
the  letter,  in  capitals  or  underscored.  (See  Model  6.) 

Double-space  all  letters  unless  instructed  to  single- 
space  them,  but  single-space  the  last  two  or  three 
lines  to  avoid  carrying  over  a  single  line  or  two 
lines  to  another  page. 

In  a  single-spaced  letter,  double-space  on  each 
side  of  the  Salutation  and  between  paragraphs. 

The  second  and  succeeding  pages  of  the  letter 
should  be  written  upon  blank  sheets. 

The  name  or  initials  of  the  person  addressed  should 
be  written  near  the  left  margin  at  the  top  of  the 
second  and  following  pages,  together  with  the  number 
of  the  page. 

When  the  date  is  required  to  be  given  on  each 
sheet,  put  it  after  the  name  or  initials  at  the  left 
and  place  the  page  number  in  the  upper  right-hand 
corner. 

It  is  a  good  practice  to  number  pages  at  the  top, 
as  this  will  not  interfere  with  the  placing  of  additional 
matter  at  the  bottom  should  it  be  found  desirable. 

Place  the  initials  of  the  person  who  dictates  the 
letter,  when  this  is  required,  at  the  end  of  the  letter, 
at  the  left.  (See  Model  2.) 

Place  initials  of  stenographer,  when  required,  after 


The  Body  7 

those  of  the  dictator  in  the  same  line  at  the  left,  and 
the  time  of  dictation,  if  required,  may  follow  on  the 
same  line.  (See  Model  I.) 

Letters  on  half-sheets  should  not  extend  over  to 
a  second  page.  Better  use  a  larger  sheet. 

Do  not  begin  a  paragraph  at  the  bottom  of  the 
page  unless  there  is  room  for  at  least  three  lines. 

Do  not  carry  over  a  few  words,  or  a  single  line,  to 
a  new  page.  Carry  over  at  least  three  lines  besides 
the  Complimentary  Close,  or  else  single-space  the 
last  few  lines  at  the  bottom  of  the  preceding  page  in 
order  to  complete  the  letter  on  that  page. 

When  there  is  a  list  of  items  or  an  enumeration  of 
particulars  in  the  body  of  a  letter,  indent  and  tabu- 
late. (See  Models  4  and  5.) 

When  a  telegram  or  other  matter  is  to  be  quoted 
in  a  letter,  it  is  made  prominent  by  indenting  at  both 
right  and  left  margins  and  setting  it  in  single  space. 
If  the  quoted  matter  consists  of  more  than  one  para- 
graph, place  quotation  marks  at  the  beginning  of 
each  paragraph  and  at  the  end  of  the  last  one.  (See 
Model  6.) 

The  affixes  th,  st,  rd,  nd  are  not  necessary,  and  are 
seldom  used,  in  dates  in  the  Heading,  but  are  some- 
times required  in  the  Body  of  the  letter,  and  especially 
when  the  word  "instant,"  "ultimo,"  or  "proximo" 
follows  a  date.  No  period  should  be  placed  after 
such  terminations,  as  they  are  not  abbreviations. 
As,  "Replying  to  your  favor  of  the  i6th  inst." 

Instant  (abbreviated  inst.},  frequently  used  in 
letters,  means  present,  current,  and  refers  to  the 
present  month. 

Ultimo  (ult.)  means  last,  and  refers  to  the  month 
last  past. 


8  Letter- Writing 

Proximo  (prox.}  means  coming,  and  refers  to  the 
month  next,  to  come. 

The  closing  sentence,  such  as  "Awaiting  your 
reply,"  or  "Hoping  to  hear  from  you  immediately," 
usually  begins  a  paragraph.  After  such  expressions 
a  comma,  not  a  period,  is  required,  for  the  reason  that 
the  sense  is  not  complete  without  the  Complimentary 
Close  and  the  signature. 

A  Postscript  should  begin  at  the  paragraph  point, 
at  least  three  double  spaces  below  the  Complimentary 
Close,  introduced  by  the  initials  "P.  S."  followed  by 
a  dash  and  the  matter  of  the  postscript  on  the  same 
line.  Only  the  initials  of  the  writer  are  signed  to 
the  postscript,  and  it  should  not  be  followed  by  any 
form  of  Complimentary  Close.  (See  Model  3.) 

Any  enclosures  should  be  indicated  at  the  end  of 
the  letter,  at  the  left  margin.  (See  Model  I.) 

Enclosures  should  be  folded  neatly  and  placed  in- 
side of  the  letter-sheet  and,  if  there  are  many,  should 
be  attached  to  the  sheet  by  a  small  pin  or  metal  clip. 
It  is  supposed  that  a  check  has  the  best  effect  upon 
its  recipient  when  pinned  across  the  top  of  the  letter- 
head in  such  a  position  as  to  catch  his  eye  immediately 
upon  opening  the  letter. 

When  the  letter  is  finished,  ready  for  signature, 
slip  the  flap  of  the  envelope  over  it  and  fasten  with 
a  clip. 

The  abbreviations  permissible  in  a  letter  are  few: 
The  month  in  the  date-line,  the  State  in  the  address; 
the  words  "street"  and  "avenue"  in  the  address 
(though  some  business  houses  object  to  this);  the 
name  of  a  State  in  the  body  of  the  letter  when  pre- 
ceded by  the  name  of  a  town — never  when  used  alone ; 
inst.,  ult.,  and  prox.;  No.  for  "number"  when  pre- 


THe  Conclusion  9 

ceding  figures;/,  o.  b.  and  like  commercial  terms;  a 
title  preceding  a  name,  as  Hon.,  Rev.,  Prof. 

THE  CONCLUSION. 

The  CONCLUSION  consists  of  the  Complimentary 
Close  and  the  Signature. 

The  Complimentary  Close  is  the  expression  of 
respect  or  regard  which  properly  terminates  a  letter. 

The  style  of  the  Complimentary  Close  varies  ac- 
cording to  the  relations  of  the  writer  and  the  person 
addressed,  and  should  correspond  in  character  to 
the  Salutation.  Business  letters  require  an  expres- 
sion of  respect  only.  If  the  Salutation  be  "Dear  Mr. 
Blank,"  or  "My  dear  James,"  the  appropriate 
closing  is  "Yours  very  truly,"  or  "Sincerely  yours," 
or  some  similar  term,  but  not  "Yours  respectfully." 

Begin  the  Complimentary  Close  in  the  middle  of 
the  line  regardless  of  the  position  of  the  closing  words 
of  the  letter. 

The  following  are  approved  forms  of  the  Compli- 
mentary Close  for  business  letters: 

Yours  truly,  Respectfully  yours, 

Truly  yours,  Yours  respectfully, 

Yours  very  truly,  Faithfully  yours, 

Very  truly  yours,  Sincerely  yours, 

Very  respectfully  yours,      Cordially  yours. 

"Very  truly  yours"  and  "Yours  very  truly"  are 
equally  correct. 

"Cordially  yours"  is  used  when  the  writer  desires 
to  express  a  more  kindly  interest  than  strictly  business 
relations  call  for. 

"Sincerely  yours"  is  reserved  for  letters  of  friend- 
ship and  is  rarely  used  in  business  letters. 


10  Letter-Writing 

"Fraternally  yours"  is  confined  to  letters  between 
insurance  companies  and  fraternal  orders  and  their 
members  and  between  the  members  themselves. 

The  expression  "Your  obedient  servant"  is  no 
longer  used  in  business  letters.  It  is  still  adhered  to 
in  military  circles  and  is  appropriate  in  addressing  a 
superior. 

"Respectfully  yours"  is  proper  in  letters  from  the 
young  to  the  aged,  from  an  inferior  to  a  superior,  or 
from  a  stranger  to  a  person  of  note  or  prominence. 

A  petition  to  a  legislative  body,  such  as  a  Board  of 
Aldermen,  may  begin  with  "Gentlemen,"  or  "Sirs," 
and  close  with  "Respectfully  submitted,"  or  "All  of 
which  is  respectfully  submitted. " 

Do  not  omit  the  word  "yours"  in  the  Closing  of  a 
business  letter.  "Very  truly,"  or  "Very  sincerely," 
without  the  word  "yours"  added  is  not  considered 
good  form. 

Never  close  a  letter  with  merely  "Yours,"  or 
"Yours,  etc."  This  is  considered  an  indication  of 
disrespect,  or,  at  least,  of  careless  regard. 

Capitalize  only  the  first  word,  or  the  first  word  of 
each  line,  of  the  Complimentary  Close.  No  other 
word,  except  a  proper  name  or  a  title,  should  begin 
with  a  capital.  Thus:  "Yours  very  truly,"  not 
"Yours  Very  Truly." 

"Assuring  you,  my  dear  Colonel,  of  my 
sincere  regard,  I  am, 

Very  truly  yours, 

James  Jones." 

"Your  affectionate  son, 

Charles. " 


The  Signature  II 

A  title,  such  as  Captain,  Colonel,  General,  used  in 
the  Salutation  or  Complimentary  Close  should  not 
be  abbreviated. 

The  Complimentary  Close  may  be  omitted  from  a 
letter  of  recommendation  beginning  "To  Whom  It 
May  Concern. " 

If  no  Salutation  be  used,  the  Complimentary  Close 
should  be  omitted. 

The  word  "remain"  in  the  Complimentary  Close 
implies  previous  correspondence.  The  first  letter 
should  close  with  "I  am,"  if  such  a  term  be  used  at 
all. 

SIGNATURE. 

The  SIGNATURE  is  the  name,  often  accompanied 
by  an  official  title,  of  the  person  who  writes  the  letter. 
It  should  be  placed  at  the  right-hand  side,  at  the 
bottom  of  the  letter,  following  the  Complimentary 
Close. 

The  Signature  commonly  begins  about  the  middle  of 
the  Complimentary  Close,  the  latter  beginning  at 
the  middle  of  the  scale. 

When  made  on  the  typewriter,  the  Signature  should 
be  all  capitals. 

When  the  Signature  is  to  be  written  in  with  pen, 
leave  at  least  two  double  spaces  between  the  Compli- 
mentary Close  and  the  title  of  the  person  who  signs 
the  letter,  printing  in  the  title. 

Lines  for  Signatures  are  not  usually  placed  upon 
letters. 

Where  signature  lines  are  required,  as  on  legal 
documents,  leave  three  single  spaces  between  them. 

By  and  Per  in  the  Signature  should  begin  with  a 
capital  letter. 


12  Letter- Writing 

When  the  title  following  the  Signature  is  a  long 
one,  place  it  so  the  Signature  will  fall  in  the  center 
of  the  title,  thus: 

GEORGE  HILL 
Manager  Edison  Electric  Works. 

If  the  title  be  short,  it  may  follow  the  name: 

GEORGE  HILL,    Administrator. 
Styles  of  Signatures: 

EDISON  ELECTRIC  WORKS, 

By 


Manager. 

PHILADELPHIA  BOND  &  MORTGAGE  CO. 
Per  S.  M. 

A  woman,  writing  to  a  stranger,  should  prefix  to 
her  Signature  her  title,  "Mrs."  or  "Miss,"  in  marks 
of  parenthesis.  A  married  woman  may  use  her 
husband's  name  or  her  own  Christian  name,  in  the 
latter  case,  if  necessary  for  exact  identification,  plac- 
ing her  husband's  name  in  parenthesis  below  it,  or  at 
the  left-hand  margin  without  the  parenthesis. 

Mary  Blank 
(Mrs.  J.  W.  Blank.) 
Or  thus: 

Mary  Blank 
Mrs.  J.  W.  Blank. 

On  legal  documents  a  married  woman  always  signs 
her  Christian  name — "Mary  Blank." 

A  widow  should  sign,  in  all  cases,  her  own  Christian 
name — "Mrs.  Mary  Blank"  or  "Mary  Blank." 


THe  Superscription  13 

THE  SUPERSCRIPTION. 

The  SUPERSCRIPTION  is  the  direction  placed  upon 
the  envelope.  It  consists  of  the  name,  title,  and 
residence  or  post-office  address. 

The  name  should  be  placed  about  the  middle  of  the 
envelope,  leaving  equal  spaces  at  right  and  left,  top 
and  bottom.  Each  of  the  succeeding  lines  should 
begin  a  little  farther  to  the  right  than  the  preceding 
line,  the  State  occupying  the  lower  right-hand  corner. 
The  following  model  is  furnished  by  the  Post-Office 
Department  as  the  correct  form  of  address,  stamping 
and  return- card. 


AFTER   .    .    .    DAYS    KETURN   T 

JOHN  C.  SMITH 

146  STATE  ST. 
WILKESVILLE,  N.  Y. 


Mr.  Prank  B.  Jones, 

2416  Front  Street, 

Oswego, 
Ohio. 


If  the  post-office  is  a  large  city,  the  county  may  be 
omitted,  but  if  the  post-office  is  a  small  town  it  is 
safer  to  give  the  county. 

The  State  should  always  be  given,  even  in  the  case 
of  very  large  cities.  There  are  several  New  Yorks, 
Bostons,  and  Philadelphias  in  the  United  States. 


14  Letter-Writing 

If  the  person  addressed  have  no  official  or  profes- 
sional title,  the  common  title  "Mr."  or  "Esq.," 
"Mrs. "  or  "Miss"  should  be  given.  Even  business 
haste  does  not  excuse  its  omission. 

Prefix  the  abbreviation  "  Messrs. "  (never  "  Mess. ") 
to  firm  names,  but  not  to  corporation  names.  Firm 
names  may  be  distinguished  from  corporation  names 
by  the  fact  that  in  the  former  the  words  "  &  Company  " 
usually  follow  the  names  of  the  individuals;  as, 
"Smith,  Jones  &  Co."  In  corporation  names  the 
word  "and"  is  omitted,  and  often  the  name  begins 
with  "The";  as,  "The  Newark  Construction  Com- 
pany." Such  names  as  the  latter  should  never  have 
the  word  "Messrs."  prefixed. 

A  letter  to  a  person  acting  in  an  official  capacity 
should  bear  his  official  title  on  the  envelope;  as, 

Mr.  James  Kenney, 

Vice-President  C.B.  &  Q,.  R.R.  Co., 
Chicago , 

Illinois. 

The  first  word  of  each  line  of  the  address,  every 
other  important  word  and  all  the  abbreviations  should 
begin  with  a  capital  letter.  The  symbol  %  (care 
of)  is  properly  written  with  a  small  c. 

Do  not  write  "  To  "  before  the  name  on  the  envel- 
ope, except  before  a  title  beginning  with  "  The  "  or 
"His,"  as  in  the  following: 

To  His  Excellency, 

The  President  of  the  United  States. 

Do  not  write  "No."  before  the  street  number,  nor 
"P.  O. "  before  the  number  of  the  post-office  box. 
"20  Main  Street"  and  "Box  14"  is  sufficient. 


THe  Superscription  15 

Where  the  address  is  long,  requiring  several  lines, 
the  County  may  be  placed  in  the  lower  left-hand 
corner,  on  a  line  with  the  State. 


Adrian  Vanneman,  Jr.,  Esq., 
Box  176, 

Bloomington, 
Custer  County,          Tennessee. 


When  a  title  follows  a  name,  put  a  comma  between. 
Put  a  comma  after  each  line  of  the  address  except  the 
last.  The  comma  is  not  required  between  the  house 
number  and  the  name  of  the  street,  nor  between  the 
number  of  a  room  and  the  name  of  the  building, 
unless  the  word  "Room"  is  used  also.  The  following 
are  correct  forms: 

26  Amsterdam  Avenue;  37  World  Building;  Room 
37,  World  Building. 

Put  a  period  after  every  abbreviation  and  at  the 
end  of  the  complete  address. 

The  words  "General  Delivery"  or  "Transient," 
when  necessary,  may  be  put  in  the  lower  left-hand 
corner. 

Spell  the  avenues  and  streets  designated  by  num- 


16  Letter-Writing 

bers,  in  order  to  avoid  placing  two  numbers  in  juxta- 
position. Thus:  514  Fifth  Avenue,  not  514  5th 
Avenue. 

But  where  such  a  word  as  "North"  or  "East" 
intervenes  between  the  house  number  and  the  num- 
ber indicating  the  street,  the  street  name  may  be 
written  in  figures.  Thus:  514  North  i64th  Street. 

When  an  official  designation  accompanies  the  name, 
it  may,  if  short,  follow  the  name  on  the  same  line;  as, 

Mr.  James  Blank,  Cashier, 

76  Seventh  Avenue. 

On  a  square  envelope  the  address  sometimes  is 
placed,  with  good  effect,  in  the  form  of  an  inverted 
pyramid: 

Rev.    T.    H.    Houghton, 

25  State  Street, 

Cleveland, 

Ohio. 
Do  not  address  an  envelope  simply, 

John  Blank, 
City. 

The  postal  officials  and  clerks  prefer  the  name  in 
full. 

Avoid  abbreviations  as  far  as  possible,  except  of  ti- 
tles, and  especially,  do  not  abbreviate  names  of  cities. 

Letters  delivered  by  a  friend  or  acquaintance  should 
bear  upon  the  envelope  some  such  phrase  as  "Cour- 
tesy of  Mr.  Blank." 

It  is  no  longer  customary  to  put  "Present,"  or 
"Addressed"  on  the  envelope  in  lieu  of  the  address, 
when  a  letter  is  delivered  by  messenger. 


Letters  of  Introduction  17 

LETTERS  OF  INTRODUCTION. 

A  Letter  of  Introduction  is  one  introducing  a  friend 
or  acquaintance  to  an  acquaintance  who  is  absent. 

Such  letters  are  usually  delivered  in  person.  In 
this  case  the  envelope  is  left  unsealed,  and  the  name 
of  the  person  introduced  should  be  written  on  the 
lower  left-hand  corner. 

New  York,  Dec.  18,  1907. 
My  dear  Doctor: 

I  take  pleasure  in  introducing  to  you 
my  esteemed  friend,  Dr.  Thomas  Brooks, 
of  Portland,  Oregon.  Any  attention  you 
may  show  him  will  "be  gratefully  appre- 
ciated by 

Your  friend, 

John  M.  Elliott. 
Dr.  Andrew  H.  Sherman, 
176  Fourth  Avenue, 
Augusta,  Maine. 


Dr.  Andrew  H.  Sherman, 

176  Fourth  Avenue, 
Augusta, 
Maine 

Introducing  Dr.  Thomas  Brooks. 


18  Letter- Writing 

LETTERS  OF  RECOMMENDATION. 

Letters  of  Recommendation  are  of  two  kinds: 
those  addressed  to  an  individual  or  a  firm,  known  as 
special,  and  those  addressed  "To  Whom  It  May  Con- 
cern," known  as  general.  The  latter  often  begins 
with  "This  is  to  certify,"  and  may  close  with  the 
expression  "Very  respectfully, "  or  the  complimentary 
close  may  be  omitted. 

(Special  Letter  of  Recommendation.) 

New  York,  Aug.  27,  1911. 
Hon.  Charles  M.  Davis, 

150  Fifth  Avenue, 

New  York  City. 

Dear  Sir: 

It  gives  me  pleasure  to  recommend  to 
you  Mr.  M.  T.  Platt,  the  bearer  of  this, 
as  a  young  man  of  great  personal  worth. 

He  is  a  graduate  of  Harvard  Law 
School  and  is  seeking  employment  in  a 
law  office.   He  is  a  man  of  fine  family, 
high  moral  character  and  attractive 
social  qualities.   I  trust  you  will  be 
able  to  find  a  place  for  him  in  your 
office.   I  am  sure  you  will  find  him 
worthy  of  your  confidence. 

Very  truly  yours, 

B.  J.  Smith. 


Letters  of  Recommendation       19 

(General  Letter  of  Recommendation.") 

New  York,  May  26,  1911. 

TO  WHOM  IT  MAY  CONCERN: 

THIS  IS  TO  CERTIFY  that  the  "bearer, 
Mr.  Charles  Atwood,  has  "been  in  the  em- 
ployment of  this  Company  as  Department 
Manager  for  four  years.   His  services 
were  very  satisfactory.   Mr.  Atwood  is  a 
man  of  strict  integrity  and  great  devo- 
tion to  duty.   Because  of  his  son's 
illness  he  is  obliged  to  remove  to  a 
higher  altitude.   Any  one  desiring  a  man 
of  superior  managerial  ability  will  not 
be  disappointed  in  him. 

SANDERS,  GREENE  &  COMPANY. 


MODEL  FORMS. 
(Model  i) 

New  York,  May  18,  1909. 
Plena  v.  Sanchez. 

Jonas  Wilson,  Esq., 

35  Nassau  Street,  New  York. 
Dear  Sir: 

We  are  enclosing  proof  of  service  of 
the  demand  in  the  Olena  case.   If  you 
will  procure  your  order  to  show  cause 
to  punish  for  contempt  of  court  and  send 
it  to  us  we  will  see  that  it  also  is 
served. 

Very  truly  yours, 

WILLIAMS  &  WALKER. 
Die.  THW/FM/2  PM 
2  enclosures. 

(Model  2) 

New  York,  Nov.  6,  1909. 
Mr.  Warren  Johnson, 

Manager  Dept.  Maintenance  and  Constr. 
International  Paper  Company, 
30  Broad  Street,  New  York. 

Dear  Sir: — The  indications  are  that  the 

20 


Model  Forms  21 

structural  shops  and  mills  will  "be  con- 
gested during  the  year  1910  and,  desir- 
ing to  give  our  customers  the  "benefit  of 
our  experience,  we  wish  to  submit  to  you 
the  following 

PROPOSAL  OH  STRUCTURAL  STEEL  WORK. 

We  will  furnish  the  structural  steel 
and  iron  work  which  you  may  require 
during  the  year  1910,  consisting  of 
columns,  beams,  trusses,  struts  and  pur- 
lins, rafters  and  other  material  of  this 
character,  together  with  their  immediate 
fittings,  at  the  average  price  of  THREE 
AND  25/100  CTS.  per  pound ($.0325) 

(2nd  page) 
W  J  -  2 

DELIVERY  AND  PAYMENT. 

We  will  deliver  f.o.b.  cars  or 
lighter  our  Works,  Staten  Island,  and 
give  you  sixty  days. 

We  greatly  appreciate  your  busi- 
ness and  hope  for  its  continuance  on 
the  above  basis. 

Yours  very  truly, 

KLEIN  BROTHERS  &  COMPANY, 

By 

Contracting  Manager. 
Die.  WEB 


22  Letter- Writing 

(Model  j) 
Chicago,    111.,   May  14,    1909." 

Messrs.  Phillips  &  Hoyt, 
St.  Louis,  Mo. 
Gentlemen: 

We  acknowledge  receipt  of  your  let- 
ter of  May  12,  enclosing  copy  of  Judge 
Graham's  order  for  the  appointment  of 
a  guardian  ad  litem.   Thank  you  very 
much  for  your  prompt  attention  to  this 
matter. 

We  shall  now  go  ahead  and  prepare 
the  necessary  papers  for  our  action  and 
will  send  you  copies  as  soon  as  pre- 
pared. 

Very  truly  yours, 

JAMES  &  HILL. 

P.  S. — Can  you  not  get  another  copy 
of  the  order  that  we  may  hand  to  Mr. 
Wilson,  attorney  for  the  other  infant 
defendant? 

J.  &  H. 

(Model  4) 

New  York,  October  7,  1906. 
Mr. -D.  P.  Stone,  Architect, 
76  Broad  Street, 

Elizabeth,  N.  J. 
Dear  Sir: 

Referring  to 
CONTRACT  1798,  NATIONAL  POWER  HOUSE: 

We  acknowledge  receipt  of  your 
esteemed  favor  of  the  6th  inst.,  re- 


Model  Forms  23 

questing  a  more  detailed  statement  of 
our  account,  and  hand  you  the  same 
herewith: 

Brick $8150.00 

Broken  Stone  5267.75 

Sand  217.77 

Cement 499  .  50 

Wages,  including  handling  of 
material,  superintendence, 
watchmen,  etc  3739.95 

Miscellaneous,  including 
telephone,  car-fares,  ex- 
pressage,  freight,  special 
tools,  drafting,  transport- 
ing equipment,  repairs, 
etc 969.09 

Hauling,  Newark  Bay  Short 

Line.  175.50 


19,019.56 
Plus  lOg 901.96 

19,921.52 
Less  lOg  reservation 992.15 

Due $18,929.37 

for  which  we  respectfully  make  applica- 
tion for  payment. 

Yours  truly, 

ATLANTIC  CONSTRUCTION  CO. 

By 

Manager. 
Diet.  F.  Dick, 
CMJ:  2:30  P.M. 


24  Letter- Writing 

(Model  5) 
New  York,   December  29,    1907. 

CONTRACT  No.  1800-LAMBS1  CLUB. 

PROPOSAL  FOR  EXTRA  WORK. 

Messrs.  A.  R.  Whitsett  &  Co., 

127  Broadway,  New  York  City. 

Dear  Sirs: 

This  estimate  is  for  the  increase  in 
weight  of  Lintels  as  called  for  by  the 
Architect  in  his  recent  instructions 
over  the  Lintels  called  for  in  the  con- 
tract structural  plans. 

Detail  weight,  exclusive  of 
fourth  story  Lintels,  as 
per  Specifications 1984  Ibs. 

Weight  as  per  original  steel 
plans ,  including  fourth 
story 1000   " 


Making  an  increase  in  weight 

of 984   " 

Please  note  that  these  figures  do 
not  include  the  fourth  story  Lintels, 
which  have  not  "been  determined  on  up  to 
date.   Therefore,  the  fourth  story  Lin- 
tels will  "be  an  extra  for  the  full 
amount,  and  this  estimate  will  be  sent 
to  you  when  we" get  the  information. 
Very  truly  yours, 

BENISON  BROTHERS  &  CO. 

By 

Secretary. 


Model  Forms  25 

(Model  6) 

MEYERS  &  JOHNSON 
Contractors  and  Builders, 
317  Pine  Street 

St.  Louis,  May  9,  1911. 
No.  6867. 

The  Bell  Construction  Company, 

24  Broadway,  New  York  City. 

Gentlemen: 

Referring  to  our  letter  of  the  6th 
concerning  CONTRACT  1763,  CAR  PLANT,  ST. 
LOUIS,  we  have  to-day  wired  you  as 
follows : 

"Contract  1763,  Car  Plant,  St.  Louis. 
Stop  work  on  shutters.   Some  sizes 
increased.   There  will  be  no  loss  to 
us." 

We  enclose  herewith  a  copy  of  a 
letter  dated  March  1st  from  The  F.  T. 
Merrill  Construction  Company,  and  carbon 
copy  of  our  reply  of  even  date. 

You  can  proceed  with  the  work  of 
getting  out  the  four  new  shutters  and  of 
changing  the  four  shutters  R.S.2  to 
four  shutters  R.S.I  with  steel  frames 
for  the  wood-working  shop  unless  you 
hear  from  us  to  the  contrary  "by  wire. 

Very  truly  yours, 

MEYERS  &  JOHNSON, 
By 


Manager. 


26  Letter-Writing 

(Model  7) 

ARNOLD  BROTHERS  &  COMPANY 

Buil'ders. 
19  Broadway 

New  York,  April  30,  1910, 

The  Driscoll  Wrought  Iron  Company, 
50  Duane  Street,  New  York. 

Gentlemen: 

Please  furnish  for  account  of  this 
Company  the  following  items: 

Item 

No.  1.  20  galvanized  iron  floor 

flanges  screwed  for  1^"  W. 

I.  pipe  having  2  holes  in  a 

line  for  f"  "bolts. 

2.  20  galvanized  iron  90  '  floor 

flanges  screwed  for  1^"  W.L. 
pipe  and  having  2  holes  for  f" 
"bolts  within  the  90. 

3.  20  galvanized  iron  floor 

flanges  screwed  for  1^"  W.L. 

pipe  and  having  3  holes  for  §" 

"bolts. 

All  the  above  are  to  replace  those 
broken  in  transit.   The  above-described 
floor  flanges  were  found  most  brittle. 
You  will  understand  from  the  description 
what  is  required  and  pitch  of  bolt- 
holes  . 

PACKING.  To  be  well  packed  for  export. 


Model  Forms  27 

PACK.  L.   To  "be  sent  in  triplicate  at 
date  of  shipment  bearing 
gross  weights  and  dimensions 
of  each  package. 

INVOICE.   To  "be  sent  in  duplicate  at 
date  of  shipment,  bearing 
our  order  number  and  marks 
for  shipment. 
Very  truly  yours, 

ARNOLD  BROTHERS  &  COMPANY 

By 

Manager. 

(Model  8} 

New  York,  August  10,  1911. 
Messrs.  Manning,  Maxwell  &  Moore, 

45  State  Street,  Chicago. 
Gentlemen: 

We  have  a  letter  from  your  company 
signed  by  Mr.  Jose  de  Mere,  in  relation 
to  the  Crane  billed  on  July  3rd,  but  up 
to  this  writing  we  have  not  received  the 
O.K. 'd  bill. 

Our  Superintendent,  Mr.  Max  von 
Arnim,  will  be  in  your  city  on  Monday 
next  and  will  call  at  your  office.   We 
suggest  that  your  Mr.  De  Mere  confer 
with  Mr.  Von  Arnim  with  the  view  of 
straightening  out  this  matter. 
Very  truly  yours, 

NARLOR  CONSTRUCTION  COMPANY 

By . 

Secretary. 
Diet.  F.  Greer, 
2:35  -  J. 


28  Letter-Writing 

FORMS  SHOWING  ARRANGEMENT  OF 
SUBJECTS  AND  ITEMS 

MERRIWETHER  BRIDGE  COMPANY 

21  Broadway, 

New  York. 

May  26,  1912. 
Mr.  J.  B.  Knight, 

Bridge  Engineer  L.  I.  R.R.  Co. 

Jamaica,  N.  Y. 
Dear  Sir: 

CONTRACT  1764:  PARK  RIDGE  IMPROVEMENT: 

We  acknowledge  receipt  of  your  favor  of  May  24th 
in  relation  to  our  bills  for  bridges  at  West  Third 
Street  and  Gravesend  Avenue  and  our  application 
for  payment  dated  January  3ist  last. 

GRAVESEND  AVENUE: 

We  regret  there  should  have  been  an  error  in  weight 
in  our  bill  for  material  under  Class  I. 

We  therefore  enclose  corrected  bill  showing  weight 
of  material  under  Class  I  as  26,298  Ibs.  We  give 
you  the  details  of  same  as  follows: 

4  Web  Plates  22"  x  &*  x  32'  —  8f" 4387 

16  "  Angles  6x  6  x  5  x  32  —  8f 10521 

8  Cover  Plates  14"  x  &*  x  21'  —  o* 4608 

32  Stiff  Angles  4"  x  3^"  x  f* 528 

32  Fillers  3^"  x  \»  x  o'  —  10* 164 

Rivet  Heads 687 

20895 
Very  truly  yours, 

MERRIWETHER  BRIDGE  CO. 

By 


Model  Forms  29 

MINTURN  BROTHERS,  INC., 

II  Broadway, 

New  York. 

January  31,  1910. 

Mr.  Duncan  Olcott, 

Manager  Keller  Elevator  Co., 

Yonkers,  N.  Y. 
Dear  Sir: 

CONTRACT     1778:    FINISHING   WORK    KELLER    MA- 
CHINE SHOP: 

APPLICATION  FOR  PAYMENT: 

We   have   performed   work   during  the  month  of 
January  as  follows : 

Wages $7931 . 52 

E.  and  L.  M.  Sanders,  Bill  of  Jan.    2  '09 100. 10 

Yonkers  Warehouse  Co.       "     Feb.  10  '09 162 . 06 

Adams,  Wilson  &  Co.            "    Feb.  1 1  '09 52 . 35 

Lawrence  Bros.                    "    Feb.  14  '09 10.00 

Twine  &  Beck,                     "    May    i  '09 20.25 

H.  L.  Shannon,                     "    May  16  '09 15-15 

Freight  and  cartage 2.35 

$8293.78 

for   which  we    respectfully    make    application    for 
payment. 
We  shall  greatly  appreciate  your  prompt  attention. 

Very  truly  yours, 

MINTURN  BROTHERS,  INC. 

By 

Secretary. 

Diet.  F.  Mark, 
Mel:  J:3P.M. 


3O  Letter-Writing 

BILLS. 

Bills  are  generally  made  up  :>n  printed  bill-heads 
in  a  style  similar  to  the  following: 

New  York,  August  1,  1911. 

WILLIAM  STEWART  &  CO. 

to  METROPOLITAN  CONSTRUCTION  CO.  Dr. 

To  the  following  charges  on  account 
of  the  Commercial  Building,  Wall 
and  New  Streets: 
1911 

June  22,  45  Cement  sacks  des- 
troyed, at  10^,      $  4.50 
Cutting  off  angle  in 
Main  Corridor,  Ground 
Floor,  14  hours 
Ironworker  at  56|^,     7.88 
La~bor  on  iron  work  on 
ceiling  of  Main  Base- 
ment Aug.  30  &  31, 
32  hours  at  56|/,      18.00 
Work  on  angle  irons  in 
Main  Hall 'Elevator, 
Sept.  2,  5,  6  &  7, 
56  hours  at  56^,      31.50 

$63.68 
Received  payment 


Letters  to  Women  31 

RECEIPT. 

New  York,  May  23,  1911. 
RECEIVED  from  George  Moore  Five  hun- 
dred and  ten  dollars  ($510)  in  full  of 
account  to  date. 

JOHNSON  &  MEYERS, 

Per 

Manager. 

(Note  that  from,  not  of,  is  the  proper  word  to 
follow  Received.) 


LETTERS  TO  WOMEN. 

How  to  address  a  firm  composed  of  women;  how 
to  address  a  young  lady — whether  to  call  her  "Dear 
Madam"  or  "Dear  Miss  Blank,"  or  to  omit  the  salu- 
tation altogether;  whether  to  address  a  married  lady 
by  her  husband's  title  or  to  limit  her  to  his  bare  initials 
— these  are  often  puzzling  questions;  and,  to  make 
the  matter  more  complicated,  authorities  do  not 
wholly  agree  in  their  effort  to  settle  it. 

Century  Dictionary  says,  "Madam is  a  conventional 
term  of  address  to  women  of  any  degree. " 

Raub  says  that  "Madam"  is  the  proper  form  of 
address  in  letters  to  married  women  and  elderly  un- 
married women,  and  intimates  that  it  may  be  applied 
with  propriety  to  young  unmarried  women.  Some 
authorities  recommend  the  omission  of  the  salutation 
in  a  letter  to  a  young  unmarried  woman  who  is  a 
stranger  to  the  writer.  Such  omission,  however, 


32  Letter- Writing 

seems  unnecessary,  and  certainly  is  not  in  accord 
with  modern  business  methods. 

As  we  have  no  proper  English  plural  for  the  word 
"  Madam"  with  which  to  address  two  or  more  women, 
or  a  firm  of  women,  we  must  borrow  from  the  French 
the  plural  "Mesdames." 


Models  for  the   Introduction   in   Letters  to   Married 
Women. 

(Model  p.) 

Mrs.  John  W.  Smith, 

New  York,  N.  Y. 

Dear  Madam:  (or,  My  dear  Mrs.  Smith:) 
Your  letter,  etc. 

(Model  jo.) 

Mrs.   Mary  S.    Smith, 
117  Broadway, 

Hew  York  City. 
My  dear  Madam: 

(Model  ii.) 
(To  a  Firm) 

Mesdames  Smith  &  Jones, 
117  Broadway, 

New  York  City. 
Ladies : 


Letters  to  Women  33 

Models  for  the  Introduction  of  Business  Letters  to 
Unmarried  Women. 

(Model  12.) 

Miss  Mary  Blank, 

Chicago,  111. 
Dear  Miss  Blank: 

(Model  ij.) 

Miss  Mary  Blank, 

Chicago,  111. 
My  dear  Miss  Blank: 

When  one  of  the  last  two  forms  is  used,  it  is  well  to 
put  the  address  at  the  close  of  the  letter,  commencing 
it  with  the  salutation,  as  follows: 

My  dear  Miss  Blank: 

Your  letter,  etc. 

Very  truly  yours, 

James  K.  Robinson. 
Miss  Mary  Blank, 
Chicago,  111. 

(Model  14.) 

Miss  Mary  Blank, 

Chicago,  111. 
Dear  Madam: 

When  it  is  not  known  whether  the  lady  is  married 
or  single,  write: 

(Model  75.) 

Mary  Blank, 

Chicago,    111. 
Dear  Madam: 


34  Letter- Writing 

(Model  16.) 
(To  a  Firm) 

Misses  Smith  &  Jones, 

Chicago,  111. 
Ladies: 

Note  that  "  Dear  Miss  "  is  not  good  form  and  should 
not  be  used  without  the  surname. 

The  following  are  the  appropriate  salutations  for 
business  letters  to  women: 

Salutations  for  Married  Women. 

(Singular)  (Plural) 

Dear  Madam  (formal)         \ 
My  dear  Madam  (more  formal)  > Ladies. 
Madam  (most  formal) 

Proper  Forms  of  Salutation  in  Addressing  Unmarried 
Women. 

(Singular)  (Plural) 

Dear  Miss  Blank:  }   (formal) 
or 

Dear  Madam: 

My  dear  Miss  Blank:  \  (more      h Ladies: 
or        V  formal) 

My  dear  Madam: 

Miss  Mary  Blank:   (most  formal) 

In  a  letter  to  a  man  and  a  woman  the  salutation 
is, 

Dear  Sir  and  Madam: 


Letters  to  Women  35 

A  woman  who  is  a  physician  may  be  addressed: 

Mary  Blank,    :.I.D. 

or 
Dr.   Mary  Blank: 

One  entitled  to  a  scholastic  degree: 
Prof.    Mary  Blank 
or 

Prof.    Mary  Blank,    A.M.,    Ph.D. 

As  to  Affixing  a  Husband's  Title  to  a  Wife's  Name. 

Some  authorities  say  that  when  a  method  of  exact 
identification  is  necessary  it  is  correct  to  affix  to  a  mar- 
ried woman's  name  the  honorary  or  professional  title 
of  her  husband,  as  Mrs.  General  Grant,  Mrs.  Dr.  Smith. 
Nevertheless,  modern  usage  is  opposed  to  this  prac- 
tice. The  better  form  is  to  omit  her  husband's  title 
in  addressing  or  referring  to  a  married  woman. 

In  writing  to  the  head  of  a  Catholic  institution, 
as,  for  example,  the  Sisters  of  Charity,  the  salutation 
is  (after  giving  the  name  in  religion,  if  known), 
"Reverend  Mother. " 

"Dear  Sister"  is  the  correct  salutation  in  address- 
ing a  Sister  of  Charity,  or  a  Sister  of  any  similar 
order.  Thus: 

Sister  Angela, 

Academy  of  the  Sacred  Heart, 

Milwaukee,  Wis. 
Dear  Sister: 

The  members  of  the  order  of  the  Ladies  of  the 
Sacred  Heart  are  addressed  and  spoken  of  as 
"Madame." 


GENERAL  REMARKS. 

THINGS  TO  BE  NOTICED. 

Letters  and  all  typewritten  matter  should  be  free 
from  erasures,  interlineations,  alterations,  or  finger 
marks. 

When  but  one  copy  of  a  letter  or  other  document  is 
to  be  made,  insert  a  heavy  sheet  of  paper  between  the 
letter-head  and  the  typewriter  roller.  This  protects 
the  roller  from  indentation  by  the  type  and  improves 
the  appearance  of  the  writing  in  case  the  roller  is  old 
or  not  smooth. 

Leave  a  margin  of  at  least  an  inch  at  the  left  and 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  at  the  right  of  the  page, 
except  on  very  narrow  sheets. 

Do  not  crowd  the  lines  close  to  the  top  or  bottom 
of  the  sheet.  Allow  an  inch  and  a  half  or  more  at 
the  top  and  at  least  an  inch  at  the  bottom. 

Write  on  but  one  side  of  the  paper. 

Addresses  that  occupy  only  three  lines  may  be 
double  or  single  spaced  according  to  fancy.  It  is 
neater  to  single-space  addresses  of  more  than  three 
lines. 

Do  not  divide  a  syllable  at  the  end  of  a  line. 

Paragraphs  may  be  indented  five,  eight  or  ten 
spaces.  Usage  varies  in  regard  to  this.  Five  spaces 
where  the  paragraphs  are  many  and  the  lines  short. 

36 


THings  to  be  Noticed  37 

Sentences  closely  related  should  not  be  put  into 
separate  paragraphs  unless  it  is  desired  to  call  particu- 
lar attention  to  each  point.  This  usage  is  general. 

Except  in  reports,  tabulations  and  like  financial 
documents,  a  sentence  should  not  begin  with  figures. 
For  instance,  write  "One  hundred  men  camped  near 
the  river,"  not  "100  men  camped  near  the  river." 

Use  figures  for  dates,  sums  of  money,  measurements, 
in  tabulated  and  statistical  matter  and  wherever  the 
abbreviation  "No."  is  used  for  "number." 

Letters  concerning  one's  own  affairs,  written  to 
strangers  or  mere  acquaintances,  and  requiring  an 
answer,  should  have  enclosed  a  stamp  for  return 
postage;  better  still,  a  stamped  envelope. 

Postal  cards  do  not  require  the  salutation  or  com- 
plimentary close. 

Signature  lines  should  not  be  placed  on  letters. 

Signature  lines  should  be  placed  on  legal  documents. 

Signature  lines  should  be  made  by  the  underscore- 
mark. 

When  making  signature  lines  or  underlining  words, 
keep  turning  the  ribbon.  This  ensures  an  even, 
smooth  line.  Display  words  are  sometimes  under- 
lined in  red.  This  may  be  done  with  ink,  red  carbon, 
or  a  red  ribbon. 

Where  there  are  more  signature  lines  than  one, 
leave  three  single  spaces  between  them. 

Never  write  "Gents."  instead  of  "Gentlemen" 
nor  "Mess."  for  "Messrs." 

Use  the  symbol  &  only  in  firm  names  and  in  tabu- 
lations where  space  is  limited,  and  combined  with 
the  letter  "c"  for  "and  so  forth." 

Foreign  names  containing  the  syllables  de,  von, 
etc.,  are  written  as  follows:  Max  van  der  Pals, 


428977 


38  Letter- Writing 

Adam  de  la  Halle,  Henry  von  Arnim.  But  when  the 
family  name  directly  follows  Mr.  the  first  syllable  is 
capitalized:  Mr.  Van  der  Pals,  Mr.  La  Halle,  Mr. 
Von  Arnim.  (See  Model  8.) 

TO  MAKE  SYMBOLS  AND  PUNCTUATION  MARKS. 

By  holding  down  the  space  bar,  different  charac- 
ters may  be  made  by  striking  one  type  over  another. 

To  make  the  cent  sign,  hold  down  space  bar,  strike 
small  c  and  the  oblique  line  over  it,  £. 

Exclamation  point,  hold  down  space  bar  and  strike 
the  period  and  the  apostrophe. 

Sign  of  division,  strike  colon  and  hyphen. 

Sign  of  pounds  sterling,  strike  capital  L  and  the 
hyphen  over  it,  £. 

Sign  of  equality,  strike  hyphen,  depress  shift 
slightly  and  strike  hyphen  again  immediately  under 
the  first. 

Apostrophe  (')  indicates  minutes,  feet. 

Quotation-marks  ("),  seconds,  inches,  ditto. 

Small  o,  slightly  elevated  (°),  degrees. 

Two  hyphens  (--),  a  dash. 

Small  x,  multiplication. 

The  oblique  line  (/)  is  combined  in  many  ways: 
2/6,  2  shillings,  6  pence;  a/c,  account;  B/L,  bill  of 
lading;  c/o,  care  of;  L/C,  letter  of  credit. 

SPACING  AFTER  PUNCTUATION. 

After  period,  exclamation  point,  interrogation,  that 
is,  between  sentences,  two  spaces;  three  are  permis- 
sible. After  a  period  following  an  abbreviation  or 
initial,  one  space.  After  a  colon  or  semicolon,  one 


Envelopes,  Cards  39 

space.  After  a  comma,  one  space.  No  space  be- 
tween the  dash  and  the  word  which  precedes  or  the 
one  which  follows  it. 

ENVELOPES,  CARDS,  ETC. 

Press  the  envelope  firmly  to  the  cylinder  by  mov- 
ing the  envelope  clamps  toward  the  centre.  If  the 
envelope  is  not  held  firmly  the  work  will  be  blurred. 
"Shadowgraphs"  of  rubber,  with  an  opening  large 
enough  for  only  one  letter,  can  be  obtained  for  use 
in  writing  on  envelopes  and  other  uneven  surfaces. 

To  bring  the  name  in  the  center  of  the  envelope, 
insert  until  only  the  lower  edge  remains  visible  at  the 
back  of  the  cylinder. 

Insert  envelopes,  postal  cards  and  narrow  paper 
on  the  right  side  of  the  machine  and  fix  firmly  to  place 
by  the  clamps. 

Press  to  cylinder  with  thumb  when  spacing  for  line. 

When  the  same  matter  is  to  be  written  upon  a 
number  of  cards,  first  write  it  upon  paper  to  ascertain 
the  space  it  will  fill.  Place  the  card  upon  the  sheet 
of  paper,  mark  around  it  with  a  pencil  and  write  the 
matter  within  the  enclosed  space. 

FOLDING. 

Fold  the  bottom  of  the  sheet  to  within  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  of  the  top,  then  fold  from  right  to  left  and 
from  left  to  right  to  fit  the  envelope. 

MANIFOLDING. 

By  the  use  of  carbon  paper  duplicate  copies  of  the 
same  writing  are  made  at  the  same  time,  the  number  of 
copies  depending  upon  the  thickness  of  the  paper  used. 


40  Letter- Writing 

Upon  the  sheet  upon  which  the  writing  is  to  be 
done  lay  a  sheet  of  semi-carbon  paper,  the  face  or 
carbonized  surface  downward.  On  this  lay  another 
sheet  of  writing-paper  and  so  on  until  the  requisite 
number  are  laid.  Put  the  whole  in  the  machine  in 
the  usual  way,  even  and  straight,  with  the  carbon 
side  facing  from  the  operator  and  toward  the  cylinder. 
Write  in  the  ordinary  way,  tapping  the  keys  with  a 
little  more  force  than  usual.  If  the  carbon  copies  are 
dim  or  blurred  the  cause  is  either  worn  carbons  or 
warped  cylinder. 

To  make  erasures  on  carbon  work  in  the  machine, 
turn  the  paper  forward  or  backward,  separate  the 
sheets  and  place  a  stiff  card  or  the  tin  shield  furnished 
for  the  purpose  back  of  the  first  sheet,  erase  and 
continue  in  the  same  way  with  the  other  sheets ;  turn 
the  paper  back  to  position  and  make  the  corrections. 

After  the  sheets  have  been  taken  from  the  machine 
corrections  are  best  made  on  the  carbon  copies  by 
placing  a  piece  of  carbon  paper  on  the  ribbon  before 
writing  in  the  corrections.  This  will  make  the  cor- 
rection less  visible. 

Carbons  while  in  place  in  the  machine  should  be 
handled  very  little,  as  the  sheets  are  likely  to  wrinkle 
and  mar  the  written  page  with  lines  and  blurs. 

LETTER-PRESS  COPYING. 

1.  Have  a  number  of  cloths  the  size  of  the  leaves 
of  the  letter-book  dampened  uniformly. 

2.  Place  a  sheet  of  oiled  pasteboard  on  the  left 
side  of  the  open  letter-book.     Upon  this  oil  sheet 
place  one  of  the  damp  cloths. 

3.  Place  the  tissue  leaf  of  the  letter-book  over 
the  damp  cloth. 


Substance  of  Letters  41 

4.  Lay  the  letter,  face  down,  on  the  tissue  leaf. 

5.  Lay  another  oil  sheet  on  the  back  of  the  letter, 
place  a  damp  cloth  on  the  oil  sheet,  put  another  tissue 
leaf  of  the  book  over  the  damp  cloth,  then  another 
letter,  face  down,  then  another  oil  sheet,  another  damp 
cloth,  another  leaf,  another  letter,  and  so  on  until  all 
the  letters  are  in  the  book. 

6.  Place  an  oil  board  over  the  last  damp  cloth  to 
protect  the  rest  of  the  book. 

7.  Close  the  book  and  place  it  under  pressure. 
Typewritten  letters  should  be  left  under  pressure 
about    two    minutes.     Pen-written    letters    copy  in 
less  than  half  a  minute. 

On  taking  the  letters  out,  place  dry  blotters  between 
the  damp  pages  of  the  letter-book. 


AS  TO  THE  SUBSTANCE  OF  LETTERS. 

"Good  letter-writing  is  one  of  the  mainsprings  of 
business." 

Chesterfield  said  that  a  well-written  letter  has 
opened  the  way  to  prosperity  for  many  a  one.  It  is 
certain  that  well-written  letters  open  the  way  to 
prosperity  for  stenographers. 

The  following  remarks  are  intended  for  those  who  are 
entrusted  with  the  writing  and  the  revising  of  letters. 


Never  waste  time  in  more  compliments  than  are 
demanded  by  the  common  courtesy  due  from  one 
man  to  another. 

Never  say  anything  that  has  nothing  to  do  with 
the  subject. 


42  Letter- Writing 

Always  say  all  that  the  subject  really  requires  and 
say  that  clearly. 

Commence  with  the  most  important  subject  of 
your  letter. 

Do  not  close  a  letter  to  a  stranger  with  "I  remain, 
Very  truly  yours, "  but  with  "  I  am,  Very  truly  yours, " 
if  such  form  of  closing  be  deemed  desirable.  "I 
remain"  is  correct  only  where  there  has  been  previous 
correspondence. 

A  note  in  the  third  person  should  not  have  the 
writer's  name  attached. 

The  reply  to  a  note  in  the  third  person  should  also 
be  in  the  third  person. 

The  reply  to  a  letter  or  note  written  in  the  first 
person  should  invariably  be  in  the  first  person. 

The  answer  to  a  joint  note  of  invitation  from  a 
husband  and  wife  or  from  several  members  of  a  family 
should  contain  an  allusion  to  all.  But  the  envelope 
should  be  addressed  to  the  senior  only,  or  to  the  wife 
alone,  if  in  the  name  of  a  husband  and  wife. 


TIME-SAVING  EXPEDIENTS. 

"  To  save  time  is  to  lengthen  life" 

Many  business  houses  allow  the  use  of  certain 
well-tried  and  unmistakable  time-saving  expedients. 
These  special  forms  must  be  learned  and  used  by  the 
stenographer  in  conformity  with  the  custom  of  the 
house.  Innovations  should  be  cautiously  tested 
before  being  generally  used. 

It  should  be  borne  in  mind  that  these  short  forms 
are  not  to  be  used  in  general  correspondence  nor  in 
legal  or  formal  documents,  but  are  adapted  only  to 
papers  passing  between  the  various  branches  of  one 
business,  the  various  departments  of  a  railroad  or 
other  corporation,  and  the  like. 

The  following  are  brief  forms  in  most  general  use: 

Ordinal  endings  on  dates  are  dropped. 

No  punctuation  in  addresses. 

Addresses  put  in  two  lines  unless  very  long. 
S  T  Jameson  Esq 
Denver  Colo 

The  period  omitted  after  abbreviations  and  con- 
tractions; as,  "Your  letter  of  5th  inst  reed";  5  bu 
3  pks;  8  ft  7  in.  Abbreviations  in  constant  use 
written  without  spacing  or  punctuation:  AM,  PM, 
am,  pm;  COD,  cod;  fob  (free  on  board);  cif  (cost, 
insurance  and  freight);  Icl  (less  than  carload); 
rpm  (revolutions  per  minute);  P/T  (private  terms); 
B/L  (bill  of  lading);  S/S  or  SS  (steamship;  as,  SS 

43 


44          Time-Saving  Expedients 

SYRIA);  B/P  (blue-print);  HP,  hp  (horse-power); 
CP  cp  (candle-power);  RR  (railroad).  So  also  the 
initials  of  a  railroad  are  written  without  punctuation : 
as,  N  Y  C  &  H  R  RR  (New  York  Central  &  Hudson 
River  Railroad). 

The  quotation  mark  (")  designates  inches,  the 
apostrophe  (')  designates  feet;  thus,  6'  5". 

Small  0  slightly  elevated  designates  degrees:  7°. 

FLAGGING. 

It  is  sometimes  necessary,  in  the  course  of  dictation, 
to  turn  back  a  few  pages  and  insert  a  paragraph,  or  a 
series  of  paragraphs,  at  a  given  point  on  a  page  of 
notes.  Where  there  is  not  room  to  write  this  addi- 
tional matter  on  the  margin  of  the  page  on  which  it 
is  to  be  inserted,  some  writers  make  a  "flag"  at  the 
point  of  insertion  and  place  a  figure  upon  it,  thus: 

P,  then  turn  to  a  blank  page  and  write  the  notes 
to  be  inserted,  making  a  similar  flag,  bearing 
the  same  number,  at  the  beginning  of  the  inserted 
paragraph  and  also  at  its  close,  or  else  indicating  the 
close  in  some  other  unmistakable  manner.  This 
method  is  called  "flagging." 

Instead  of  the  flag,  it  is  easier  to  make  the  caret, 
placing  the  figure  above  it,  thus  %,  the  same  symbol 
being  placed  at  the  beginning  and  the  close  of  the 
inserted  matter.  When  more  than  one  insertion  is 
made,  each  set  of  symbols  must  bear  a  different 
number. 

RIDERS 

A  Rider  is  a  separate  piece  of  writing  or  print  added 
to  a  manuscript,  proof-sheet,  or  other  document 


Riders  45 

It  is  marked  by  an  identifying  letter  or  figure  in  the 
upper  left-hand  corner,  as  "Rider  I,"  or  "Rider A, 
page  5, "  and  is  pasted  or  pinned  to  the  page  to  which 
it  is  an  addition,  on  which  page  is  also  placed,  at  the 
proper  point,  the  same  identifying  mark. 


FIGURES  AND   SIGNS. 


ARABIC  AND  ROMAN  NUMERALS. 


Arabic  Roman    Arabic     Roman    Arabic     Roman 


I 

2 

3 
4 
5 
6 

7 
8 

9 
10 
ii 


Lower  case  /  makes  the  Arabic  figure  one.  Capi- 
tal 0  makes  zero.  Capital  I  makes  Roman  one. 

Roman  characters  are  used  to  indicate  the  chapter 
in  Scriptural  references,  Arabic  numerals  to  indicate 
the  verse.  Luke  XII,  10-14. 

Small  letters  may  be  used  in  the  Roman  notation. 
Luke  xii,  10,  14. 

A  period  is  usually  placed  after  the  Roman  charac- 
ters, though  in  the  business  world  this  custom  is 
falling  into  disuse. 

Do  not  begin  a  sentence  with  figures  or  symbols. 
,  46 


XII 

50 

L 

XIII 

60 

LX 

XIV 

70 

LXX 

XV 

80 

LXXX 

XVI 

90 

XC 

XVII 

IOO 

C 

XVIII 

200 

cc 

XIX 

500 

D 

XX 

600 

DC 

XXX 

IOOO 

M 

XL 

1500 

MD 

Figures  and  Signs  47 

Do  not  bring  together  two  groups  of  figures;  as, 
"In  1900,  17,000  bales  of  cotton  were  shipped  from 
Atlanta."  Change  the  construction  to  "Seventeen 
thousand  bales  of  cotton  were  shipped  from  Atlanta 
in  1900";  or,  "In  1900  there  were  shipped  from  At- 
lanta 17,000  bales  of  cotton." 

Write  660  Seventh  Avenue,  not  660  7th  Avenue. 

Use  figures  in  statistical  tables,  measurements, 
reports,  etc. 

"The  house  is  40  by  80  (or  40  x  80)  ft.'* 
" Three  2o-lb.  beams." 

When  the  contraction  No.  precedes  it,  a  numeral 
should  always  be  expressed  by  figures;  as,  No.  29. 

Never  use  figures  in  expressions  like  the  following: 
"More  than  a  hundred  men  witnessed  the  race." 
"He  won  by  less  than  a  thousand  votes." 

When  round  numbers  are  used  and  no  comparison 
is  made  between  one  sum  and  another,  words  are 
generally  used  instead  of  figures.  "The  population 
of  the  United  States  is  said  to  be  more  than  ninety 
millions." 

In  all  important  documents,  especially  those  of  a 
legal  nature,  sums  of  money  and  numbers  should  be 
spelled,  followed  by  figures  in  marks  of  parenthesis. 
The  word  "dollars"  should  precede  the  parenthesis, 
not  follow  it;  as,  "Five  hundred  dollars  ($500)  was 
the  price  paid. " 

In  writing  numbers  and  sums  of  money  in  legal  or 
commercial  documents,  capitalize  the  first  word  only ; 
as,  "The  price  paid  was  Seventeen  thousand  dollars 
($17,000)."  The  capital  may  properly  be  omitted. 

When  numbers  are  expressed  in  words,  commas 
need  not  separate  the  parts.  "Four  thousand  eight 
hundred  fifty." 


48  Figures  and  Sigfns 

The  method  of  writing  cents  varies.  The  more 
usual  and  popular  form  is  the  character  £  or  simply 
c.  Thus,  3f*  or  30;  3^c.  In  this  case  use  no  decimal 
point.  Never  write  it  $  .03  except  in  bills  or 
tabulations  where  the  position  renders  the  meaning 
obvious. 

A  newspaper  rule  is,  "Spell  out  numbers  under 
loo,"  but  in  typewriting  the  general  custom  is  to 
spell  numbers  under  10. 

In  a  series  of  numbers  under  10,  use  figures;  as, 
"We  return  you  to-day  samples  Nos.  4,  6,  8  and 

9-" 

Ordinal  numbers  are  spelled,  except  in  dates. 
"On  the  General's  orders  the  fifteenth  man  was 
accepted."  "On  June  23rd  we  shipped  you  100 
chairs. " 

Ordinal  numbers  expressed  by  figures  and  letters 
do  not  require  a  period  except  at  the  end  of  the  sen- 
tence; 2  ist,  1 2th,  3rd. 

Double  numbers  up  to  100,  expressed  in  words, 
require  a  hyphen;  as,  twenty-five;  one  hundred 
sixty-five. 

Fractions  expressed  in  words  require  a  hyphen: 
one-half;  four  twenty-fifths. 

Fractions  standing  alone  are  spelled  out,  except 
in  specifications,  tabulations  and  the  like. 

1-ut  a  space  or  a  hyphen  between  a  whole  number 
and  a  fraction,  unless  the  machine  has  the  fractional 
form:  4  %,  4-^. 

A  hyphen  between  numbers  of  pages  or  other  ob- 
jects means  that  all  intervening  numbers  are  included ; 
pages  54-65  means  all  pages  from  54  to  65  inclusive. 
A  comma  between  these  numbers  limits  them  to  the 
two  pages  mentioned.  The  phrase  "pages  54,  65," 


Figures  and  Signs  49 

means  that  only  the  two  pages  specifically  named  are 
to  be  considered.  "Pages  54-65,  80,  90,  94-98" 
includes  both  methods. 

Ordinarily,  numbers  used  as  names  of  streets, 
districts,  wards,  and  the  like,  should  be  spelled.  In 
the  Tenth  Ward;  Twenty-fourth  Street;  the  Fourth 
of  July;  eleven  o'clock. 

In  such  expressions  as  9:30  A.M.,  figures  are  used. 

Separate  hours  from  minutes  by  a  colon. 

In  giving  dimensions,  x  .may  be  used  instead  of  the 
word  by;  as,  "The  lot  is  125  x  90  ft." 

In  statistical  tables,  measurements,  etc.,  signs 
for  feet  and  inches  may  be  used.  "The  house  is 
40' 6"  x  30' 6"." 

The  signs  %,  #,  $,  @  jf;  and  abbreviations  like 
ft.,  No.,  in.,  should  not  be  used  without  figures; 
thus,  10%,  not  ten  %;  No.  12,  not  No.  twelve;  several 
pounds  of  iron,  not  several  Ibs.  of  iron. 

There  should  be  no  space  between  the  signs  $,  #, 
%,  i  and  the  figure. 

Space  between  @  and  the  figures  between  which  it 
stands. 

Ai,  used  as  an  adjective,  has  no  space  between 
letter  and  figure,  and  no  period  after. 

When  the  whole  number  is  spelled,  the  fraction 
accompanying  should  be  spelled. 

In  tabulations,  bills,  accounts,  statements,  etc., 
the  signs  for  dollars,  number,  at,  etc.,  should  not  be 
repeated.  The  appearance  of  the  sign  at  the  head  of 
the  column  is  sufficient.  The  dollar  sign  is  repeated 
in  the  total. 

Where  there  are  many  figures  in  a  column  the 
omission  of  the  comma  and  the  decimal  point  improves 
the  appearance  of  the  page.  In  the  following  tabu- 


5O  Figures  and  Signs 

lations,  note  the  clearness  and  simplicity  of  the  first 
one: 

Sept. 


Sept. 


16 

IOO 

#16 

Hammers 

© 

$i 

60 

$160 

oo 

18 

50 

14 

Chisels 

2 

oo 

IOO 

oo 

21 

25 

7 

Drills 

3 

50 

87 

50 

25 

IO 

9 

Picks 

3 

00 

30 

oo 

27 

IOO 

3 

Locks 

I 

25 

125 

00 

29 

90 

2 

Hinges 

i 

oo 

90 

00 

$592 

50 

16, 

IOO 

#16 

Hammers 

@. 

$i 

.60 

$160. 

00 

18, 

50 

#14 

Chisels 

© 

2 

.00 

IOO. 

oo 

21, 

25 

#  7 

Drills 

© 

3 

.50 

87. 

50 

25, 

IO 

#9 

Picks 

© 

3 

.00 

30. 

oo 

27, 

IOO 

#  3 

Locks 

@ 

i 

•25 

125. 

oo 

89, 

90 

#  2 

Hinges 

@ 

i 

.00 

90. 

oo 

12.50 


THE  POSSESSIVE  CASE. 

The  sign  of  the  possessive  case  is  the  apostrophe 
and  5  ('s).  In  some  instances  the  5  is  dropped  and 
the  apostrophe  used  alone,  as  when  a  plural  noun 
ends  in  s. 

Examples:  Henry's  book;  men's  lives;  birds'  nests. 

The  apostrophe  alone,  without  the  additional  s, 
is  sometimes  used  in  the  singular  number,  when  the 
noun  ends  in  a  sibilant  (as  s,  c,  or  x),  to  avoid  bringing 
together  too  many  hissing  sounds;  as,  "Moses' 
law,"  "for  righteousness'  sake,"  "for  conscience' 
sake,"  "the  executrix'  sale."  The  best  authorities 
sanction  the  use  of  both  forms,  and  it  is  entirely 
correct  to  write  "Moses's  law,"  "Burns's  poems." 

If  the  omission  of  5  from  the  possessive  singular 
cause  ambiguity,  it  should  invariably  be  added;  as, 
"the  fox's  tail"  (not  "the  fox'  tail"). 

Plural  nouns  ending  in  s  take  the  apostrophe  alone ; 
as,  "bees'  wings,"  "ladies'  hats." 

The  apostrophe  is  not  used  with  pronouns  to  denote 
possession. 

Examples:  Its,  yours,  his,  theirs,  hers,  etc.,  not  it's,  your's,  etc. 

In  compound  nouns  the  sign  of  the  possessive  is 
added  to  the  last  word  only. 

Examples:  My  brother-in-law's  house;  the  heir-at-law's  right. 
51 


52  THe  Possessive  Case 

The  possessive  form  for  a  firm  is,  "Smith  &  Jones's 
store,"  "Brown  &  Co.'s  plant." 

Where  the  possession  is  several,  and  not  joint,  the 
sign  of  possession  follows  each  noun;  as,  "men's  and 
women's  hats. " 

Where  two  nouns  are  in  apposition,  put  the  sign  of 
possession  on  the  last;  as,  "We  visited  Smith  the 
clothier's  family." 

A  noun  or  pronoun  modifying  the  meaning  of  a 
verbal  noun  must  be  put  in  the  possessive  case. 

Examples:  There  was  no  fea/  of  his  (not  him)  betraying  the 
confidence. 

I  was  surprised  at  John's  (not  John)  refusing  to  go. 
There  was  no  need  of  my  remaining  (not  me  remaining). 
She  spoke  about  our  coming  to  visit  her  (not  us  coming). 

"Somebody  else's  book,"  or  "Somebody's  else 
book"? 

Both  Century  and  Standard  Dictionaries  favor  the 
first  form,  or  placing  the  apostrophe  and  5  after  else. 
Century  says:  "The  phrases  anybody  else,  some- 
body else,  nobody  else,  etc.,  have  a  unitary  meaning, 
as  if  one  word,  and  properly  take  a  possessive  case 
(with  the  suffix  at  the  end  of  the  phrase) ;  as  "This  is 
somebody  else's  hat;  nobody  else's  children  act  so." 

The  Standard  Dictionary  says:  "The  expressions 
some  one  else,  any  one  else,  every  one  else,  etc.,  are  in 
good  usage  treated  as  substantive  phrases  and  have 
the  possessive  inflection  upon  the  else;  as,  somebody 
else's  umbrella. " 

A  "go-day  note,"  or  a  "90  days'  note"? 

"A  QO-day  note, ""a  ten-year  note,"  are  con- 
sidered good  commercial  English,  having  been  estab- 
lished by  general  usage.  But  note  that  the  following 
forms  require  the  sign  of  the  possessive :  "  A  six  weeks' 


Double  Possessives  53 

note,"   "a  two  months'  session,"   "a  three  weeks' 
visit." 

Although  possession  is  in  many  cases  by  good 
authority  allowed  to  inanimate  objects,  it  is  better  to 
use  the  preposition  in  expressions  like  the  following: 
"The  value  of  copper"  (not  "copper's  value"); 
"the  laws  of  heat"  (not  "heat's  laws"). 

How  to  Affix  the  Sign  of  the  Possessive  to  A  bbreviations: 

(Singular  possessive)  (Plural  possessive) 

Bro.'s  Bros.' 

(as,  "  Nye  &  Bro.'s  store) 
Co.'s  Cos.' 

Assn.'s  Assns.' 

DOUBLE  POSSESSIVES. 

Literary  usage  has  long  accepted  double  possessives 
like  the  following: 

A  picture  of  my  brother. 

A  picture  of  my  brother's. 

These  expressions  do  not  mean  the  same  thing. 
The  first  does  not  denote  possession,  but  means 
"the  picture  is  a  likeness  of  my  brother."  The 
second  does  denote  possession,  and  means,  "the 
picture  belongs  to  my  brother." 

Care  should  be  used  in  employing  single  or  double 
possessives,  according  to  the  meaning  to  be  conveyed. 


PLURALS. 

The  following  rules  governing  the  formation  of 
plurals  are  given,  in  substance,  in  Bain's  Grammar 
and  in  Maxwell's  "Advanced  Lessons  in  English." 
Standard  Dictionary  also  is  authority  for  the  forms 
given. 

i.  The  plural  is  formed,  with  few  exceptions,  by 
adding  5  to  the  singular. 

If  the  attached  5  makes  an  additional  syllable, 
place  an  e  before  it ;  as,  box,  box-es. 

The  puzzling  words  are  those  ending  in  o.  Some 
of  these  words  form  the  plural  by  the  addition  of  s, 
and  others  by  the  addition  of  es. 

The  most  common  of  these  words  are  the  following: 


alto 

altos 

embryo    embryos     stiletto    stilettos 

bamboo 

bamboos 

folio         folios          solo         solos 

bravo 

bravos 

octavo      octavos      tyro         tyros 

cameo 

cameos 

oratorio    oratorios    virtuoso  virtuosos 

canto 

cantos 

portfolio  portfolios   zero         zeros 

duodecimo   duodecimos    quarto      quartos 

The  following  words  form  the  plural  by  the  addition 
of  es: 

echoes 

mulattoes 

mottoes 

negroes 

potatoes 


buffalo 

buffaloes 

echo 

calico 

calicoes 

mulatto 

cargo 

cargoes 

motto 

domino 

dominoes 

negro 

flamingo 

flamingoes 

potato 

54 

Plurals  55 

hero  heroes  tomato  tomatoes 

manifesto         manifestoes        tornado  tornadoes 

mosquito          mosquitoes         volcano  volcanoes 

2.  Nouns  ending  in  y  preceded  by  a  vowel  form 
the  plural  by  the  addition  of  s  to  the  singular  form: 

attorney  attorneys  monkey  monkeys 

chimney  chimneys  money  moneys 

buoy  buoys  turkey  turkeys 

donkey  donkeys  valley  valleys 

There  is  another  form  for  the  plural  of  money, 
viz.,  monies,  but  this  is  now  seldom  used. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  y  preceded  by  a  consonant 
form  the  plural  by  changing  y  to  i  and  adding  es: 

ally  allies  mercy  mercies 

berry  berries  fly  flies 

dairy  dairies 

4.  The    plural    of    compound    words,    whether 
hyphened  or  solid,  is  formed  by  inflecting  or  pluraliz- 
ing  the  principal  word  of  the  compound: 

mother-in-law  mothers-in-law 

brother-in-law  brothers-in-law 

major-general  major-generals 

footman  footmen 

man-of-war  men-of-war 

aide-de-camp  aides-de-camp 

A  few  titles  composed  of  two  nouns  in  apposition 
have  both  nouns  inflected  for  the  plural. 

Knight  Templar  Knights  Templars 

Lord  Justice  Lords  Justices 

Lord  Provost  Lords  Provosts 


56  Plurals 

Man  servant  is  changed  to  men  servants. 

Some  nouns  have  the  same  form  for  both  singular 
and  plural  number;  as,  swine,  hose,  sheep,  meat,  deer, 
fish,  heathen,  cannon. 

Names  of  game-birds  and  of  fish  seldom  form  a 
plural,  the  singular  form  being  used  to  designate  any 
number;  as,  He  shot  twelve  grouse;  We  caught  six 
pike. 

When  the  parts  of  a  compound  word  are  so  closely 
allied  that  the  meaning  is  not  complete  until  the 
whole  word  is  known,  the  s  is  added  at  the  end  of 
the  word;  as,  cupfuls,  handfuls. 

Standard  Dictionary  says:  "Nouns  ending  in 
ful  form  the  plural  by  a  terminal  s;  as,  pailfuls,  etc. 
The  form  cupsful  is  not  in  accordance  with  the  rule 
for  the  formation  of  plurals.  Cups  full  is  correct 
for  'more  than  one  cup,  each  being  full.' >! 

A  few  nouns  are  used  only  in  the  plural  form.  The 
most  common  of  these  are  scissors,  snuffers,  tongs, 
trousers,  shears,  tweezers,  bellows,  dregs,  measles,  tid- 
ings, victuals,  spectacles,  belles-lettres.  These  words 
require  a  plural  verb;  as,  "These  scissors  are  dull." 

Still  another  class  of  nouns  form  their  plurals  in 
an  irregular  manner;  as,  beef,  beeves;  die,  dice;  staff, 
staves;  wharf,  wharves;  half,  halves;  etc. 

PLURALS  OF  FOREIGN  WORDS. 

When  words  taken  from  foreign  languages  have 
passed  into  common  use,  the  plural  is  formed  in  the 
regular  way.  During  the  process  of  becoming  Angli- 
cized, however,  two  plural  forms  are  generally  current, 
either  of  which  may  be  correctly  used.  The  most 
common  of  these  words  are  contained  in  the  following 
list: 


Plurals 


57 


(Singular  form.) 
apex 
appendix 
automaton 
bandit 
beau 
cactus 
cherub 
chrysalis 
emporium 
encomium 
focus 
formula 
helix 
index 
iris 

medium 
memorandum 
scholium 
seraph 
stigma 
virtuoso 


(English  plural.) 
apexes 
appendixes 
automatons 
bandits 
beaus 
cactuses 
cherubs 
chrysalises 
emporiums 
encomiums 
focuses 
formulas 
helixes 
indexes 
irises 
mediums 
memorandums 
scholiums 
seraphs 
stigmas 
virtuosos 


(Foreign  plural.) 
apices 
appendices 
automata 
banditti 
beaux 
cacti 

cherubim 
chrysalides 
emporia 
encomia 
foci 

formulas 
helices 
indices 
irides 
media 
memoranda 
scholia 
seraphim 
stigmata 
virtuosi 


The  following  foreign  importations  still  retain  the 
foreign  plural  form: 


addendum 

addenda 

datum 

data 

administratrix 

administratrices 

desideratum 

desiderata 

amanuensis 

amanuenses 

diaeresis 

diasreses 

analysis 

analyses 

dictum 

dicta 

animalculum 

animalcula 

effluvium 

effluvia 

antenna 

antennae 

ellipsis 

ellipses 

antithesis 

antitheses 

emphasis 

emphases 

arcanum 

arcana 

ephemera 

ephemerae 

axis 

axes 

erratum 

errata 

bacterium 

bacteria 

esophagus 

esophagi 

basis 

bases 

facetia 

facetiae 

chateau 

chateaux 

genius 

genii 

crisis 

crises 

genus 

genera 

criterion 

criteria 

gymnasium 

gymnasia 

58  Plurals 


hypothesis 
lamina 
larva 

hypotheses 
laminae 
larvae 

phenomenon  phenomena 
polypus           polypi 
radius              radii 

Magus 
mausoleum 
metamorphosis 
miasma 

Magi 
mausolea 
metamorphoses 
miasmata 

sarcophagus   sarcophagi 
spectrum         spectra 
stimulus          stimuli 
stratum           strata 

minutia 
momentum 
nebula 

minutiae 
momenta 
nebulae 

synopsis          synopses 
synthesis         syntheses 
terminus         termini 

nucleus 

nuclei 

thesis               theses 

oasis 

oases 

tumulus          tumuli 

octopus 
parenthesis 

octopi 
parentheses 

vortex             vortices 

There  are  few  proper  nouns  ending  in  man  which 
form  the  plural  in  the  regular  way,  by  the  addition 
of  5  to  the  singular;  for  example,  Mussulman,  Mussul- 
mans; Ottoman,  Ottomans;  Turkoman,  Turkomans. 

The  words  Chinese,  Japanese,  Tyrolese,  etc.,  are 
the  same  in  the  singular  and  plural,  for  both  the 
nation  and  the  individual. 

Plurals  of  Foreign  Words  in  Common  Use: 

Alumna — a  woman  who  has  been  graduated  from  an  institution 

of  learning. 

Alumnae — plural  of  alumna, — women  graduates. 
Alumnus — a  man  who  has  been  graduated  from  an  institution 

of  learning. 
Alumni — plural  of  alumnus, — men  graduates. 

FAMILY   NAMES. 

Plurals  of  family  names  are  formed  by  the  addition 
of  5  or  es. 

Jones  Joneses  Mclntyre        Mclntyres 

Griggs         Griggses  McCann          McCanns 

"In  the  reign  of  the  Charleses" 
"All  the  Joneses  were  there. 


TITLES. 

Titles,  as  used  in  business  correspondence,  may  be 
divided  into  three  classes  as  follows: 

Official  titles,  or  those  belonging  to  an  office.  These 
include  titles  applicable  to  officers  in  military,  naval 
and  civil  service. 

Social  titles,  or  titles  of  courtesy  and  respect, 
including  Mr.,  Mrs.,  Madam,  Mesdames,  Miss,  Master, 
Esquire. 

Scholastic  titles,  or  degrees  conferred  by  colleges 
or  other  institutions  of  learning. 

Official  titles  should  not  be  abbreviated  in  a  cere- 
monious letter  or  note.  When  an  official  title  is  very 
long  it  may  be  shortened  by  giving  a  distinctive 
portion  of  it  in  full,  without  abbreviating  any  of  the 
words,  and  indicating  the  remainder  by  "etc.,  etc." 

Social  titles  are  in  many  instances  abbreviated  and 
scholastic  titles  are  nearly  always  abbreviated. 

Honorable  is  a  title  given  by  courtesy  to  almost 
everyone  who  holds  or  has  held  an  important  public 
office.  It  is  especially  bestowed  upon  the  Vice-Presi- 
dent  of  the  United  States,  upon  members  of  Congress, 
members  of  State  Legislatures,  Judges,  from  the  Chief 
Justice  of  the  United  States  down,  upon  Cabinet 
Officers,  State  and  Territorial  Governors  and  Lieu- 
tenant-Governors, Heads  of  Departments  of  Govern- 
ment and  Federal  Officials,  Ministers  to  foreign 


60  Titles 

countries  who  have  not  a  more  distinctive  title,  and 
Mayors. 

Official  letters  may  be  addressed  with  propriety  to 
the  office  rather  than  to  the  officer;  as,  "To  the 
Secretary  of  State,  Washington,  D.  C." 

Letters  to  officers  in  the  Civil  Service  are  properly 
addressed  as  follows: 

(The  President  of  the  United  States.} 

The   President,   Executive   Mansion,   Washington, 

D.  C. 
Salutation,  Mr.  President:  or  Sir: 

The  extreme  of  formality  is  embodied  in  the  follow- 
ing form: 

His  Excellency,  the  President  of  the  United  States, 
Executive  Mansion,  Washington,  D.  C. 

Salutation,  Your  Excellency: 

The  Complimentary  Closing  may  be  simply, 
"Very  respectfully  yours." 

(The  Vice-President  of  the  United  States.} 

Honorable ,  Vice-President  of 

the  United  States,  Washington,  D.  C. 
Or,  To  the  Vice-President  of  the  United  States, 

Washington,  D.  C. 
Sir  or  Dear  Sir. 

(Cabinet  Officers.) 
The   Honorable    the   Secretary   of  the   Treasury, 

Washington,  D.  C. 
Honorable  A  B  — ,  Secretary  of  the 

Treasury,  Washington,  D.  C. 


Official  Titles  6l 

Or,  simply, 

Secretary  of  the  Treasury,  Washington,  D.  C. 
Salutation,  Sir,  or  Dear  Sir. 
Closing,  Very  respectfully  yours. 

(Members  cf  Congress.} 
Hon.  John   Bell,    Senate   Chamber,   Washington, 

D.  C. 

Hon.  John  Bell,  M.  C.,  Washington,  D.  C. 
Hon.  John  Bell,  House  of  Representatives,  Washing- 
ton, D.  C. 
Sir,  or  Dear  Sir. 

(Foreign  Ministers.) 

His  Excellency, ,  Ambassador  to  the 

Court  of  St.  James,  London,  England. 
Your  Excellency,  or  Sir. 

(Governors.) 
His  Excellency,  the  Governor  of  New  York,  Albany^ 

N.  Y. 

His  Excellency,  the  Governor,  Albany,  N.  Y. 
His  Excellency  Governor  S.   M.  Smith,  Albany, 

N.  Y. 
Your  Excellency,  or  Sir. 

(Mayors.) 

Honorable ,  Mayor  of  New  York  City. 

Sir,  or  Dear  Sir. 

(State  Officers.) 

The  Honorable  Attorney-General  of  New  York, 
Albany,  N.  Y. 

Honorable  ,  Attorney-General  of  New 

York,  Albany,  N.  Y. 
Sir,  or  Dear  Sir. 


62  Titles 

(Legislative  Bodies,  Courts,  etc.) 

Petitions  and  like  communications  to  organized 
bodies  may  be  addressed  to  the  President  of  the  body 
or  to  the  body  itself. 

To  the  Honorable  the  Senate  of  the  United  States  in 

Congress  Assembled. 
Honorable  Sirs,  or  Sirs. 

The  Honorable  the  President  of  the  Senate  of  the 
United  States. 

Honorable ,  President  of  the  Senate  of  the 

United  States. 
Honorable  Sir,  or  Sir. 

The  Honorable  the  Speaker  of  the  House  of  Repre- 
sentatives, Washington,  D.  C. 
Mr.  Speaker,  or  Sir. 
To  the  Honorable  Judges  of  the  Court  of  Appeals, 

Albany,  N.  Y. 
Sirs. 

A  Board,  Council  or  Committee  may  be  formally 
addressed  as  follows: 

To  the  President  and  Members  of  the  Board  of 

Education,  Chicago,  111. 
Sirs. 
Or,  — : ,   Esq.,    President  of  the   Board   of 

School  Commissioners,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

The  envelopes  should  bear  practically  the  same 
form  of  address  in  each  of  the  cases  here  exemplified. 

The  following  are  the  principal  scholastic  degrees 
conferred  by  educational  institutions.  The  abbrevia- 
tions are  affixed  to  individual  names. 


Forms  of  Address  for  tKe  Clergy    63 


Bachelor  of  Arts, 
Bachelor  of  Divinity, 
Bachelor  of  Laws, 
Bachelor  of  Medicine, 
Bachelor  of  Philosophy, 
Bachelor  of  Science, 
Civil  Engineer, 
Doctor  of  Dental  Medicine, 
Doctor  of  Dental  Surgery, 
Doctor  of  Divinity, 
Doctor  of  Laws, 
Doctor  of  Medicine, 
Doctor  of  Philosophy, 
Dynamical  Engineer, 
Master  of  Arts, 
Master  of  Laws, 
Mechanical  Engineer, 
Professor  of  Divinity, 


B.A.  or  A.B. 

B.D. 

LL.B. 

M.B. 

Ph.B. 

B.S.  or  S.B. 

C.E. 

D.M.D. 

D.D.S. 

D.D. 

LL.D. 

M.D. 

Ph.D. 

D.E. 

M.A.  or  A.M. 

M.L. 

M.E. 

S.T.P.  (Sancta  Theo- 
logies Pro- 
fessor.) 


THE  CLERGY 
Forms  of  Address  and  Salutation. 

Reverend  (or  Rev.)  is  prefixed  to  the  names  of  all 
clergymen  of  the  Methodist  Church,  including 
Bishops. 

Reverend  should  not  be  put  before  the  surname  only. 
If  the  initials  are  unknown,  the  proper  form  is  "Rev, 
Mr.  Smith." 

In  strict  propriety  the  title  Reverend  should  have 
the  definite  article  "the"  prefixed  in  referring  to 
clergymen  in  speech  or  writing,  the  phrase  being 


64  Titles 

adjectival ;  as,  the  Rev.  Mr.  Smith,  or  the  Reverend  John 
Smith. 

The  title  Reverend  Dr.  may  be  prefixed  to  names 
of  men  entitled  to  the  degree,  but  in  such  case  the 
initials  D.D.  should  not  be  affixed. 

In  the  Jewish  Church  every  ordained  minister  is 
called  "Rabbi"  and  in  this  country  is  addressed  as 
Reverend. 

The  following  forms  are  proper  in  addressing  letters 
to  clergymen  of  the  Episcopal  Church : 

(Bishops.) 

Right  Reverend ,  D.D.,  Bishop  of . 

Salutation,  Right  Reverend  Sir.     Or,  Right  Rev. 
and  dear  Sir. 

(Rector,  Minister,  Priest.) 

Rev.   J. B.   ,   Rector  of  

Church,  Boston,  Mass. 

Rev.  Dr.  J. B. ,  14  State  Street 

Boston,  Mass. 
Salutation,  Sir.     Reverend  Sir.  Rev.  and  dear  Sir. 

ROMAN  CATHOLIC  TITLES  AND  FORMS  OF 
ADDRESS. 

The  letters  denote:  (a)  the  address  of  the  letter, 
(&)  the  salutation,  (c)  the  complimentary  close. 

(.4  Cardinal.) 

(a)  I.     To  His  Eminence  Cardinal  F ,  Arch- 
bishop of -. 

2.     His  Eminence  the  Most  Reverend  Cardinal 
F . 


Roman  CatKolic  Titles  65 

(5)  i.     Most  Eminent  Sir. 

2.     Most  Eminent  and  Most  Reverend  Sir. 
(c)         I  have  the  honor  to  be,  Your  Eminence, 

Very  sincerely  yours, 

(An  Archbishop.} 

(a)  i.     Most  Reverend  Archbishop  C . 

2.     Most  Reverend  A C ,  Arch- 
bishop of . 

(6)  i.     Most  Reverend  and  Respected  Sir.     Or, 
2.     Most  Reverend  and  dear  Sir. 

(c)  I.     I  am,  Most  Reverend  Sir, 

Very  respectfully  yours, 

D C— . 

(A  Bishop.} 

(a)  i.     Right  Reverend  Bishop  C . 

2.     Right  Reverend  A C ,  Bishop 

of . 

(6)  I.  Right  Reverend  Sir. 

2.  Right  Reverend  and  dear  Sir. 

3.  Right  Reverend  and  dear  Bishop, 
(c)  We  are,  Right  Reverend  Sir, 

Very  respectfully  yours, 

D C . 

(Prelates  and  Apostolic  Prothonotaries.} 


(a)  I.     Right  Reverend  Monsignor  C 
2.     Right  Reverend  A C 


3.     Right  Reverend  Monsignor  C ,  Pro- 

thonotary  Apostolic,  etc. 


66  Titles 

(6)  I.     Right  Reverend  Sir. 

2.     Right  Reverend  Monsignor. 
(c)  i.     I  am,  Right  Reverend  Sir, 

Very  respectfully  yours, 

U  ~~~~  \s       • 

(.4  Vicar-General,  Canon,  Dean,  Prior,  Rector,  Head  of 
Religious  Order,  Head  of  College,  Seminary.} 

(a)  I.     Very  Reverend  A  C (with 

official  title). 
(&)  I.     Very  Reverend  Sir.     Or, 

2.     Very  Reverend  and  dear  Sir. 
(c)  I.     Very  respectfully  yours. 

(Priest.) 


(a)  i.  Reverend  A  — : — — — •  C 

2.  Reverend  Father  C 

(&)  i.  Reverend  Sir.     Or, 

2.  Reverend  and  dear  Sir. 

(c)  i.  Very  respectfully  yours. 


Heads  of  religious  orders  of  women  are  addressed 
generally : 

Rev.  Mother  (family  name  or  name  in 

religion) ,  Superior  of . 

Or,  Mother  M B ,  Superior  of . 

Salutation,  Rev.  Mother,  or  Dear  Reverend  Mother. 
If  name  is  wholly  unknown,  The  Reverend  Mother 
Superior,  Sisters  of  Charity,  9  West  looth  Street, 
New  York  City. 


Usage  in  Addressing  Two  Persons  67 

The  usage  in  addressing  envelopes  to  two  persons  is: 

His  Excellency  and  Mrs.  James  Smith. 
Governor  and  Mrs.  James  Smith. 
Honorable  and  Mrs.  James  Smith. 
Rev.  Dr.  and  Mrs.  James  Smith. 
Professor  and  Mrs.  James  Smith. 
Mr.  and  Mrs.  James  Smith. 


COMPOUND  WORDS. 

Compound  words  are  composed  of  simple  words  of 
independent  significance.  These  simple  words  are 
sometimes  consolidated  and  sometimes  united  by  a 
hyphen. 

When  to  write  the  words  separately,  when  to  con- 
solidate, and  when  to  unite  by  a  hyphen  are  often 
vexing  questions.  Why  must  book-buyer  be  written 
with  a  hyphen  and  bookseller  without?  Few  diction- 
aries give  rules  and  the  examples  are  conflicting  and 
unsatisfactory.  Modern  usage,  and  especially  busi- 
ness usage,  favors  the  shorter  method  of  consolidation 
and  the  elimination  of  the  hyphen.  This  is  to  be  noted 
in  words  of  frequent  use,  such  as  to-day,  to-morrow, 
counter-claim,  and  the  like,  which,  although  hyphened 
in  the  dictionaries,  are  often  consolidated  in  business 
letters,  in  legal  documents  and  in  newspapers. 

The  following  general  principles  are  taken  from 
Standard  Dictionary's  department  of  Compound 
Words,  edited  by  Mr.  F.  Horace  Teall,  author  of  a 
well-known  book  on  this  subject: 

I.  All  words  should  be  separate  when  used  in 
regular  grammatical  relation  and  construction, 
unless  they  are  jointly  applied  in  some  arbitrary 
way. 

68 


Compound  Words  69 

II.  Abnormal    association    of   words    generally 
indicates  unification  in  sense,  and  hence  compound- 
ing in  form. 

III.  No  expression  in  the  language  should  be 
changed    from    two    or    more    words    into     one 
(either    hyphened    or    solid)    without    change   of 
sense. 

According  to  the  first  of  these  principles,  an  adjec- 
tive (including  all  words  used  with  clear  adjectival 
force)  and  a  noun  in  regular  use  must  not  be  joined ;  as, 
spinal  column,  brick  house,  fellow  citizen,  man  servant, 
brother  officer. 

Also,  a  regular  adverb  must  not  be  joined  to  the 
adjective  which  it  modifies,  even  when  the  two  express 
one  attribution ;  as,  highly  colored  wings,  recently  pub- 
lished book. 

The  following  specific  rules  are  compiled  in  part 
from  Standard  Dictionary  and  in  part  from  Wilson's 
Treatise  on  Punctuation. 

1.  Join  by  a  hyphen  two  or  more  words  abnor- 
mally associated  to  express  one  attribute;  as,  "a 
down-stairs  room;"  "a  well-known  man;"  "North- 
American  birds;"  "a  silk-and-cotton  fabric;"  "free- 
trade  doctrines;"  "dark-brown  hair." 

2.  When  one  of  two  words,  used  together  as  a 
single  part  of  speech,  is  in  such  use  not  placed  in 
accordance  with  a  rule  of  grammar,  it  should  be 
joined  by  a  hyphen  to  the  word  used  in  connection 
with  it;  as,  "to  go  down-town;"  "to  halter-break  a 
horse;"  "after-ages;"  "broad-mindedly." 

3.  Use  a  hyphen  in  every  name  that  shows  mere 
ellipsis  and  inversion  of  a  phrase  containing  two 
nouns;  as,  a  "box for  a  hat, "  inverted,  is  a  "hat-box. " 


7O  Compound  Words 

So  with  shoe-box,  collar-box,  hair-brush,  cook-stove, 
card-rack,  and  the  like. 

A  box  for  marbles  is  a  marble-box,  but  a  box 
made  of  marble  is  a  marble  box — two  separate  words. 
A  house  in  which  glass  is  made  is  a  glass-house;  a 
house  made  of  glass  is  a  glass  house. 

4.  Two   nouns   used   together  as  one  specific 
name  should  be  joined  by  a  hyphen;  as,  sea-gull, 
field-mouse,  arch-stone,  brick-yard. 

But  where  the  first  of  the  two  nouns  is  used  in 
the  sense  of  an  adjective,  no  hyphen  is  required ;  as, 
brick  house,  feather  bed,  pumpkin  pie,  cylinder  press, 
companion  picture. 

5.  Possessive  phrases  used  as  specific  names  or 
attributes  are  compound  words  and  require  the 
hyphen;  as,  Jew's-harp;  bird's-eye  view. 

6.  When  two  or  more  words  are  necessary  to 
form  a  complete  modifier,  they  should  be  joined  by 
a  hyphen;  as,  "a  matter-of-fact  man;"  "an  I-told- 
you-so  tone;"  "so-called  roses;"  "the  above-named 
defendant. " 

When,  however,  phrases  like  these  follow  the 
noun  which  they  modify,  no  hyphen  is  used;  as, 
"roses  so  called;"  "the  defendant  above  named." 

7.  When  two  words  of  the  same  part  of  speech 
are  connected  by  the  word  "and,"  the  three  words 
forming  an  adjective,  place  a  hyphen  between  the 
parts;  as,  "a  black-and-tan  dog;"  "an  up-and-down 
answer. " 

8.  When  a  compound  modifier  has  a  numeral 
and  a  noun,  unite  them  by  a  hyphen;  as,  "a  ten- 
acre  lot;"  "a  6-inch  rope;"  "Ten-cent  fares  were 
charged. " 

9.  When  two  adjectives  precede  a  noun  and  the 


Prefixes  and  Suffixes  71 

first  belongs  to  the  second  adjective  rather  than  to 
the  noun,  join  the  adjectives  by  a  hyphen;  as,  "a 
strong-armed  man ; "  "a  red-haired  boy . " 

10.  Nouns  formed  of  a  verb  and  an  adverb  or  a 
preposition,  or  of  a  present  participle  and  a  noun, 
require  the  hyphen;  as,    "a  send-off;"  humming- 
bird, printing-press,  dwelling-house. 

11.  Two  numerals  expressing  a  compound  num- 
ber are  joined  by  a  hyphen;  as,  thirty-three,  seventy- 
five. 

But  if  these  numerals  are  inverted  and  a  conjunc- 
tion placed  between  them,  no  hyphen  is  required; 
as,  three  and  thirty;  five  and  seventy. 

12.  Fractions  are  compounded:     three-eighths; 
eleven-twelfths. 

13.  Points  of  the  compass  are  usually  written  as 
one  word;  as,  northeast;  but  when  one  of  the  words 
is  repeated,  use  the  hyphen;  as,  north-northeast. 

14.  Civic  and  military  titles  composed  of  two  or 
more  words  require  the  hyphen;  Attorney-General; 
Major-General;  Sergeant-at-arms. 

15.  A  hyphen  is  used  in  such  phrases  as  "a 
half -pint,"  "a  quarter-dollar;"  but  when  a  preposi- 
tion or  an  article  intervenes  no  hyphen  is  required ; 
as,  "  half  a  pint;"  "quarter  of  a  dollar." 

PREFIXES  AND  SUFFIXES. 

Un,  out,  pre.  These  prefixes  are  united  to  proper 
nouns  and  proper  adjectives  by  a  hyphen;  as,  un- 
American  ;  out-Herod ;  pre-Columbian. 

Man,  men,  keeper,  master,  house,  room,  boat,  book, 
side,  yard,  shop,  mill,  work,  maker,  holder,  mate  and 
time  are  usually  consolidated  with  a  preceding  noun  if 


72  Compound   'Words 

of  one  syllable;  but  united  to  it  by  a  hyphen  if  of 
more  than  one  syllable ;  as,  schoolhouse;  senate-house; 
bedroom ;  composition-room ;  daytime ;  dinner-time. 

Inter  and  trans  are  prefixed  without  the  hyphen. 
Interstate ;  transatlantic ;  transalpine. 

Proper  nouns  and  proper  adjectives  to  which  trans 
is  prefixed  drop  the  capital  letter. 

All  is  joined  to  an  adjective  modifier  by  a  hyphen; 
as,  all-essential;  all-merciful.  When  compounded 
with  another  word  without  the  hyphen,  all  drops  one 
//  as,  always,  Almighty,  although. 

Re,  co,  in,  out,  sub,  up,  down,  over,  under,  mid,  after, 
extra,  counter,  are  usually  prefixed  without  a  hyphen; 
as,  restate;  overdrawn;  undervalue;  sublet. 

A  hyphen  is  required  when  any  of  these  words  is 
prefixed  to  a  proper  noun  or  a  proper  adjective. 

Re  and  co  are  joined  by  a  hyphen  to  words  beginning 
with  a  vowel;  co-operate;  re-install. 

Under,  when  indicating  rank  or  position,  is  properly 
joined  by  a  hyphen;  as,  under-secretary ;  under-officer, 
under-servant. 

Fold,  penny.  The  usual  practice  is  to  consolidate 
these  words  with  words  of  one  syllable  and  to  unite 
them  by  a  hyphen  to  words  of  more  than  one  syllable; 
as,  fourfold;  fifteen-fold;  thirty-five-fold;  threepenny; 
fifteen-penny. 

Pence  is  consolidated  with  numerals  of  one  syllable, 
but  is  separated  from  numerals  of  more  than  one 
syllable;  as,  twopence;  fifteen-pence. 

Self  and  Jialf,  when  prefixed,  require  a  hyphen;  as, 
self-reliance;  self-taught;  half -hourly;  half -holiday; 
half-back. 

Birthday  is  written  without  the  hyphen ;  birth-rate 
and  birth-hour  with  the  hyphen. 


Prefixes  and  Suffixes  73 

Cross  and  counter,  in  legal  documents,  are  joined  by 
a  hyphen;  as,  cross-action,  cross-bill,  cross-examina- 
tion, cross-question,  cross-interrogatory,  cross-remain- 
der; counter-claim,  counter-complaint. 

First-rate,  second-class,  second-hand,  used  as  modi- 
fiers, require  the  hyphen. 

Anybody,  everybody,  somebody,  nobody,  indicating 
persons,  are  written  as  one  word.  The  phrases  any 
body,  every  body,  some  body,  refer  to  inanimate  objects. 

Something,  everything,  anything,  are  written  as 
single  words,  though  it  is  proper  to  write  any  one, 
every  one,  etc. 

Non  is  joined  by  a  hyphen;  non-resident;  non- 
essential. 

Post,  when  it  means  after,  or  behind,  requires  no 
hyphen.  Postscript;  postgraduate. 

Post,  relating  to  the  transportation  of  mail-matter, 
is  consolidated  in  postmaster,  postman,  but  hyphened 
in  post-horse,  post-office,  post-free. 

Compounds  ending  with  like  are  usually  written  as 
one  word;  as,  workmanlike,  businesslike. 

But  when  this  brings  similar  consonants  together, 
the  hyphen  is  necessary ;  as,  shell-like,  owl-like. 

Like  is  joined  to  some  proper  nouns  by  a  hyphen ; 
Eve-like. 

When  a  prefix  ends  with  a  vowel  and  the  word  with 
which  it  is  combined  begins  with  a  vowel,  the  hyphen 
usually  is  placed  between ;  pre-eminent ;  co-operate. 

Vice  is  usually  joined  by  a  hyphen;  as,  vice-presi- 
dent ;  vice-principal ;  vice-chancellor.  But  in  viceroyal, 
viceroyalty,  vicegerent,  vicegerency,  it  is  consolidated. 

Semi,  inter,  ultra,  anti,  ante.  These  prefixes  are 
usually  consolidated,  except  before  proper  nouns  and 
proper  adjectives;  as,  semiannual;  semicircumference; 


74  Compound  Words 

interocean ;  interstate ;  ultramontain ;  ultrafashionable ; 
semi-Saxon,  semi-Aryan,  inter- Asiatic,  ultra-Catholic. 

Pseudo,  quasi.  These  prefixes  are  joined  by  a 
hyphen;  pseudo-critic;  pseudo-Christianity;  quasi- 
contract ;  quasi-corporation. 

Pseudo  enters  into  many  medical  terms,  with  which 
it  is  combined  without  the  hyphen. 

Ex,  when  used  to  express  past  office,  is  joinsd  to 
the  noun  by  a  hyphen;  as,  ex-mayor;  ex-President 
Harrison. 


CAPITALIZATION. 

1.  Sentence.     The  first  word  of  every  independ- 
ent sentence  or  its  equivalent  should  begin  with  a 
capital  letter. 

Example:  "Apply  yourself  to  study:  it  is  the  only  way  to 
success." 

NOTE.  While  the  last  part  of  this  example  is  a  complete 
sentence,  it  is  a  dependent  sentence,  and  hence  should  not 
begin  with  a  capital. 

2.  Quotation.     The    first   word    of   every   direct 
quotation  should  begin  with  a  capital  letter. 

Example:  It  has  been  said  of  Bacon,  "He  it  was  who  first 
employed  the  well-known  phrase,  'the  wisdom  of  our  ances- 
tors. ' " 

NOTE.  When  the  quotation  is  brought  in  indirectly  or  is 
introduced  by  the  conjunction  "that,"  it  should  begin  with  a 
small  letter;  as,  It  has  been  well  said  that  "time  is  the  great 
healer. " 

3.  Question,  etc.     The  first  word  of  a  direct  ques- 
tion or  of  an  important  statement,'  introduced  into 
another  sentence,  should  begin  with  a  capital  letter. 

Example:  The  important  questions  for  us  to  consider  are, 
What  are  we  here  for?  Whither  are  we  drifting? 

I  would  say  this:  If  we  do  not  bring  suit  by  Monday  we 
shall  lose  our  claim. 

75 


76  Capitalization 

4.  Poetry.     The  first  word  of  every  line  of  poetry 
should  begin  with  a  capital  letter. 

Example:    "I  know  not  if  the  dark  or  bright 

Shall  be  my  lot; 

If  that  wherein  my  hopes  delight 
Be  best  or  not. " 

NOTE.  But  where  a  line  of  poetry  is  so  long  as  to  require 
dividing,  the  portion  carried  over  to  the  next  line  should  not 
begin  with  a  capital. 

Example:    "The  Star  Spangled  Banner  to  me  is 

the  best; 

Since  the  words  are  befitting — the  tune 
does  the  rest. " 

* 

5.  Deity.     Every  name  or  title  of  the  Deity  should 
begin  with  a  capital  letter;  as,  the  Creator,  Father, 
Preserver;  the  Eternal,  the  All- wise;  the  Holy  Spirit; 
the  Messiah,  the  Anointed;   the  Master;  the  Judge 
of  the  world. 

The  word  "god, "  meaning  a  heathen  divinity,  or 
idol,  begins  with  a  small  letter. 

The  words  "providence"  and  "heaven,"  when 
synonymous  with  Deity,  should  begin  with  a 
capital;  as,  "Trust  in  Providence." 

Pronouns  referring  to  the  Deity  begin  with  a 
capital  only  when  they  are  equivalent  to  the  name 
of  the  Deity.  This  includes  He  and  Him,  Thee  and 
Thou,  but  not  who;  as,  "Hear  Thou  the  cry  of  one 
far  spent. "  "The  eye  of  Him  who  never  sleeps. " 

Words  denoting  the  scriptures  or  sacred  writings 
of  any  nation  or  people  begin  with  a  capital  letter; 
as,  the  Bible,  the  Biblical  story,  the  Holy  Scriptures, 
the  Gospels,  the  Epistles,  the  Talmud,  the  Koran, 
the  Sacred  Writings. 


Capitalization  77 

Roman  notation  is  usually  written  in  capitals,  but 
citations  from  Scripture  and  other  books  may  be 
written  in  lower  case;  as,  Vol.  I,  Part  xvi;  Chron. 
xvi,  19;  II  Tim.  xiii,  17-20. 

6.  The  names  of  all  religious  sects  and  of  all 
political  parties,  whether  derived  from  proper  names  or 
not,  and  all  adjectives  and  verbs  derived  from  them, 
should  begin  with  a  capital  letter;  as,  The  Catholic 
Church;  the  Democratic  party;  the  Radicals. 

7.  Titles,    etc.     Titles    of   books,    tracts,    essays, 
newspapers,  pictures,  and  the  like,  and  titles  of  chap- 
ters and  sections,  may  be  printed  entirely  in  capitals; 
if  not,  the  first  word  and  every  noun,  adjective,  verb, 
and  adverb  should  begin  with  a  capital. 

Example:    A   Wild  Ride  of  Two  American  Women  Across 
the  Transvaal  is  an  interesting  tale. 

In  works  treating  of  special  subjects,  important 
words  may  be  commenced  with  a  capital  for  the 
sake  of  emphasis  or  other  purpose.  This  is  a 
matter  of  taste  and  judgment. 

8.  Official  titles  and  all  titles  of  honor  and  respect 
when  applied  to  particular  persons,  or  preceding  a 
name,  or  occurring  in  familiar  address,  should  com- 
mence with  a  capital  letter;  as,  Her  Majesty,  His 
Honor,  Your  Royal  Highness,  Your  Grace,  President 
Roosevelt,  Governor  Hamilton. 

NOTE.  The  tendency  of  present  usage  is  to  drop  the  capital 
from  the  pronoun  in  the  examples  given  above. 


78  Capitalization 

When  these  words  occur  frequently  and  without 
any  particular  expression  of  honor,  and  are  not 
applied  to  a  particular  person,  they  may  be  written 
with  a  small  initial  letter;  as,  "The  pomp  and  cere- 
mony of  a  king. " 

In  compound  titles  like  Attorney-General,  Vice- 
President  and  the  like,  each  word  is  commenced 
with  a  capital. 

Where  a  person  has  been  specifically  mentioned 
by  name  and  title  and  is  afterward  referred  to  by 
title  only,  it  should  be  capitalized;  as,  "General 
Miles  returned  to  the  United  States  last  week.  The 
General  appears  to  be  in  good  health." 

When  a  title  used  alone  is  intended  as  a  synonym 
of  a  particular  person  it  is  generally  capitalized ;  as, 
the  Czar,  the  Pope,  the  Sultan.  But  when  it  is  not 
used  as  the  appellation  of  a  specified  person  the  title 
begins  with  a  small  letter;  as,  "A  pope  was  elected. '' 

When  a  title  is  used  before  or  after  a  proper  name 
for  the  purpose  of  explanation,  it  does  not  begin 
with  a  capital  letter ;  as,  the  prophet  Jeremiah. 

When  the  word  "the"  forms  part  of  a  corporate 
name  it  should  be  commenced  with  a  capital;  as, 
"We  to-day  ordered  from  The  Chicago  White  Lead 
Company  two  cans  of  paint. " 

Ex  prefixed  to  a  title  should  not  be  capitalized 
unless  it  begins  a  sentence;  as,  "The  legislators 
were  addressed  by  ex-President  Cleveland." 

9.     Proper    Nouns.     Every    proper    noun    should 
begin  with  a  capital  letter. 

NOTE.  This  rule  applies  to  the  names  of  the  months  and  the 
days  of  the  week.  The  names  of  the  seasons  are  not  capitalized 
unless  personified;  as,  "In  the  spring  we  planted  corn." 


Capitalization  79 

10.  Proper    Adjectives.        Proper    adjectives,    or 
words  derived  from  proper  nouns,  should  begin  with 
capital  letters ;  as,  American,  Grecian,  Wesleyan. 

NOTE.  But  when  words  derived  from  proper  nouns  have 
lost  their  original  significance,  or  are  used  to  express  a  common 
quality,  the  capital  letter  is  no  longer  required;  as,  herculean, 
from  Hercules;  platonic,  from  Plato;  godlike. 

11.  /  and  0.     The  pronoun  I  and  the  interjection 
O  should  always  be  capitals. 

Example:  "All  I  ask  is  this:  Save,  O  save  me  from  the 
candid  friend. " 

NOTE.  The  word  "oh"  does  not  begin  with  a  capital  except 
when  it  is  the  first  word  of  a  sentence  or  of  a  line  of  verse;  as, 
"John  came  yesterday,  and  oh,  how  weary  he  looked!" 

12.  Personification.     Nouns  that  represent  inani- 
mate things  as  persons  should  begin  with  a  capital 
letter. 

Example:     "Let  the  dead  Past  bury  its  dead." 
NOTE.     This  rule  applies  to  such  words  as  the  Muses,-thQ 
Graces,  the  Fates,  the  Furies,  etc. 

13.  Numbered  Phrases,  Tabulations,  etc.    The  first 
word  of  each  of  a  series  of  numbered  phrases  or 
clauses  should  begin  with  a  capital  letter. 

Example:  "The  entire  working  force  and  capital  of  the 
Company  are  to  be  employed  for  these  purposes:  I.  In 
rebuilding  the  plant  and  enlarging  its  capacity.  2.  In  improv- 
ing the  grade  of  the  workmen.  3.  In  raising  the  standard  of 
the  output." 

In  most  cases,  when  the  numbers  are  introduced 
parenthetically,  capitals  are  not  necessary  after 
them,  and  periods  are  not  placed  after  the  numbers  : 
as,  The  Association  has  in  view  (i)  the  improvement 


So  Capitalization 

of  the  town,  (2)  the  enlargement  of  the  corporate 

limits,  and  (3)  the  providing  of  comfortable  homes 

for  laborers. 

The  first  word  of  each  line  and  also  the  chief  items 
of  an  account,  bill  of  particulars,  or  tabulation  should 
begin  with  a  capital. 

Example:    The  expenses  of  the  trip  are  here  shown: 

For  Railroad  Fare,  $20 

"    Lodging,  25 

"    Advertising,  25 

$70 

To  6  Ibs.  Tea,  $9.00 

"   8  Ibs.  Sugar,  i.oo 

$10.00 

14.  In  rules  and  reports  of  societies,  committees, 
etc.,  and  in  official  publications  by  a  city,  the  words 
city,  club,  etc.,  and  names  indicating  office  should 
begin  with  a  capital  letter;  as,  President,  Vice-Presi- 
dent,  Secretary,  Treasurer,  Chairman,  Directors, 
Board  of  Managers.  Also,  when  specifically  referring 
to  the  subject  under  consideration,  the  words  report, 
corporation,  society,  etc.,  should  begin  with  a  capital. 

It  is  usual  to  capitalize  the  first  word  after  an 
introductory  word  or  clause  written  entirely  in  capi- 
tals, though  the  custom  is  by  no  means  uniform. 

Examples:    RESOLVED,  That  this  Committee  urge  an 
appropriation. 

AND  BE  IT  FURTHER  ENACTED,  That  the  members  of 
the  convention  thus  duly  elected,  etc. 

In  toasts,  capitalize  the  principal  words  before  the 
dash  and  the  first  word  following  it. 


Capitalization  Si 

Example:  "My  Country: — May  it  ever  be  right;  but  right 
or  wrong,  my  country!" 

15.  Special  and  important  words  that  denote  an 
important  event,  epoch  or  object,  or  division  of  time, 
should  commence  with  a  capital  letter :  as,  the  Middle 
Ages,  the  Dark  Ages,  the  Renaissance,  the  Constitu- 
tion, the  Bill  of  Rights,  the  Civil  War,  the  Reign  of 
Terror,  the  Revolution,  the  Reformation,  the  Fourth 
of  July. 

1 6.  In   botany   and   zoology,    names   of   classes, 
families  and  genera  begin  with  capitals.     Names  of 
species  are  written  with  a  small  initial  unless  formed 
from  a  proper  name. 

Examples:  In  the  United  States  the  chipmunk  is  the  com- 
mon species  of  the  Tamias  striatus. 

Magnolia  grandiflora;  The  common  prickly-pear  (Opuntia 
vulgaris)  has  yellow  flowers. 

The  names  of  the  different  courts  should  begin  with 
a  capital  letter;  as,  the  United  States  Supreme  Court, 
the  County  Court,  the  Criminal  Court. 

Usage  varies  in  writing  the  letters  A.M.  and  P.M., 
referring  to  the  time  of  day.  It  is  not  incorrect  to  use 
small  letters,  but  capitals  are  preferable. 

A  capital  letter  should  follow  the  colon  when  the 
latter  is  equivalent  to  "as  follows;"  as,  "Write  it: 
Seven  pairs  at  $3  a  pair. " 

The  words  father,  mother,  brother,  sister,  cousin, 
aunt,  etc.,  begin  with  a  capital  when  put  before  a 
proper  name;  as,  Aunt  Helen,  Brother  Jones,  Cousin 
James.  When  the  words  are  used  in  a  general  sense, 
a  small  initial  letter  is  proper;  as,  "My  mother  was 
here  yesterday." 


82  Capitalization 

The  term  "father, "  when  applied  to  a  clergyman  or 
to  the  early  writers  of  the  Christian  church,  is  begun 
with  a  capital  letter;  as,  "Even  the  writings  of  the 
early  Fathers  are  not  free  from  controversy." 

The  words  day,  holiday,  etc.,  used  with  a  proper 
name,  generally  begin  with  a  small  letter;  as,  Christ- 
mas day ;  the  Easter  holidays. 

The  word  Satan  should  begin  with  a  capital. 

The  word  devil,  when  applied  to  a  personal  being 
supposed  to  be  the  incarnation  of  evil,  should  begin 
with  a  capital  letter;  as,  the  Devil  and  his  angels.  As 
a  general  term  for  any  demon,  it  begins  with  a  small 
letter. 

Names  from  foreign  languages,  containing  a  preposi- 
tion or  an  adjective,  as  von,  van,  de  or  di,  le,  la,  etc., 
when  given  without  a  title  or  a  baptismal  name, 
should  be  written  with  a  capital  letter  for  the  preposi- 
tion or  adjective ;  as,  Van  Tromp,  Von  Humboldt,  De 
Thou,  De  la  Fort,  Di  Cesudia;  D'Estes;  written  with 
the  Christian  name,  the  preposition  or  the  adjective 
takes  a  small  initial  letter;  as,  Simon  de  Montfort; 
Jean  de  Vere;  Henri  de  la  Monte. 

GEOGRAPHICAL  NAMES. 

Begin  with  a  capital: 

1.  The  words  North,  South,  East,  Northeast,  etc., 
when  they  denote  sections  of  country;  not  when  they 
denote  direction  merely;  as,  The  great  Northwest; 
There  is  great  prosperity  in  the  West;  Ohio  is  east  of 
Illinois. 

2.  The  words    State,    Territory,   County,   Colony, 
Commonwealth,  etc.,  preceding  or  following  a  specific 


GeograpHical  Names  83 

name;  as,  the  County  of  Clinton,  the  State  of  Iowa, 
Arizona  Territory,  Plymouth  Colony,  the  Common- 
wealth of  Kentucky. 

3.  Each  word  of  an  appellation  bestowed  upon  a 
state  or  city;  as,  Keystone  State,  the  Crescent  City. 

4.  Terms  applied  to  the  natives  of  certain  States 
or   regions;   as,    Hoosier,    Yankee,    Caucasian,    etc.; 
but  not  negro,  gypsy,  quadroon. 

5.  Each  word  which  forms  part  of  a  specific  name, 
like  Mississippi  Valley,  the  Gulf  Stream,  Cape  Cod 
Bay.     When  the  name  of  the  object  is  a  general  term, 
not  specifically  belonging  to  the  thing  mentioned,  it 
may  begin  with  a  small  letter;  as,  the  Mississippi 
river;  the  Congo  basin;  the  Catskill  mountains.    The 
Great   Basin,    the   Rocky    Mountains,    Long   Island 
Sound,  require  a  capital  for  each  word,  because  each 
word  is  used  specifically  and  forms  part  of  the  specific 
appellation. 

The  terms  arctic  circle,  antarctic  circle,  equator, 
etc.,  do  not  denote  real  places,  but  only  geographical 
lines  of  position,  and  should  not  be  capitalized. 


PUNCTUATION. 

The  aim  of  punctuation  is  to  make  clear  the  writer's 
meaning,  to  indicate  grammatical  construction  and 
the  sense,  to  prevent  ambiguity.  The  best  of  the  art 
is  exemplified  in  the  high  class  monthly  magazines. 
The  trend  of  general  usage  is  toward  the  newspaper 
style — open  or  "loose"  methods  of  punctuation. 
Commercial  punctuation  follows  the  medium  path. 
But  as  it  requires  as  much  knowledge  to  know  when 
a  comma  may  be  omitted  safely  as  it  does  to  place 
it  properly,  it  will  hardly  do  to  punctuate  "by 
instinct." 

THE  COMMA. 

"Comma"  means  that  which  is  cut  off.  The 
Comma  (,)  indicates  the  slightest  possible  degree  of 
separation  between  the  parts  of  a  sentence. 

It  does  not  always  indicate  a  pause,  but  often 
merely  a  grammatical  division,  as  in  the  expressions, 
"Yes,  sir,  "and  "No,  sir." 

Many  of  the  rules  which  are  given  in  books  on 
punctuation  for  the  use  of  the  comma  are  ignored  in 
commercial  usage. 

When  in  doubt,  use  the  comma  if  it  is  necessary  to 
make  the  sense  clear ;  otherwise  leave  it  out. 

i.  When  two  words,  or  a  series  of  words,  of  the 
same  part  of  speech,  are  used  in  the  same  construc- 

84 


THe  Comma  85 

tion,  without  a  conjunction  between  them,  a  comma 
separates  them  from  each  other. 

Example :     "  Run,  run  to  the  village. " 

When  the  words  are  nouns  or  expressions  equiva- 
lent to  nouns,  the  comma  is  also  placed  after  the 
last  when  there  is  no  conjunction  before  it;  as, 
"Flowers,  trees,  shrubs,  adorned  the  grounds." 

If  the  conjunction  "and"  be  used  before  the  last 
word  of  the  series,  no  comma  follows  the  last  word; 
as,  "Music,  literature,  and  the  drama  form  the 
chief  diversions  of  the  family. " 

The  comma  is  put  before  the  conjunction  "and" 
for  the  reason  that  the  words  "literature"  and 
"drama"  are  not  more  closely  connected  in  sense 
and  construction  with  each  other  than  with  the 
preceding  word,  "music." 

When  the  series  of  nouns  is  preceded  by  an  adjec- 
tive qualifying  only  the  first,  the  comma  should  be 
omitted  before  the  conjunction ;  as  "  Delicate  beauty, 
lightness  and  strength  characterize  the  Parthenon. " 

When  the  first  of  two  words  connected  by  and,  or, 
or  nor  is  qualified  by  a  preceding  adjective  or  adverb 
which  does  not  apply  to  the  second,  or  when  the 
second  word  is  followed  by  a  word  or  phrase  not 
belonging  to  the  first,  a  comma  is  placed  before  the 
conjunction;  as  "The  house  was  strongly  built,  and 
supplied  with  modern  articles."  "He  sang,  and 
danced  too." 

2.  When  the  word  "or"  stands  between  two 
nouns  or  between  expressions  which  are  synonymous, 
or  of  which  one  is  explanatory  of  the  other,  they  may 
be  separated  by  a  comma. 


86  Punctuation 

Example:    "The  osprey,  or  sea-eagle,  builds  its  nest  high." 

3.  A  comma  separates  the  parts  of  a  compound 
sentence  when  the  separation  is  too  slight  to  require 
the  semicolon. 

Example:     "The  night  was  dark  and  stormy,  but  the  moon 
finally  struggled  through  the  clouds. " 

4.  When  a  dependent  clause  precedes  the  principal 
clause,  it  is  set  off  by  a  comma,  unless  the  two  are 
closely  related  in  sense. 

Example:     "  If  you  would  accomplish  a  great  work,  let  your 
purpose  not  falter. " 

When  the  dependent  clause  follows  the  main 
clause  and  is  closely  connected  with  it  in  sense,  it 
need  not  be  set  off  by  a  comma;  as,  "I  will  find  you 
the  book  if  you  wish  it. " 

5.  A  comma  is  put  before  a  relative  clause  when  it 
is  explanatory  of  the  antecedent,  or  presents  an  addi- 
tional thought. 

Example :    "Take  the  Hudson  River  boat,  which  sails  at  ten 
o'clock. " 

If  the  relative  clause  is  restrictive  in  character, 
the  comma  is  omitted;  as,  "Take  the  Hudson  River 
boat  that  sails  at  ten  o'clock. " 

6.  Words  used  in  direct  address  are  set  off  by 
commas. 

Examples:  "John,  you  will  find  the  study  of  geology  very 
interesting. " 

"  Continue,  my  son,  to  be  diligent. " 

7.  The  comma  often  takes  the  place  of  words 
omitted. 


THe  Comma  87 

This  is  the  case  where  two  subjects  in  a  compound 
sentence  have  only  one  verb. 

Example :  "  The  wise  man  considers  what  he  lacks ;  the  fool, 
what  he  abounds  in. " 

8.  A  short  quotation,  or  an  expression  resembling 
a  quotation,  is  preceded  by  a  comma. 

Example :  "  He  merely  said, '  I  believe  wheat  is  a  profitable 
crop.' ". 

9.  Words,  phrases,  and  clauses  of  an  explanatory, 
parenthetical  or  intermediate  character  should  be  set 
off  by  commas. 

Example:    "Johnson,  you  remember,  wrote  Rasselas." 

10.  Phrases    having   a    common    dependence   on 
another  that  follows  them  in  the  same  clause  are 
separated  by  a  comma. 

Example:  "Great  men  are  seldom  in  sympathy  with,  but 
are  in  opposition  to,  popular  customs  and  beliefs. " 

11.  Words  or  phrases  contrasted  with  each  other 
are  separated  by  a  comma. 

Example:    "He  was  a  great  writer,  but  not  an  orator." 

When  a  negative  word  or  phrase  is  put  before  an 
affirmative  one  and  does  not  commence  the  sen- 
tence, a  comma  separates  the  phrases  from  each 
other  and  also  from  the  rest  of  the  sentence;  as, 
"The  greatest  injury  arises  to  the  tenant,  not  from 
the  sale  of  the  realty,  but  from  the  destruction 
of  the  personalty. " 

12.  Words  in  apposition,  with  their  adjuncts,  are 
separated  by  a  comma. 


88  Punctuation 

This  includes  titles,  which  should  be  separated  by 
a  comma  from  the  name  and  also  from  each  other. 

When  the  noun  or  pronoun  in  apposition  stands 
alone  or  has  only  an  article  before  it,  no  comma  is 
required. 

Examples :    Millet,  one  of  the  greatest  of  modern  painters, 
was  a  native  of  France. 

The  painter  Millet  was  a  man  of  genius. 

I  myself  will  go. 

James  Jones,  Esq.;  Rev.  Silas  Brown,  D.D.,  LL.D. 

13.  When  the  first  of  two  nouns  in  apposition  is 
in  the  possessive  case,  a  comma  is  placed  between 
them. 

Example:    "You  can  buy  it  at  Smith's,  the  bookseller." 

When  the  second  of  the  two  nouns  in  apposition 
is  in  the  possessive  case,  the  comma  may  usually  be 
omitted;  as,  "You  can  buy  it  at  Smith  the  book- 
seller's." 

When  the  first  of  these  terms  contains  several 
names,  the  comma  is  necessary  before  the  word 
containing  the  apostrophe;  as,  "You  can  buy  the 
book  at  Smith,  Brooks  &  Company,  the  book- 
sellers'." The  better  construction  is,  "You  can 
buy  the  book  at  Smith,  Brooks  &  Company's,  the 
booksellers." 

14.  A  comma  is  put  after  the  name  of  a  book  or 
play  when  it  is   followed  by  chapter  and   page,  act, 
scene,  etc. 

Example:    "  Romeo  and  Juliet,  Act  II,  Scene  3." 
15.     Adjectival,  participial,  independent,  and  abso- 


THe  Comma  89 

lute  phrases  are  separated  by  a  comma  from  the  rest  of 
the  sentence. 

Examples:    "True   to  his   promise,   the  general  at  once 
ordered  the  release  of  the  soldier. " 

"Generally  speaking,  a  good  man  is  a  brave  man. " 

Phrases  before  which  a  restrictive  relative  pro- 
noun is  understood  should  not  be  separated  by  a 
comma  from  the  rest  of  the  sentence;  as,  "The 
politician  at  the  mercy  of  the  voters  cannot  be 
absolutely  confident." 

1 6.  Adverbs  and  adverbial  phrases  that  modify 
clauses  or  whole  sentences  and  do  not  readily  coalesce 
with  the  text  are  followed  by  a  comma.  When  used 
as  connectives,  or  intermediately,  a  comma  precedes 
as  well  as  follows  them. 

The  following  words  and  others  of  similar  charac- 
ter come  under  this  rule:  Again,  once  more,  why, 
-well,  first,  at  least,  consequently,  in  general,  at 
present,  in  the  meantime,  etc.,  etc. 

When  any  of  these  or  like  words  modify  single 
words,  the  comma  may  be  omitted;  as,  "He  was 
again  notified  to  be  present. " 

When  an  adverbial  word  or  phrase  comes  between 
two  phrases  or  clauses,  it  is  separated  by  a  comma 
from  that  expression  only  which  it  does  not  qualify; 
as,  "He  suffered,  for  a  few  days  at  least,  the  mortifi- 
cation of  seeing  his  efforts  fail."  In  this  sentence 
the  adverbial  phrase  "at  least"  is  not  preceded  by  a 
comma. 

Used  adverbially,  yesterday,  to-day,  to-morrow, 
now,  indeed,  etc.,  are  not  separated  by  a  comma 
from  the  words  with  which  they  are  connected. 


90  Punctuation 

When  placed  at  the  end  of  a  sentence,  the  conjunc- 
tion too  is  not  separated  by  a  comma. 

When  therefore  easily  coalesces  with  the  other 
parts  of  the  sentence  it  should  not  be  separated  by  a 
comma. 

When  used  parenthetically  it  should  be  so 
separated. 

17.  When  a  final  phrase  presents  an  additional 
thought,  or  does  not  readily  unite  with  the  preceding 
phrase  or  clause,  the  comma  should  be  inserted  before 
it. 

Example:  "He  will  make  a  speech  on  Thursday,  either  at 
City  Hall  or  at  Madison  Square  Garden. " 

1 8.  Words,  phrases,  and  clauses  of  an  antithetical 
character  should  be  set  off  by  commas. 

Example:  "We  did  not  hope  for  complete  success,  but  only 
that  we  might  impress  them  with  the  fairness  of  our  claim. " 

19.  When  words  or  phrases  are  used  in  pairs,  a 
comma  should  be  placed  after  each  pair. 

Example:  "Sink  or  swim,  live  or  die,  survive  or  perish, 
I  give  my  hand  and  heart  to  this  vote. " 

20.  Phrases  and  clauses  transposed,  or  placed  out 
of  their  natural  order,  are  separated  by  a  comma  from 
the  rest  of  the  sentence. 

Example:  "To  the  conscientious  man,  there  is  no  satisfac- 
tion so  great  as  that  which  comes  from  the  performance  of 
good  work. " 

But  when  the  phrase  or  clause,  though  out  of  its 


THe   Comma  91 

natural  order,  is  closely  connected  with  what 
follows  it,  no  comma  is  required;  as,  "The  poor  ye 
have  always  with  you. " 

21.  No  comma  or  other  pause-mark  is  admissible 
between  subject  and  predicate,  except  in  the  following 
cases : 

(1)  When  the  subject  is  followed  by  an  explanatory  expres- 
sion that  requires  to  be  set  off  by  commas ;  as,  "Shakespeare,  the 
poet  of  humanity,  says,  'Conceit  in  weakest  bodies  strongest 
works. ' " 

(2)  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  or  more  nouns  not 
connected  by  a  conjunction;  as,  "Courage,  aspiration,  enthu- 
siasm, are  prerequisite  to  great  achievement. " 

(3)  When  the  subject  ends  and  the  predicate  begins  with 
the  same  verb,  or  with  two  verbs  of  a  like  form;  as,  "Whatever 
is,  is  right. "     "They  who  hesitate,  fail. " 

(4)  When  the  subject  consists  of  a  long  clause,  ending  with 
a  noun  or  pronoun  which  is  apt  to  be  read  so  closely  with  tiie 
predicate  as  to  obscure  the  sense;  as,  "The  great  difficulty  a 
young  man  meets  on  entering  business  life,  is  the  restraint 
placed  upon  his  ethical  impulses. " 

22.  The  items  in  a  date  line  are  separated  by 
commas. 

Example:    "Chicago,  111.,  May  27,  1907." 

23.  With  the  exception  of  dates,  numbers  consist- 
ing of  more  than  three  characters  are  pointed  by  the 
comma  into  groups  of  three  figures  each,  beginning  at 
the  right  or  at  the  decimal  point. 

Example:    963,500,128;     $546,734.34. 

24.  Proper  names,  when  inverted,  are  separated  by 
a  comma. 

Example:    John  Jones,  transposed,  is  written  Jones,  John. 


92  Punctuation 

THE  SEMICOLON. 

The  Semicolon  (;)  separates  the  parts  of  sentences 
that  are  less  closely  connected  than  those  separated  by 
commas. 

1 .  A  semicolon  should  be  placed  between  the  parts 
of  a  sentence  when  those  parts  are  separated  by 
commas. 

Example:  "If  you  have  talent,  industry  will  improve  it; 
if  you  have  none,  industry  will  supply  the  deficiency. " 

2.  A  semicolon  separates  from  the  main  sentence 
an  explanatory  or  contrasting  clause  or  sentence  intro- 
duced by  but,  for,  and,  therefore,  or  an  equivalent  word. 

Examples:  "It  is  an  honor  for  a  man  to  cease  from  strife; 
but  every  fool  will  be  meddling. " 

"The  night,  now  far  advanced,  was  very  disagreeable;  for 
the  rain,  which  found  us  unprotected,  fell  in  torrents." 

3.  A  semicolon  separates  short  sentences  slightly 
connected  in  sense  or  construction. 

Examples:     "God  made  the  country;  man  made  the  town." 
"Great  Nature  spoke;  observant  man  obeyed; 
Cities  were  formed;  societies  were  made." 

4.  The  semicolon  separates  a  series  of  clauses  having 
a  common  dependence  on  a  principal  clause. 

Example:  "The  prophet  saw  that  men  had  forgotten 
chivalry  and  honor;  that  each  sought  to  hinder  and  oppress  his 
neighbor;  that  the  whole  world  was  struggling  in  mental  dark- 
ness." 

5.  The  semicolon  separates  a  series  of  particulars 
when  they  consist  of  pairs  of  words,  or  of  single  words 
or  phrases  but  slightly  connected. 


THe  Semicolon  93 

Examples:  "The  student  of  nature  observes  the  relation- 
ship between  antithets; — inside  and  outside;  up  and  down; 
light  and  darkness;  heat  and  cold;  bondage  and  liberty. " 

"Logicians  say  the  operations  of  the  mind  are  three;  namely, 
I.  Apprehension;  2.  Judgment;  3.  Reasoning." 

6.  A    semicolon    is    put    before    as,    viz.,    to    wit, 
namely,  i.e.,  that  is,  and  similar  words,  when  they 
introduce  an  example,  a  specification  of  particulars,  a 
quotation,  or  an  illustration. 

Examples:  "The  ancients  recorded  four  great  divisions  of 
time;  viz.,  the  golden  age,  the  silver  age,  the  brass  age,  and  the 
iron  age. " 

"By  virtue  is  meant  a  particular  moral  excellence;  as,  the 
virtue  of  temperance,  charity,  or  patience." 

When  the  specification  is  long  use  a  comma  before 
the  introductory  word  and  a  colon  after  it;  as, "He 
specified  the  various  reasons  for  the  shrinkage  of 
values,  thus :  Over-production,  cessation  of  demand, 
etc.,  etc." 

But  when  as,  namely,  etc.,  with  the  terms  follow- 
ing them,  are  used  parenthetically,  they  should  be 
preceded  by  a  comma;  as,  "He  specified  the  items, 
namely,  stocks,  bonds  and  mortgages,  which  must 
be  considered  first." 

7.  In  market  reports  and  other  tabulated  matter, 
semicolons  separate  the  items  if  the  latter  are  long. 
Commas  are  used  if  the  items  are  short. 

Examples:  "Among  the  largest  items  on  the  list  of  United 
States  wares  shipped  to  New  Zealand  were  the  following: 
Boots  and  shoes,  $405,555;  flour,  $131,680;  hollow-ware  and 
ironmongery,  $232,350;  printing-paper,  $227,775;  kerosene  oil 
and  other  coal-tar  products,  $796,720." 

"Other  large  items  on  the  list  are  cartridges,  firearms, 
canvas,  clocks,  surgical  instruments,  etc. " 


94  Punctuation 

8.  "Yes"  or  "no,"  forming  part  of  an  answer  and 
followed  by  a  clause,  is  usually  separated  by  a  semi- 
colon. 

Example:    "Yes;  an  attempt  was  made  to  substantiate  the 
claim." 


THE  COLON. 

The  Colon  (:)  separates  the  parts  of  a  sentence  that 
are  less  closely  connected  than  those  separated  by  a 
semicolon. 

1.  A  colon  is  placed  between  the  parts  of  a  sen- 
tence whose  clauses  are  separated  by  semicolons. 

Example:  "Every  one  must,  of  course,  think  his  own 
opinions  right;  for,  if  he  thought  them  wrong,  they  would  no 
longer  be  his  opinions:  but  there  is  a  wide  difference  between 
regarding  ourselves  as  infallible,  and  being  firmly  convinced  of 
the  truth  of  our  creed. " 

2.  A  colon  should  be  placed  after  a  clause  that  is 
complete  in  itself,  but  is  followed,  without  a  conjunc- 
tion, by  some  inference  or  illustration. 

Examples:  "  It  is  not  enough  that  we  make  laws:  we  should 
obey  them. " 

"The  telegram  means  simply  this:  You  are  expected  to  be 
in  Chicago  by  Monday. " 

3.  A  colon  is  placed  before  a  formal  enumeration  of 
particulars. 

Example:  A  letter  contains  six  parts:  first,  the  location  and 
date;  second,  etc. 


The  Period  95 

4.  A  colon  is   placed   before  a  direct  quotation 
which  is  long,  or  contains  several  sentences. 

Example:    "Mr.    Smith    was    introduced    and    spoke    as 
follows:"  etc. 

5.  A  colon  is  placed  after  such  words  and  phrases 
as   thus,   again,  to   conclude,  once  more,  to   sum   up, 
and  similar  terms,  when  placed  at  the  beginning  of 
several  sentences,  to  all  of  which  they  refer. 

Example:     "To  sum  up:  The  plaintiff,  by  his  laches,  has 
forfeited  his  right  to  appeal. " 

6.  The  colon  separates  hours,  minutes,  and  seconds, 
when  given  in  figures. 

Example:    "At  9  :  45  the  meeting  adjourned." 

7.  A  colon  is  placed  after  the  salutation  in  letters. 

Example:    "Dear  Mr.  Meade:  Your  interesting  letter  of 
yesterday  is  received. ;' 

8.  On  a  title-page  a  colon  is  placed  between  the 
name  of  the  city  and  the  name  of  the  publishers. 

Example:    New  York:  Dodd,  Mead  &  Co. 

THE  PERIOD. 

1.  The  Period  (.)  is  placed  at  the  end  of  every 
complete  and  independent  sentence  which  is  neither 
interrogatory  nor  exclamatory. 

Example:    "Wit  is  frequently  sharpened  on  the  grindstone 
of  pain." 

2.  A  period  should  be  placed  after  every  abbre- 
viation. 

Example:    Supt.,  Gen.  Mgr.,  Rev.  Jas.  Smith,  D.D.,  LL.D. 


96  Punctuation 

NOTE.  Nicknames,  and  abbreviations  used  as  nicknames, 
are  not  followed  by  a  period;  as,  Tom,  Ben,  Sue,  Ed,  Rob. 

NOTE.  When  an  abbreviation  ends  a  sentence,  only  one 
period  is  used  to  mark  the  omission  of  letters  and  the  end  of  the 
sentence.  When  the  construction  requires  an  exclamation- 
point  or  an  interrogation-point,  the  mark  is  placed  after  the 
period;  as,  "He  called  for  us  this  P.M."  "Can  you  call  for  us 
this  P.M.  ?  "  "  We  ordered  several  books  shipped  to  Jones  Bros. " 
"Have  you  shipped  the  books  ordered  by  Jones  Bros.?" 

NOTE.  Words  derived  from  a  foreign  language,  used  in 
English  as  contractions  and  pronounced  as  such,  may  be 
written  without  the  period;  thus,  "Interest  at  the  rate  of  six 
per  cent  (abbreviation  of  centum)  was  charged."  Such 
words  as  isl,  ^dly,  idmo,  4(0,  8vo,  etc.,  are  not  abbreviations 
and  should  not  be  followed  by  a  period. 

3.  A  period  should  be  placed  after  titles,  headings, 
signatures,  etc. 

A  subtitle  or  subhead,  at  the  beginning  of  a  para- 
graph, may  be  followed  by  a  period  and  a  dash. 

Example:  "INCREASED  JAPANESE  DUTIES. — Before  the 
proposed  increase  in  the  Japanese  duties  can  become  effective, 
it  must  be  laid  before  the  Diet. " 

4.  A  period  is  placed  after  letters  of  the  alphabet 
used  as  numerals,  and  after  figures  used  to  number 
paragraphs,  etc. 

Example:    "The  items  were  classified  as  follows: 

a.  Inspection  of  parcels. 

b.  Customs  declarations. 

c.  Return  receipts  for  parcels." 

But  when  letters  or  figures  are  enclosed  in  marks  of  parenthe- 
sis, no  period  is  placed  after  them;  as,  "The  kinds  of  letters  are: 
(l)  Letters  of  friendship,  (2)  Letters  of  courtesy,  (3)  Letters  of 
business." 

When  letters  of  the  alphabet  are  employed  as  signs,  or  for 


THe  Period  97 

reference,  no  period  should  follow  them,  and  they  are  pointed, 
when  necessary,  as  ordinary  words;  as,  "Let  X  equal  100. " 

A  period  is  usually  placed  after  Roman  numerals  used  as 
figures;  as,  "  George  IV. "  (read,  George  the  Fourth).  Gen.  vii. 
14,  1 8.  In  this  use  no  comma  is  placed  after  the  abbreviation 
Gen.  nor  after  the  chapter. 

When  double  letters  are  used  to  indicate  the  plural,  as  pp.  for 
pages,  MM.  for  Messieurs,  only  one  period  is  used. 

5.  A  period  is  used  to  indicate  a  decimal  fraction  ; 
as>  99-5  J  and  also  to  separate  figures  representing 
dollars  from  those  representing  cents;  as,  $5.95. 

6.  The  name  of  an  author  is  separated  from  an 
extract  from  his  writings  by  a  period  and  a  dash. 

Example: 

"There's  not  the  smallest  orb  which  thou  beholdest, 
But  in  his  motion  like  an  angel  sings. " — Shakspeare. 

Several  periods,  called  leaders,  are  employed  to 
direct  the  eye  to  a  term  or  figure  put  at  the  end  of 
the  line.  In  this  case  no  point  is  placed  imme- 
diately after  the  last  word  before  the  leaders;  as, 

CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

Suffixes 12 

Contractions 14 

Punctuation 15 

Several  periods,  spaced  or  not,  are  often  employed 
instead  of  stars  to  indicate  an  omission  of  letters  or 
words;  as,  "He  was  recalled  ...  on  the  charge  of 
neglect  of  duty." 

A  period  should  not  be  used  after  a  word  in  which 
the  omission  of  letters  is  indicated  by  an  apostrophe, 
unless  the  word  ends  a  sentence ;  as,  rec'd,  ex'r. 


98  Punctuation 

THE  INTERROGATION-POINT. 

1.  The  Interrogation-Point  (?)  is  placed  at  the  end 
of  every  direct  question. 

Example:     "Where  are  you  going?" 

Sometimes  a  sentence,  affirmative  in  sense,  is  put, 
for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  in  the  form  of  a  question. 
In  such  case  it  is  followed  by  an  interrogation-point. 

Example:  "What  could  I  not  do  in  a  year  if  I  had  all  that 
time  to  myself?" 

2.  The  interrogation-point  should  be  inserted  im- 
mediately after  a  question  that  introduces  a  remark 
or  a  quotation. 

Example:  "Who  has  not  heard  this  maxim? — 'It  is  better 
to  rub  than  rust. ' " 

3.  A  question  introduced  in  the  body  of  an  affirma- 
tive sentence  takes   the    interrogation- point   imme- 
diately after  it. 

Example:  "The  great  questions,  'What  are  we  here  for? 
Whither  are  we  drifting?'  demand  our  most  serious  considera- 
tion." 

Sometimes  a  sentence  is  composed  of  a  series  of 
questions  which,  if  put  in  an  affirmative  form,  would 
be  separated  by  commas  or  semicolons.  In  this  case, 
while  a  mark  of  interrogation  is  placed  after  each 
question,  a  capital  letter  is  not  used  to  begin  each 
question. 

Example:  "To  show  my  country's  greatness,  shall  I  refer 
to  her  standing  army?  or  to  her  navy?  or  to  her  railroads? 
or  would  you  rather  hear  about  the  homes  of  her  people?" 

Again,  a  series  of  interrogative  sentences  may  be 


XHe   Exclamation-Point  99 

closely  related,  yet  each  be  distinct  in  itself.  In  such 
case  each  sentence  begins  with  a  capital  letter  and  is 
followed  by  an  interrogation-point. 

Example:    "Is  he  wise?    Is  he  genial?    Is  he  sincere?    Is 
he  sympathetic?    Well,  then,  he  is  popular  and  influential. " 

The  interrogation-point  must  not  be  used  after  an 
indirect  question;  as,  "He  asked  me  how  many  men 
were  there." 

The  interrogation-mark  enclosed  in  marks  of  paren- 
thesis expresses  doubt. 

Example:    "His  profound  (?)  wisdom  excited  laughter." 

THE  EXCLAMATION-POINT. 

The  Exclamation-Point  (!)  is  placed  after  interjec- 
tions, emphatic  terms  of  address,  and  all  words, 
phrases,  or  sentences  denoting  emotion,  impatience, 
surprise,  etc. 

Examples:    Oh!    Ah!    Pshaw!    Too  bad!     Dreadful! 

Friends,  countrymen,  and  lovers!  hear  me  for  my  cause. 

John!  come  here  immediately. 

Hurrah !     The  troops  are  coming. 

When  the  emotion  or  passion  belongs  to  the  entire 
phrase,  clause,  or  sentence,  the  exclamation-point 
should  be  placed  at  the  close. 

Examples:    "Alas,    that   such  a  thing  should   happen!" 
"Oh,  it  was  pitiable!" 

There  is  an  essential  difference  between  the  inter- 
jections 0  and  oh.  The  former  is  used  in  a  direct 
address  and  should  not  have  the  exclamation-point 
immediately  after  it;  as,  "  O  friend,  that  I  might  fly!" 

Oh  sometimes  takes  the  exclamation-point  immedi- 
ately after  it  and  sometimes  not,  according  to  the 


ioo  Punctuation 

construction  and  sense  of  the  expression  in  which  it 
occurs.  Where  the  expression  of  feeling  or  emotion 
is  limited  to  the  word  oh,  the  mark  should  follow  that 
word;  as,  "Oh!  Did  you  hear  that  sound?" 

Where  the  emotion  runs  throughout  the  entire 
clause  or  sentence,  the  exclamation-point  closes  the 
sentence,  the  word  oh  being  set  off  by  a  comma  if  it  is 
separable  from  the  rest  of  the  sentence;  if  not,  no 
mark  should  follow  it. 

Examples:     Oh,  saddest  picture  in  the  book  of  time! 
Oh  that  men  should  put  an  enemy  into  their  mouths  to  steal 
away  their  brains! 

When  the  same  exclamatory  word  is  repeated 
rapidly  a  comma  may  be  placed  after  all  but  the  last ; 
as,  " Ha,  ha,  ha!  It  was  a  most  amusing  play. "  "No, 
no,  no!  That  is  not  the  way  I  told  you." 

Increasing  emotion,  wonder,  surprise,  irony,  or  con- 
tempt may  be  indicated  by  increasing  the  number  of 
exclamatory  marks;  as,  "Going!  Going!!  Gone!!!" 
"Trust  him!!  I  would  rather  trust  any  criminal  in 
prison." 

The  exclamation-point  is  sometimes  used  to  imply 
doubt  or  irony;  as,  "He  said  the  brigand  was  a  very 
pious  (!)  man." 

Whether  a  capital  letter  should  begin  the  word 
following  the  exclamation-point  must  be  determined 
by  the  closeness  of  the  connection.  In  the  following 
examples  the  break  is  complete  and  it  is  proper  to  use 
a  capital  letter  after  the  first  exclamatory  expression : 
"How  now!  What 's  the  matter?"  "Bah!  Give  me 
what  is  mine  and  I  will  go. " 

The  exclamation-point  is  made  by  holding  down  the 
space-bar  while  striking  the  period  and  the  apostrophe. 


MarKs  of  ParentHesis  101 

MARKS  OF  PARENTHESIS. 

Marks  of  Parenthesis,  consisting  of  two  curved  lines 
(  ),  are  used  to  enclose  explanatory  words,  or  expres- 
sions which  have  little  or  no  connection  with  the  rest 
of  the  sentence. 

Strictly  speaking,  the  parenthesis  is  the  part  inserted, 
although  the  two  curved  lines  are  also  called  parenthe- 
ses or  a  parenthesis. 

1.  If  no  point  would  be  required  between  those 
parts  of  a  sentence  in  which  a  parenthesis  occurs,  none 
should  be  used  before  or  after  the  marks  of  parenthe- 
sis; as,  "That  old  house  (you  can  see  its  chimney 
through  the  trees)  was  built  by  Thomas  Jefferson." 

2.  If  a  comma  or  any  other  mark  is  required  where 
the  parenthetical  words  occur,  it  should  be  placed 
after  the  last  mark  of  parenthesis;  as,  "Judge  Hazen, 
at  the  request  of  Mr.  Brown  (defendant's  counsel), 
discharged  the  prisoner. " 

3.  When  the  parenthetical  portion  is  interroga- 
tive or  exclamatory,  the  point  required,  if  there  were 
no  parenthesis,  should  be  inserted  before  the  first  mark 
of  parenthesis,  and  the  interrogation-point  or  exclama- 
tion-point before  the  second  mark  of  parenthesis;  as, 
"The  committee,  expecting  a  disagreement,  (can  you 
not  guess  the  reason?)  postponed  the  conference." 

4.  When   the   main   portion   of   the   sentence  is 
interrogatory  or  exclamatory,  and  the  parenthesis  is 
explanatory  or  affirmative,  the  interrogation-point  or 
exclamation-point  is  inserted  before  the  first  mark  of 
parenthesis,  and  the  parenthetical  portion  is  punctu- 
ated as  if  no  marks  of  parenthesis  were  used;  as,  "Ask 


IO2  Punctuation 

not,  Why  are  these  things  required?  (that  is,  obedience, 
temperance,  and  industry ;)  but  rather,  comply  readily 
and  cheerfully. " 

5.  When  the  parenthesis  occurs  at  the  end  of  a 
sentence,  the  period,  or  whatever  mark  would  be  ap- 
propriate if  there  were  no  parenthesis,  is  placed  after 
the  last  mark  of  parenthesis;  as,  "At  the  top  of  the 
hill  we  overtook  Dalton  (the  man  who  passed  us  in  the 
morning)." 

6.  Sometimes  marks  of  parenthesis  are  used  to 
enclose  an  expression  standing  apart  from  the  context, 
added  by  way  of  explanation  or  in  reference  to  some 
other  passage  or  book,  or  note,  section,  paragraph, 
rule,  or   remark;   as,    "The   learned   author  quoted 
liberally  from  the  Bible.     (Book  II,  pages  75-150.)" 

7.  Marks  of  parenthesis  are  also  used  to  enclose 
figures  or  letters  of  the  alphabet  when  enumerating 
items  or  subjects  or  introducing  paragraphs;  as,  "He 
gave  as  reasons  for  his  absence :  (i )  That  it  had  rained ; 
(2)  that  he  could  get  no  conveyance;  (3)  that  he  was 
delayed  by  an  important  lawsuit. " 

8.  Marks  of  parenthesis  are  also  used  to  enclose: 

(1)  The  name  of  a  State  or  of  a  person  not  properly 
belonging  to  the  context,  but  necessary  for  clearness; 
as,  "  He  (Jefferson)  was  the  foremost  man  of  his  time." 
"The  Omaha  (Neb.)  Bugle  advocated  Bryan." 

(2)  The  interrogation-mark,  expressing  doubt;  as, 
"In  1892  (?)  the  great  controversy  over  silver  arose. " 

(3)  A  number  or  an  amount  in  figures  when  it  is 
also  written  in  words;  as,  "The  house  was  sold  for 
three  thousand  dollars  ($3,000)." 


THe  Dash  103 

(4)  Figures  or  letters  used  in  tabulating,  as  in  this 
and  the  three  preceding  paragraphs. 

Marks  of  parenthesis  take  the  place  of  brackets  in 
typewriting,  and  are  thus  used  to  enclose  words 
inserted  in  or  appended  to  a  quotation,  and  not  belong- 
ing to  it,  as  in  giving  an  explanation,  rectifying  a 
mistake,  or  supplying  an  omission;  in  reports  of 
speeches,  to  enclose  expressions  of  approbation  or 
disapprobation  made  by  an  audience;  in  dramas,  to 
enclose  directions  to  the  players. 

THE  DASH. 

The  Dash  (  —  )  indicates  a  sudden  change  in  the 
sense  or  the  construction  of  a  sentence. 

It  is  usually  made  on  the  typewriter  by  two  hyphens 
(-  -),  with  no  space  before  or  after  it.  Some  very 
artistic  work,  however,  shows  the  dash  made  by  a 
single  hyphen  with  a  space  each  side. 

Place  a  dash : 

1.  Where  a  sentence  breaks  off  abruptly  and  the 
subject  is  changed  or  takes  an  unexpected  turn. 

Example :  Was  there  ever  a  bolder  captain  of  a  more  valiant 
band  ?  Was  there  ever — but  I  scorn  to  boast. 

2.  Where  the  sense  is  suspended  and  is  continued 
after  a  short  interruption. 

Example:  The  roadway  was  covered  with  yellow  sand — • 
yellow  is  the  imperial  color  of  China — and  an  entertainment 
prepared. 

3.  Before  a  word  or  phrase  repeated  in  an  exclama- 
tory or  emphatic  manner. 

Example:    You  act  like  a  lunatic,  sir, — like  a  lunatic,  I  say. 


104  Punctuation 

4.  Where  there  is  an  ellipsis  of  such  words  as 
namely,  that  is,  and  others  of  similar  import. 

Example:  The  greatest  names  in  English  poetry  are  the 
first  we  come  to, — Chaucer,  Spenser,  Shakspeare,  and  Milton. 

5.  Between  a  title,  or  a  subhead,  and  the  subject- 
matter,    and   between   the   subject-matter   and   the 
authority  from  which  it  is  taken,  when  both  are  put 
in  the  same  line. 

Examples:  ACCENTS. — There  are  three  marks,  termed  accents, 
placed  over  words. 

I  am  never  less  alone  than  when  alone. — Rogers,  Human 
Life. 

6.  Where  there  is  a  long  pause  for  rhetorical  effect. 

Example:    "One  other  bitter  drop  to  drink, 
And  then — no  more!" 

7.  Between  a  question  and  an  answer,  or  the  parts 
of  a  dialogue,  when  run  into  a  paragraph  instead  of 
beginning  separate  lines. 

Example:  "Here  is  John  again;  what  think  you  of  that?" — 
"Oh,  I  expected  him." — "Well,  why  has  he  come?" 

8.  Before  a  summing  up  of  particulars. 

Example:  The  birds,  the  flowers,  the  bees, — all  answered 
the  call  of  Spring. 

The  dash,  or  a  number  of  hyphens,  is  used  to  indi- 
cate the  omission  of  letters  or  figures. 

Examples :    Mr.  B addressed  the  meeting. 

The  winter  of  1898-99. 
Luke  xiv.  5-9. 

If  the  parts  of  a  sentence  in  which  dashes  occur  are 
susceptible  of  punctuation,  the  proper  point  should  be 


TKe  .Apostrophe  105 

inserted  before  the  dashes;  as,  "Can  you  go  to-night, 
— I  mean  to  the  theatre,  of  course, — provided  I  can 
get  seats?"  In  this  sentence,  if  the  part  between  the 
dashes  were  omitted,  the  remaining  parts,  "Can  you 
go  to-night,  provided  I  can  get  seats?"  require  the 
comma,  hence  the  comma  should  be  inserted  before 
each  of  the  dashes. 

When  a  parenthesis  is  introduced  before  a  repeated 
expression,  the  dash  both  precedes  and  follows  the 
marks  of  parenthesis. 

Example:  Go  forth,  then,  Spirit  of  Christianity! — (most 
precious  inheritance  of  the  ages!) — go  forth  to  thy  work  of 
reform. 

THE  APOSTROPHE. 

The  Apostrophe  denotes  the  omission  of  letters  or 
figures.  It  is  used — 

1.  To  form  plurals:     " Dot  your  i's  and  cross  your 
t's. "     "  The  y's  and  the  Q'S  were  not  made  distinctly  " 
(instead  of  "7es"  and  "QCS"). 

2.  To  form  contractions:  Isn't;  o'clock   (of  the 
clock). 

A  contraction  in  the  possessive  form,  singular,  has 
the  period  before  the  s;  as,  "Brown  &  Co.'s  plant  was 
burned. " 

3.  To  show  the  omission  of  the  century  in  dates; 
as,  '85  for  1885. 

4.  To    show    the    possessive    case:  "For    form's 
sake. "     "  No  one's  business. " 

A  word  pronounced  in  full  should  not  be  contracted 
by  the  use  of  the  apostrophe,  except  in  headings  of 


io6  Punctuation 

columns,  where  the  saving  of  room  is  necessary;  as, 
Cha's  for  Charles,  Ap'l  for  April. 

(For  further  suggestions  as  to  the  formation  of  the 
possessive,  see  pages  51-53.) 

THE  HYPHEN. 

The  Hyphen  (-)  is  used  both  to  join  and  to  separate. 
It  joins  the  parts  of  compound  words,  and  divides  a 
word  into  syllables.  It  also  indicates  the  division  of  a 
word  at  the  end  of  a  line. 

The  hyphen  is  also  used  to  distinguish  a  word  that 
is  spelled  like  another  word  but  differs  in  meaning  and 
pronunciation;  as,  recreation,  re-creation. 

The  hyphen  also  separates  two  adjacent  vowels 
that  do  not  form  a  diphthong;  as,  pre-eminent,  co- 
operate. 

These  uses  of  the  hyphen  are  explained  in  detail  in 
the  chapters  on  "Compound  Words"  and  "Syllabi- 
cation." 

MARKS  OF  QUOTATION. 

Marks  of  Quotation  (  "  "  )  are  used  to  show  that 
the  words  enclosed  by  them  are  the  words  of  another 
speaker  or  writer. 

i.  A  word,  phrase,  or  passage,  belonging  to 
another,  and  introduced  directly  into  one's  own 
composition,  should  be  enclosed  in  quotation-marks. 

Example :  It  was  Pope  who  said,  "  O  grant  an  honest 
fame,  or  grant  me  none!" 

NOTE.  When  a  writer  repeats  his  own  language,  in  order  to 
draw  particular  attention  to  it,  he  encloses  it  in  quotation- 
marks. 


MarKs  of  Quotation  107 

Example :  In  my  letter  of  last  week,  you  will  remember 
that  I  wrote,  "  Buy  no  mining  stocks." 

NOTE.  Marks  of  quotation  may  be  omitted  where  the 
matter  introduced  is  not  given  in  the  exact  words  of  the  author. 

Example  :  In  my  letter  of  last  week,  you  will  remember  that 
I  wrote  you  to  buy  no  mining  stocks. 

Titles  of  books,  newspapers,  and  newspaper  articles, 
names  of  plays,  but  not  of  the  characters,  names  of 
ships,  etc.,  are  usually  enclosed  in  quotation-marks. 
If  the  quotation-marks  are  omitted,  the  titles  and 
names  should  be  underscored. 

Examples  :  Many  consider  "  Adam  Bede"  the  bestof  George 
Eliot's  books. 
The  steamer  Prince  Victor  arrived  to-day. 

2.  When  one  quotation  is  included  within  another, 
the  included  quotation  is  enclosed  by  single  quotation- 
marks  (i  e.,  the  apostrophe).  • 

Example:  "Let  me  here  remind  you,"  said  the  speaker, 
"  that  he  was  a  wise  man  who  said, '  Let  me  write  the  ballads  of 
a  nation  and  I  care  not  who  makes  its  laws.'  " 

NOTE.  When  the  quotation  which  is  included  within 
another  also  contains  a  quotation,  the  latter  is  enclosed 
by  double  marks. 

Example :  "  Mrs.  Child  says, '  He  thus  describes  the  closing 
day:  "  Now  Twilight  lets  her  curtain  down  and  pins  it  with 
a  star" — which  is  certainly  a  pretty  conceit.'  " 

If  this  quotation  ended  with  the  word  "star,"  the 
double,  single,  and  double  marks  would  appropriately 
follow: — ''Mrs.  Child  says,  'He  thus  describes  the 
closing  day:  "Now  Twilight  lets  her  curtain  down 
and  pins  it  with  a  star." 

Wilson  in  his  Treatise  on  Punctuation  says  that  in 
some  instances,  as  in  quoting  texts  of  Scripture,  where 
there  are  several  quotations  so  involved  one  within 


loS  Punctuation 

another  that  the  insertion  of  all  the  marks  would  tend 
to  obscure  the  meaning  of  the  passage,  the  inner  marks 
may  properly  be  omitted,  and  gives  this  remarkable 
example:  "In  the  New  Testament  we  have  the 
following  words:  '  Jesus  answered  the  Jews,  "  Is  it  not 
written  in  your  law, — '  I  said,  "  Ye  are  gods  "  '?" 
To  eliminate  the  numerous  marks  which  disfigure  the 
passage,  Wilson  recommends  the  omission  of  all  except 
the  opening  marks  and  the  first  of  the  inner  marks: 
"  In  the  New  Testament  we  have  the  following  words: 
'  Jesus  answered  the  Jews,  Is  it  not  written  in  your 
law, — I  said,  Ye  are  gods? '  " 

3.  When  the  matter  quoted  is  composed  of  suc- 
cessive paragraphs,  each  paragraph  is  preceded  by 
quotation-marks,  but  the  marks  are  not  placed  at  the 
end  of  any  of  the  paragraphs  except  the  last  one. 

Example :  "  The  meek  enjoy  the  best  values,  have  dominion 
oy  righteousness  and  service,  by  being  the  right  kind  of  persons. 

"  Now,  have  we  a  better  conception  of  this  ideal  character 
than  that  which  is  expressed  in  the  good  word  '  gentleman ' — 
the  righteous,  the  honorable,  the  cultivated  man  ? 

"  We  might  almost  say  that  the  Christian  conception  of 
character  has  passed  from  the  ideal  of  the  saint  to  the  ideal  of 
the  gentleman." 

When  the  quoted  matter  occupies  several  lines,  put 
it  in  a  separate  paragraph,  single  space,  and  indent  the 
margins. 

Example  :  The  following  telegram  was  received  by  us  this 
morning  and  transmitted  according  to  instructions: 

"  Figures  have  been  prepared  by  the  railroads' 
press  bureau  which  are  meant  to  show  that  the 
proposed  increase  of  freight  rates  is  so  small  in  its 
effect  on  the  consumer  that  it  will  not  be  felt." 


MarKs  of  Quotation  109 

4.  When  particular  attention  is  desired  to  be  drawn 
to  a  quoted  passage  embodied  in  the  text  of  an  article, 
quotation-marks  are  placed  at  the  beginning  of  each 
line  of  the  quotation;  as,  Trench  well  says,  "  What  a 
" lesson  the  word  'diligence'  contains!     How  profit- 
"  able  it  is  for  every  one  of  us  to  be  reminded, — as  we 
"are  reminded  when  we  make  ourselves  aware  of  its 
"derivation   from   diligo,    'to   love,' — that  the  only 
"secret  of  true  industry  in  our  work  is  love  of  that 
"work!" 

When  an  extract  is  not  quoted  in  full,  the  sign 
"&c"  or  the  abbreviation  "etc."  which  takes  the 
place  of  the  omitted  part  should  follow  the  quotation- 
mark. 

Example :  As  you  know,  he  rusned  in,  in  great  agitation, 
exclaiming,  "  The  house  is  on  fire,"  etc.,  and  was  off  again 
before  we  could  question  him. 

When  a  dash  follows  a  quoted  passage  to  show  that 
the  quotation  is  incomplete,  the  mark  of  quotation 
follows  the  dash. 

Example  :  He  yelled  excitedly,  "  I  am  not — I  need  not  say 
that  I  am  not — "  but  the  wind  took  away  his  voice  and  we 
heard  no  more. 

5.  The  period  and  the  comma  are  always  put  be- 
fore the  closing  quotation-mark.  The  colon,  semicolon, 
mark  of  interrogation,  and  mark  of  exclamation  come 
before    or    after    the    quotation-mark    according   to 
whether  or  not  the  punctuation  be  a  part  of  the  matter 
quoted. 

Thus,  when  a  direct  question  is  quoted,  the  interro- 
gation-mark is  put  before  the  quotation-mark. 

Example:    I  was  asked,  "Will  you  stay  for  breakfast?" 


no  Punctuation 

What  a.  wonderful  poem  is  Byron's  "Apostrophe  to  the 
Ocean"! 

Can  you  understand  the  statement  our  teacher  made  yester- 
day, that  "all  the  nations  of  the  earth  are  of  one  blood"? 

It  is  not  enough  to  say  to  a  young  man  just  entering  business 
life,  "All  is  not  gold  that  glitters";  but  such  instruction  should 
be  given  as  will  enable  him  to  distinguish  between  gold  and 
tinsel. 

Words  or  phrases  specifically  referred  to,  or  used  in 
illustration,  may  be  put  in  quotation-marks. 

Example:  The  preposition  "for"  sometimes  means  "not- 
withstanding," "in  spite  of." 

MISCELLANEOUS  MARKS. 

The  Caret  ( A  )  is  placed  below  the  line  to  show 
where  a  word  or  other  matter  is  to  be  inserted.  It 
is  sometimes  inverted  and  placed  above  the  line. 

fast 

Example:  "Send  us  by A freight  loo  yards  of  black  rubber 
tubing." 

Marks  of  Ellipsis  are  used  where  letters  or  words 
have  been  omitted. 

These  are  sometimes  a  number  of  asterisks  (  *  *  *  ) 
or  periods  (  .  .  .  )  or  x's  (  x  x  x  )  or  a  long  dash 

( ) ;  as,  John  F d  (Fierund).  "We  will  not 

refer  *  *  *  to  the  several  matters  seriatim. " 

The  Section  ( §  )  denotes  the  small  divisions  of  a 
chapter  or  a  book. 

.  The  Brace  connects  several  names  or  items,  to  all  of 
which  a  following  word  or  clause  applies ;  as, 
John  Morgan,      } 
Martin  Greene,    >  Committee. 
Lewis  M.  Kohn,  ) 


Accent  III 

The  Ditto  Mark  (  "  )  indicates  that  the  words  under 
which  it  is  placed  are  to  be  repeated. 

Example:    Oct.  12    To  Railroad  ties,    $  1,000 
"     13     "         "        cars,      50,000 

The  Asterisk  ( * )  is  used  to  refer  to  footnotes  or 
marginal  notes,  and  to  indicate  omissions.  Figures 
or  letters  of  the  alphabet,  placed  slightly  above  the 
line,  also  refer  to  footnotes. 

The  Underline  ( — )  is  a  mark  of  emphasis  or  dis- 
play. In  preparing  manuscript  to  be  printed,  one 
line  under  words  indicates  italics;  two  lines,  small 
capitals;  three  lines,  capitals.  On  the  typewriter, 
however,  the  various  degrees  of  emphasis  and  display 
are  indicated  as  follows: 
Hurrah!  Hurrah!  HURRAH!  HURRAH! 

ACCENT. 

Accent  Marks  are  seldom  made  on  the  typewriter, 
foreign  words  being  written  as  ordinary  English 
words.  When  it  is  desired  to  indicate  accent,  the 
Tilde  may  be  made  by  the  hyphen  placed  directly  over 
a  letter;  as,  canon;  the  Cedilla,  by  the  comma  directly 
under  a  letter;  as,  garcon  (indicating  c  soft);  the 
Acute  Accent  by  the  apostrophe ;  as,  employe ;  and  the 
Diaeresis  by  the  double  quotation-mark;  as,  zoology. 
Such  words  as  co-operation  are  now  written  with  the 
hyphen  rather  than  with  the  diasresis. 


SYLLABICATION. 

1.  A  diphthong,  digraph,  or  triphthong  must  not 
be  divided,  but  must  be  treated  as  a  single  letter. 

NOTE.  A  diphthong  is  a  union  of  two  vowels  in  one  syllable, 
both  of  which  are  sounded;  as,  ou  in  doubt,  oi  in  oil. 

A  digraph  is  the  union  of  two  letters  (vowels  or  consonants) 
representing  only  one  sound;  as  oo  in  boot,  sh  in  she. 

A  triphthong  is  the  union  of  three  vowels  in  one  sound;  as 
eau  in  beau,  ieu  in  lieu,  eye. 

Exception:    The  double  consonants,  as  sst  bb,  nn,  etc.,  are 

divided. 

2.  Every    syllable    must    contain    one   or  more 
sounded  vowels. 

3.  Every  vowel,  diphthong,  or  triphthong  which 
is  sounded  makes  a  separate  syllable. 

Examples :    El-e-gant,  foi-ble,  beau-ti-ful. 

NOTE.  Two  or  more  vowels  coming  together  and  sounded 
separately  belong  to  separate  syllables;  as,  joyous,  a-or-ta, 
pli-ant,  pre-eminent. 

4.  Words  pronounced  as  one  syllable  should  not 
be  divided,   even  though  they  contain  more   than 
one  vowel;  dreamed,  marked,  drowned,  etc.,  should 
be  treated  as  one  syllable. 

5.  Words  should  be  so  divided  as  to  show  their 
correct  pronunciation. 

112 


Syllabication  113 

Note  that  the  words  ma-jes-tic  and  maj-es-ty,  frag-ile  and 
fra-gil-i-ty,  pro-duce,  prod-uce,  and  the  like,  are  differently 
divided  according  to  pronunciation  and  emphasis. 

6.  The    parts    of  a    compound  word  which  are 
themselves  English  words  with  meanings  recognized 
in  the  compound  are  separated  in  syllabication. 

Example:  Pine-apple  is  preferable  to  pineap-ple,  school- 
master is  preferable  to  schoolmas-ter. 

7.  Words  of  Latin  and  Greek  origin  are  divided 
according  to  sound;  as,  prac-ti-cal,  con-do-lence,  nec- 
es-sa-ry,  ne-ces-si-tate. 

8.  Separate  a  prefix  or  a  suffix  from  the  primitive 
word   if    the    pronunciation   is    not   misrepresented 
thereby. 

Examples:    Command-er,   suit-able,   fall-ing,   dis-approve. 

NOTE.  Words  like  tra-cing  are  exceptions,  as  the  pronuncia- 
tion is  better  represented  by  dividing  before  c. 

NOTE.  The  addition  of  a  suffix  sometimes  changes  the 
syllabication  by  changing  the  accent;  as,  re-form,  ref-or-ma- 
tion. 

NOTE.  When  the  addition  of  a  suffix  causes  the  doubling 
of  the  final  consonant,  the  added  consonant  goes  with  the  added 
syllable;  as,  run-ner,  spin-ning. 

9.  Double  consonants  are  divided. 
Examples:    Let-ter,  ac-cent,  ab-bey. 

10.  Two  or  more  consonants  between  two  vowels 
belong  to  the  latter  syllable  provided  they  are  capable 
of  beginning  a  word. 

Examples:    Sti-fle,  de-stroy,  lu-cre. 

11.  Two  consonants  which  do  not  form  a  digraph 
and  are  not  capable  of  beginning  a  word,  are  divided. 

Examples:     Cer-tain,  con-geal. 


114  Syllabication 

12.  When  more  than  two  consonants  come  be- 
tween two  vowels,  the  first  of  which  is  short,  write 
the  first   consonant  with   the  first  vowel  and   the 
remaining  consonants  with  the  second  vowel. 

Examples:    Blas-pheme,  elec-tri-fy,  dis-tress,  a-pos-tro-phe. 

But  if  two  of  the  consonants  form  a  digraph  they  must  not 
be  separated;  as,  breth-ren. 

13.  After  long  vowels  and  unaccented  short  ones 
the  consonant  or  consonant  combination  goes  with 
the  following  syllable. 

Examples:    Mo-tive,  de-press. 

14.  With  few  exceptions,  the  letters  d,  s,  sc,  t,  and 
z  do  not  end  syllables  when  they  combine  with  the 
following  vowels  and  form  the  sound  of  sh,  ch,  zh,  or .;'. 

Examples:    Re-la-tion,    pre-science,    con-science,    lei-sure. 
Exceptions:    Right-eous,  om-nis-cient. 

But  when  these  letters  follow  a  short  accented 
vowel,  they  often  end  the  syllable;  as,  nat-u-ral,  ed-u- 
cate,  habit-ual,  treas-ure. 

Certain  letters  or  combinations  of  letters  in  foreign 
words,  which  form  the  sound  of  consonant  y  are  kept 
together  in  the  same  syllable ;  as,  imbro-glio,  sera-glio, 
co-gnac. 

The  letter  x  is  written  at  the  end  of  a  syllable;  as, 
anx-ious,  com-plex-ion. 

Do  not  end  a  line  with  a  syllable  of  but  one  letter; 
as,  a-broad,  a-long,  a-ble. 

Do  not,  as  a  rule,  divide  words  of  only  four  or  five 
letters ;  as  only,  upon. 


Syllabication  115 

Do  not  begin  a  line  with  a,  syllable  of  but  one  letter ; 
as,  cre-ation ;  divide  thus :  crea-tion. 

Exception:    The  syllable  a  in   a-ble,  following  a 
primitive. 


ABBREVIATIONS  AND 
CONTRACTIONS. 

Abbreviations  universally  allowable  are  common 
titles  before  proper  names,  scholastic  degrees  and 
titles  after  names,  initial  letters  indicating  membership 
in  a  society,  and  initials,  used  with  figures  to  designate 
a  specific  point  of  time. 

The  more  common  of  such  abbreviations  are  given 
below : 

Adjt.     Adjutant.  Maj.    Major. 

Adjt.-Gen.    Adjutant-General.  Maj.-Gen.     Major-GeneraL 

Aid.     Alderman.  M.     Monsieur. 

Brig. -Gen.  Brigadier-General.  Messrs.     Messieurs. 

Capt.     Captain.  Mile.  Mdlle.    Mademoiselle. 

Col.     Colonel.  Mme.     Madame. 

Dr.    Doctor.  Mr.    Mister. 

Gen.     General.  Prof.     Professor. 

Gov.     Governor.  Rev.    Reverend. 

Gov.-Gen.    Governor-General.  Rt.  Rev.    Right  Reverend, 

Hon.     Honorable.  Sig.     Signor. 

Lieut.,  Lt.     Lieutenant.  Supt.     Superintendent. 

Lieut.-Gen.     Lieutenant-General. 

Lieut.-Col.    Lieutenant-Colonel. 

(Scholastic  degrees  and  titles  after  names,  etc.) 

A.B.    or    B.A.     Bachelor    of  Esq.  Esquire. 

Arts.  LL.B.     Bachelor  of  Laws. 

A.M.     or    M.A.     Master    of  LL.D.     Doctor  of  Laws. 

Arts.  M.D.  Doctor  of  Medicine. 

B.D.     Bachelor  of  Divinity.  Ph.D.     Doctor  of  Philosophy. 

C.E.     Civil  Engineer.  M.P.  Member  of  Parliament. 

D.D.     Doctor  of  Divinity.  M.C.  Member  of  Congress, 

116 


Abbreviations  and  Contractions    117 

(Points  of  time.} 

A.M.     Forenoon.  A.D.     (Anno  Domini)  Year  of 

P.M.     Afternoon.  our  Lord. 

M.     Noon.  B.C.     Before  Christ. 

Names  of  towns  should  not  be  abbreviated. 

Titles  may  be  abbreviated  only  when  used  with  the 
full  name.  They  should  be  spelled  in  full  when  the 
surname  only  is  given.  Gen.  William  T.  Sherman; 
General  Sherman. 

Christian  names  should  be  spelled  in  full  or  desig- 
nated by  initials,  with  very  few  exceptions,  such  as 
Wm.,  Thos.,  etc. 

Names  of  States  and  Territories  should  not  be 
abbreviated  when  used  alone  or  when  name  of  county 
only  and  not  name  of  city  is  given;  as,  The  State  of 
New  York  lies  east  of  New  Jersey.  Oswego  County, 
New  York,  borders  on  Lake  Ontario.  At  Ossining, 
N.  Y.,  there  is  a  famous  prison. 

The  words  north,  south,  east,  and  west  should  not  be 
abbreviated  when  they  form  part  of  a  geographical 
name;  as,  South  Auburn  (not  So.  Auburn);  North 
America  (not  No.  America). 

All  words  that  can  be  abbreviated  by  the  omission 
of  one  letter  only,  should  be  written  in  full.  Thus, 
do  not  write  Jno.  for  John,  or  Jul.  for  July. 

Titles  predicated  of  persons  should  be  written  in 
full.  Thus,  "The  Rev.  George  Campbell  is  a  Doctor 
of  Divinity,"  not,  "The  Rev.  George  Campbell  is  a 
D.D." 

Books  of  the  Bible,  given  with  chapter  and  verse, 
may  be  abbreviated.  Gen.  xxi,  7;  Matt,  v,  21.  But 
these  words,  used  without  reference  to  any  particular 


Il8  Abbreviations  and  Contractions 

verse  or  passage,  should  be  spelled  in  full;  as,  The 
Epistle  of  Timothy.  In  Genesis  we  read  the  story  of 
the  creation. 

When  two  words  are  abbreviated  by  the  first  letter 
of  each  word,  a  period  should  follow  each  letter;  as, 
e.g.  for  exempli  gratia. 

The  names  of  the  months  are  abbreviated  only  in 
dates,  bills,  statements,  tabulated  matter,  etc. 

May,  June,  and  July  should  not  be  abbreviated 
except  where  space  is  limited,  in  column-headings, 
etc. 

Months. 

January,  Jan.  July,  July. 

February,  Feb.  August,  Aug. 

March,  Mar.  September,  Sept. 

April,  Apr.  'October,  Oct. 

May,  May.  November,  Nov. 

June,  June.  December,  Dec. 

Days. 

Sunday,  Sun.  Thursday,  Thurs. 

Monday,  Mon.  Friday,  Fri. 

Tuesday,  Tues.  Saturday,  Sat. 
Wednesday,  Wed. 

COMMERCIAL  ABBREVIATIONS,  SIGNS,  AND 
CONTRACTIONS. 

Abst.     Abstract  Agt.    Agent 

Acct.  or  a/c    Account  Aid.     Alderman 

Acct.  cur.     Account  cur-  Amb.     Ambassador 

rent  Am.     America-n 

Adm.     Administrator  Amt.     Amount 

Admx.     Administratrix  Anon.     Anonymous 

Ad.     Advertisement  Ans.     Answer 


Abbreviations  and  Contractions    119 

A.M.     Ante  meridiem  (be-  Brot.     Brought 

fore  noon)  Bldg.     Building 

Apr.     April  Bdl.     Bundle 

Asst.     Assistant  Bu.     Bushel 

Assn.     Association  B.  0.     Buyer's  option 
Atty.    Attorney 

Atty.-Gen.         Attorney-  Can.     Canada 

General  C.  E.     Canada  East 

Aug.     August  C.  W.     Canada  West 

Av.     Average  Cap.     Capital 

Ave.     Avenue  Capt.     Captain 

Ai.     First  class  C/o    Care  of 

@.     To  or  at  C.O.D.    or    c.o.d.     Cash 

(or  collect)  on  delivery 

Bal.     Balance  Cash.     Cashier 

Bk.     Bank,  book  C.  w.o.     Cash  with  order 

Bbl.     bbls.     Barrel,  bar-  Cat.     Catalogue 

rels  C,  c,  £     Cent 

Bkt.  bkts.     Basket,  bas-  Cert.  Certif.     Certificate 

kets  Ch.     Chapter 

Bet.     Between  Chgd.     Charged 

B/E    Bill  of  Exchange  Chgs.     Charges 

B/L    Bill  of  Lading  C.  A.  Chartered  Account- 

B/S     Bill  of  Sale  ant 

B/P    or   Bs.    pay.     Bills  Ck.     Check 

payable  Chts.     Chests 

B/R    or    Bs.    rec.     Bills  Ch.  Clk.     Chief  Clerk 

receivable  C.  J.,  Ch.  J.     Chief  Jus- 

Bor.     Borough  tice 

Bot.     Bought  Cir.  C.     Circuit  Court 

Boul.     Boulevard  Cit.     Citation 

Bx.  bxs.     Box,  boxes  C.  E.     Civil  Engineer 

Bro.    Bros.      Brother,  C.  S.     Civil  Service 

brothers  Clk.     Clerk 


I2O  Abbreviations  and  Contractions 


C.  C.  P.     Code  of  Civil 

Procedure 

C.  Cr.  P.     Code  of  Crim- 
inal Procedure 
Coll.,    coll.        Collector, 

collection 

C.  C.  P.  or  Com.  Pleas, 
Court  of  Common 
Pleas 

Com.  Commission,  com- 
mittee, commercial, 
common 

Comr.     Commissioner 
Co.     Company,  county 
Cong.    Congress,  congres- 
sional,    congregational 
Cons.,     consol.     Consoli- 
dated 

Const.     Constitution-al 
Contr.     Contract,      con- 
tractor 

Cor.     Coroner 
Cor.  Sec.     Corresponding 

Secretary 

C.  a.  f .     Cost  and  freight 
C.  i.  f.     Cost,  insurance 

and  freight 
C.  C.     County  Court 
C.  H.     Court  House 
Cr.     Credit,  creditor 
Cwt.     Hundredweight 
Cyc.     Cyclopedia 

D/d     Days'  date 


D/d     Days  after  date 

D/s     Days'  sight 

Dr.     Debtor,         doctor, 

dram. 

Dec.     December 
Deft.     Defendant 
Deg.     Degree 

D.  V.   Deo  volente  (God 
willing) 

Dept.     Department 
Diet.     Dictator,   diction- 
ary 

Dis.  Discount 
Dist.  District 
-do-  Ditto 

Div.     Dividend,  division 
Dol.     Dollar 
Doz.     Dozen 
Dft.     Draft 

Ea.     Each 

E.  East 

Ency.,  Encyc.  Encyclo- 
pedia 

Eng.     English,    England 

E.  E.     Errors  excepted 

E.  &  O.  E.  Errors  and 
omissions  excepted 

Et  al.  Et  alii  or  alice 
(and  others) 

Etc.  Et  cetera  (and 
other  things) 

Ex.     Example 

Exch.     Exchange 


Abbreviations  and  Contractions    121 


Ex.     Com.         Executive 
Committee 

E.  g.,   ex.    gr.     Exempli 
gratia  (for  example) 

Exec.,  Exr.     Executor 
Exrx.     Executrix 
Exp.     Expense 
Ex.     Express 

Fahr.     Fahrenheit 
Feb.     February 
Ft.     Feet  or  foot 
Figs.     Figures 
Fol.     Folio 
For.     Foreign 
For'd     Forward 

F.  o.  b.     Free  on  board 
Frt.     Freight 

Fri.     Friday 

Gal.,  gals.     Gallon-s 
G/A     General  average 

G.  P.   O.     General  Post 
Office 

Gr.  or  gro.     Gross 
Guar.     Guaranty 

Hdkfs.     Handkerchiefs 
Hhd.     Hogshead 
Hon.     Honorable 
H.  p.     Horse-power 
Hund.   or  C.      Hundred 

Ib.,  ibid.     Ibidem  (in  the 
same  place) 


Id.     Idem  (the  same) 

i.e.     Id  est  (that  is) 

In.     Inches 

Incl.  Including,  inclu- 
sive 

Incog.     Incognito 

Inc.     Incorporated 

Inst.  Instant  (present 
month) 

Inst.     Institute 

Ins.     Insurance 

Int.     Interest 

Int.  Rev.  Internal  reve- 
nue 

Invt.     Inventory 

Inv.     Invoice 

I.  O.  U.     I  owe  you 

Isl.     Island 

Jan.     January 

Jour.     Journal 

Jour.  fol.     Journal  folio 

June.     Junction 

Jr.     Junior 

J.  P.  Justice  of  the 
Peace 

JJ.     Justices 

J.  Prob.  Judge  of  Pro- 
bate 

Jurisp.     Jurisprudence 

Ledg.     Ledger 
L.  f.     Ledger  folio 
L/C     Letter  of  Credit 


122   Abbreviations  and  Contractions 


Lirn.     Limited 

L.  S.     Locus  sigilli  (place 

of  the  seal) 
Lb.,  or  £.     Pound 
£,    s,    d.    (£4,    3s.    8d.) 

Pounds,  shillings,  pence 

Mme.       (plu.       Mmes.) 

Madame 

Mdlle.,  Mile.     Mademoi- 
selle 

Mfg.     Manufacturing 
Mfrs.     Manufacturers 
Mfs.     Manufactures 
MS.  (plu.  MSS.)     Manu- 
script 

Mar.     March 
Meas.     Measure 
M.  C.     Member  of  Con- 
gress 

Memo.     Memorandum 
Mdse.     Merchandise 
M.     Meridies  (noon) 
Messrs.,  MM.    Messieurs 
M.  E.     Methodist  Epis- 
copal 

Min.     Minute 
Misc.     Miscellaneous 
Mr.     Mister 
Mrs.     Mistress 
Mon.     Monday 
Mo.     Month 
Mt.   (plu.  Mts.)     Moun- 
tain, Mount 


M.    Thousand 

Nat.     National 

N.  G.     No  good 

N.  or  No.     North 

No.  Am.  or  N.  A.     North 

America 

N.  E.     Northeast 
N.  W.     Northwest 
N.  B.     Nota  Bene  (note 

well) 

N.  P.     Notary  public 
No.     Number 

Oct.     October 

O.  K.  All  correct.  (Hu- 
morous spelling  ' '  oil 
korrect") 

O.  T.     On  time 

O.  T.  or  O/T     On  track 

Oz.     Ounce 

Pkg.  (plu.  pkgs.)  Pack- 
age 

P.  (plu.  pp.)     Page 

Pr.     Pair 

Pd.     Paid 

Pt.     Part 

Payt.     Payment 

Pk.,  pks.     Peck,  pecks 

Pwt.,  or  dwt.  Penny- 
weight 

Per  an.     Per  annum 

Per  cent.  %     Per  centum. 


Abbreviations  and  Contractions    123 


PCS.     Pieces 

Pt.     Pint 

PL     Place 

Plff.,  pltf.     Plaintiff 

P.  M.     Postmaster 

P.  M.  G.  Postmaster- 
General 

P.M.  Post  meridiem  (af- 
ternoon) 

P.  O.     Post  Office 

P.  S.  Postscript  (post 
scriptum) 

Pfd.  or  Pf.     Preferred 

Prem.     Premium 

Presb.     Presbyterian 

Pres.     President 

Pro  tern.  Pro  tempore 
(for  the  time) 

P.  J.     Probate  Judge 

P.  E.  Protestant  Episco- 
pal 

Prox.  Proximo  (next 
month) 

Pub.  Publisher,  publish- 
ing 

Qt.,   qts.     Quart,   quarts 
Qr.     Quarter 
Q.  M.     Quartermaster 
Q.     Question 

R.  R.     Railroad 

Ry.     Railway 

Rec't  or  rect.     Receipt 


Rec.  Sec.  Recording 
Secretary 

Rec'd  or  reed.     Received 

Ref.     Reference 

Reg.     Register,   registrar 

Rt.  Hon.  Right  Honor- 
able 

Rt.  Rev.    Right  Reverend 

Rom.  Cath.  Roman 
Catholic 

R.  F.  D.  Rural  Free  De- 
livery 

St.     Saint,  street 

Sat.     Saturday 

Schr.     Schooner 

Sec.     Secretary 

Sec.     Section,  second 

S.  O.     Sellers'  option 

Sr.  or  sen.     Senior 

Sess.     Session 

Shs.     Shares 

S.     Shilling 

Shipt.     Shipment 

S/D     Sight  draft 

S.  or  so.     South 

S.  E.     Southeast 

Sq.     Square 

Str.     Steamer 

S.  S.  or  SS.     Steamship 

Sun.     Sunday 

Supt.     Superintendent 

Supp.     Supplement 

Sup.  Ct.     Supreme  Court 


124  Abbreviations  and  Contractions 


Ter.     Territory 
Thurs.     Thursday 
T.     Ton 
Tonn.     Tonnage 
Tp.     Township 
Treas.     Treasurer 

Ult.     Ultimo  (last) 

Vs.  or  v.    Versus  (against) 
V.  P.  or  Vice-Pres.     Vice- 
President 

Viz.      Videlicet     (to    wit, 
namely) 


Vol.     Volume 

W/B  (plu.  W/Bs.)     Way 

bill 

Wed.     Wednesday 
Wk.     Week 
Wt.     Weight 
W.     West 
Whf.     Wharf 

Xcp.     Without  coupon 
Xd.     Without  dividend 

Yd.     Yard 
Yr.     Year 


CONTRACTIONS  COMMONLY  USED. 


Are  not 
Between 
Do  not 
Does  not 
Even 

Halfpenny 
I  am 
I  have 

i  win 

I  would 
Is  not 
It  is 
It  was 
Let  us 
Madam 
There  is 
They  are 
Was  not 
Were  not 


are  n't. 

'tween. 

don't. 

does  n't. 

e'en. 

ha'penny. 

I'm. 

I've. 

I'll. 

I'd. 

is  n't. 

'tis. 

'twas. 

let 's. 

Ma'am. 

there 's. 

they  're. 

was  n't. 

were  n't. 


Abbreviations  and  Contractions    125 


STATES    AND    TERRITORIES    AND    THEIR 
CAPITALS. 

The  abbreviations  given  in  the  second  column  are 
those  recognized  as  official  by  the  Post  Office  Depart- 
ment, the  abbreviations  appearing  in  parenthesis 
being  those  sometimes  used  by  newspapers. 


State 

Alabama 

Alaska 

Arizona 

Arkansas 

California 

Colorado 

Connecticut 

Delaware 

District  of  Columbia 

Florida 

Georgia 

Hawaii 

Idaho 

Illinois 

Indiana 

Iowa 

Kansas 

Kentucky 

Louisiana 

Maine 

Maryland 

Massachusetts 

Michigan 

Minnesota 

Mississippi 

Missouri 

Montana 

Nebraska 

Nevada 

New  Hampshire 


Abbreviation 

Ala. 

Alaska 

Ariz. 

Ark. 

Cal.  (Calif.) 

Colo.  (Col.) 

Conn. 

Del. 

D.  C. 

Fla. 

Ga. 

Hawaii 

Idaho  (Ida.) 

EL 

Ind. 

Iowa  (la.) 

Kans.  (Kan.) 

Ky. 

La. 

Me, 

Md. 

Mass. 

Mich. 

Minn. 

Miss. 

Mo. 

Mont. 

Nebr.  (Neb.) 

Nev. 

N.  H. 


Capital 

Montgomery 

Juneau 

Phoenix 

Little  Rock 

Sacramento 

Denver 

Hartford 

Dover 

Washington 

Tallahassee 

Atlanta 

Honolulu 

Boise" 

Springfield 

Indianapolis 

Des  Moines 

Topeka 

Frankfort 

Baton  Rouge 

Augusta 

Annapolis 

Boston 

Lansing 

St.  Paul 

Jackson 

Jeff  ei-son  City 

Helena 

Lincoln 

Carson  City 

Concord 


126  Abbreviations  and  Contractions 


State 


Abbreviation 


Capital 


New  Jersey 

N.J. 

Trenton 

New  Mexico 

N.  Mex.  (N.  M.) 

Santa  Fe* 

New  York 

N.Y. 

Albany 

North  Carolina                    N.  C. 

Raleigh 

North  Dakota 

N.  Dak.  (N.  D.) 

Bismarck 

Ohio 

Ohio  (O.) 

Columbus 

Oklahoma 

Okla. 

Oklahoma 

Oregon 

Oregon  (Ore.) 

Salem 

Pennsylvania 

Pa.  (Perm.) 

Harrisburg 

Rhode  Island 

R.  I. 

Providence 

South  Carolina                    S.  C. 

Columbia 

South  Dakota 

S.  Dak.  (S.  D.) 

Pierre 

Tennessee 

Term. 

Nashville 

Texas 

Tex, 

Austin 

Utah 

Utah 

Salt  Lake  City 

Vermont 

Vt 

Montpelier 

Virginia 

Va. 

Richmond 

Washington 

Wash. 

Olympia 

West  Virginia 

W.  Va. 

Charleston 

Wisconsin 

Wis. 

Madison 

Wyoming 

Wyo. 

Cheyenne 

Cuba,  Havana. 

Philippine  Islands  (P.  I.),  Manila. 

SPELLING. 

"  If  you  and  I  and  ewe  and  eye 

And  yew  and  aye  (dear  me!) 
Were  all  to  be  spelled  u  and  i, 
How  mixed  up  we  should  be. " 

Until  "simplified  spelling"  comes  to  the  relief  of  the 
speller,  the  following  rules  will  be  found,  sometimes,  a 
helpful  substitute. 
Final  e. 

1.  Final  e  is  dropped  before  a  suffix  that  begins 
with  a  vowel;  as,  sale,  salable;  love,  lovable;  use, 
usage. 

Exceptions: 

1.  Final  e  is  retained  when  it  immediately  follows  o,  to 
prevent  change  of  pronunciation  of  the  root;  as,  shoe,  shoeing; 
hoe,  hoeing. 

2.  Final  e  is  retained  in  dyeing,  singeing,  tingeing  (from 
dye,  singe,  tinge),  to  distinguish  them  from  dying,  singing, 
tinging. 

3.  Words  ending  in  ce  or  ge  generally  retain  the  e  before  a 
suffix  beginning  with  a,  i,  or  o,  in  order  to  preserve  the  proper 
meaning  and  pronunciation;  as,  change,  changeable;  trace, 
traceable;  manage,  manageable. 

2.  Final  e  is  retained  before  a  suffix  beginning  with 
A  consonant;  as,  pale,  paleness;  excite,  excitement; 
chastise,  chastisement. 

Exceptions: 

I.     When  final  e  is  immediately  preceded  by  another  vowel 
127 


128  Spelling 

(except  e)  it  is  sometimes  dropped  before  a  suffix  beginning 
with  a  consonant;  as,  due,  duly;  argue,  argument;  true,  truly; 
woe,  woful.. 

2.  Words  ending  in  dge  are  also  generally  excepted  from 
this  rule;  as,  abridge,  abridgment;  acknowledge,  acknowledg- 
ment; judge,  judgment;  lodge,  lodgment. 

3.  There  are  a  few  other  irregular  exceptions  such  as  wise, 
wisdom;  whole,  wholly;  nurse,  nursling. 

Final  ee. 

3.  Words  ending  in  ee  drop  the  final  e  before  a 
termination  beginning  with  e;  as,  free,  freer,  freest; 
oversee,  overseer. 

The  double  e  is  retained  before  terminations  begin- 
ning with  other  vowels ;  as,  agree,  agreeable,  agreeing ; 
see,  seeing;  free,  freeing. 

4.  Words  ending  in  ie  drop  the  e  and  change  i  to  y 
before  the  suffix  ing,  in  order  to  prevent  two  i's  from 
coming  together;  as,  die,  dying;  lie,  lying. 

Final  f  and  I. 

5.  In  monosyllables,  final  /  and  /,  standing  imme- 
diately after  a  single  vowel,  are  generally  doubled ;  as, 
muff,  staff,  null,  pull. 

Exceptions: 

The  important  exceptions  are:    Clef,  if,  of,  pal;  nil,  soL 

Final  s. 

6.  The   letter   s,    standing   immediately   after   a 
single  vowel,  is  doubled  except  when  it  forms  the 
possessive  case,  the  plural  of  nouns  and  the  third 
person  singular  of  verbs;  as,  moss,  press,  hiss. 

Exceptions: 

The  important  exceptions  are  the  following  words:     As,  has, 
is,  his,  gas,  plus,  us,  this,  thus,  was,  and  yes. 


Spelling*  129 

7.  The  only  other  consonants  that  are  doubled  at 
the  end  of  a  word  are  b,  d,  g,  m,  n,  p,  r,  t,  and  z.     The 
following  list  contains  all,  or  nearly  all,  the  words  in 
which  these  letters  are  doubled:  Add,  ebb,  egg,  err, 
inn,  odd,  burr,  butt,  fizz,  fuzz,  purr,  shirr. 

Final  y. 

Usage  is  variable  regarding  this  letter,  and  a  good 
memory  and  the  dictionary  are  more  to  be  relied  upon 
than  rules.  The  following  rule,  however,  is  more  or 
less  dependable: 

8.  Final  y,   when  preceded  by  a  consonant,   is 
changed  to  i  before  a  suffix,  except  a  suffix  beginning 
with  i;  as,  icy,  iciest,  icily ;  pity,  pitiful ;  earthy,  earthi- 
ness. 

Before  the  suffix  ing,  final  y  is  retained:  try,  trying; 
dry,  drying;  pity,  pitying. 

Some  derivatives  of  adjectives  ending  in  y  retain 
the  y  before  a  suffix  beginning  with  a  consonant;  as, 
shy,  shyly,  shyness ;  other  words  of  the  same  class  are 
spelled  with  either  y  or  i;  as,  dry,  drily,  dryly,  driest; 
sly,  slyly,  sliest,  slyest. 

9.  Final   y,    preceded   by   a   vowel,   is   generally 
retained  before  a  suffix ;  as,  pay,  payable ;  obey,  obey- 
ing; enjoy,  enjoyed,  enjoying. 

Exceptions: 

Day,  daily;  gay,  gaily,  gaiety  (also  gayly,  gayety). 

10.  Nouns  ending  in  y,  preceded  by  a  vowel,  add  ^ 
to  form  the  plural;  as,  money,  moneys;  attorney,, 
attorneys;  turkey,  turkeys. 

Exception:    Words  ending  in  uy;  as,  colloquy,  colloquies. 


130  Spelling 

11.  Nouns  ending  in  y,  preceded  by  a  consonant, 
change  y  to  i  and  add  es  to  form  the  plural ;  as,  county, 
counties;  candy,  candies. 

12.  Y  is  not  changed  before  the  terminations  ship 
and  like;  surety,  suretyship;  secretary,  secretaryship; 
lady,  ladylike. 

Final  c. 

13.  Monosyllables  ending  with  the  sound  of  k,  in 
which  c  follows  a  vowel,  generally  have  k  added  after 
the  c;  black,  track. 

Exceptions:     Arc,  disc,  lac,  talc,  zinc. 

14.  When  words  ending  with  c  take  a  suffix  begin- 
ning with  e,  i,  or  y,  the  letter  k  is  inserted  before  the 
suffix,  in  order  that  c  may  not  be  sounded  like  s;  as, 
colic,    colicky;    traffic,    trafficking,    trafficked;    zinc, 
zinclcy. 

Final  g. 

15.  Final  g  is  doubled,  before  a  suffix  beginning 
with  a  vowel,  to  prevent  its  being  sounded  like  j;  as, 
drag,   dragging;  humbug,  humbugged,  humbugging. 

Other  final  consonants. 

16.  A   final   consonant  immediately  following  a 
diphthong  or  a  double  vowel  is  rarely  doubled;  as, 
haul,  reel,  peat,  door. 

Exceptions:    Feoff,  enfeoff,  guess. 

17.  In  monosyllables  and  words  accented  on  the 
last  syllable,  final  consonants  (except  h  and  x),  pre- 


Spelling-  131 

ceded  by  a  single  vowel,  are  doubled  before  a  suffix 
beginning  with  a  vowel;  as,  sit,  sitting;  clan,  clannish; 
refer,  referred;  compel,  compelled;  acquit,  acquittance. 

NOTE.  But  if  the  accent  is  changed  by  the  addition  of  the 
suffix,  the  final  consonant  is  not  doubled;  as,  refer,  reference; 
prefer,  preference. 

Exception:    Metal,  metallic. 

1 8.  When  preceded  by  a  double  vowel  or  a  diph- 
thong, the  final  consonant  is  not  doubled  before  a 
suffix ;  as,  soar,  soaring ;  seer,  seeress. 

19.  The  final  consonant  is  not  doubled  before  a 
suffix  beginning  with  a  vowel  when  the  accent  falls  on 
any  other  syllable  than  the  last;  as,  revel,  reveled; 
travel,  traveled,  traveling,  traveler;  profit,  profited; 
benefit,  benefited;  counsel,  counselor;  worship,  wor- 
shiped. 

20.  Derivatives  formed  by  prefixing  one  or  more 
syllables  to  words  that  end  in  a  double  consonant, 
commonly  retain  both  consonants ;  as,  befall,  inthrall, 
foretell,  enroll,  emboss. 

Exception:    Until. 

21.  One  I  is  dropped  from  the  syllable  full  when  it 
forms  a  suffix;  as,  peaceful,  beautiful,  rueful,  cupful. 

22.  One  /  is  dropped  when  the  termination  ly  is 
added  to  words  ending  in  //,   to  prevent  three  Vs 
coming  together;  as,  ill,  illy;  dull,  dully;  full,  fully. 

NOTE.  The  modern  tendency  is  to  omit  one  I  from  the  root 
word  on  the  addition  of  terminations;  as,  skill,  skilful,  dull, 
dulness;  will,  wilful. 


132  Spelling 

23.  Words  ending  with  a  vowel  sound  generally 
retain  it  unchanged  before  a  suffix  beginning  with  a 
vowel;  as,  echo,  echoed;  woo,  wooer;  huzza.,  huzzaed, 
dough,  doughy;  subpoena,  subpoenaed. 

24.  Some  words  ending  in  o,  preceded  by  a  con- 
sonant, form  the  plural  by  the  addition  of  es.     The 
words  of  this  class  in  most  common  use  are:  cargo, 
cargoes;  echo,  echoes;  motto,  mottoes;  potato,  pota- 
toes; tomato,  tomatoes. 

The  spelling  of  plural  words  is  fully  treated  in  the 
chapter  on  "Plurals." 

Able — ible. 

These  syllables  are  a  source  of  much  perplexity,  and 
the  typist  without  a  knowledge  of  Latin  has  no  remedy 
but  to  memorize  those  words  which  take  the  termina- 
tion able  and  those  which  must  have  ible:  Words  of 
this  class  which  are  derived  from  the  Latin  end 
respectively  in  able  or  ible  according  as  they  are 
derived  from  words  ending  in  abilis  or  in  ibilis;  as, 
mutable  (Latin,  mutabilis) ;  credible  (Lat.  credibilis). 
Such  of  this  class  of  adjectives  as  are  derived  from 
English  words  generally  end  in  able;  as,  avoid, 
avoidable;  eat,  eatable;  sale,  salable. 

En — in. 

There  is  a  class  of  words  beginning  with  en  or  in, 
as  enclose  or  inclose,  enquire  or  inquire,  ensure  or 
insure,  many  of  which  take  either  form  of  the  prefix 
indifferently.  Webster's  Dictionary  gives  preference 
to  the  syllable  in  in  all  these  words.  Standard  prefers 
enclose,  and  inquire,  insure,  etc. 


Spelling  133 

The  words  defense,  expense,  offense,  pretense,  etc., 
are  properly  spelled  with  an  s  instead  of  a  c,  for  the  s 
belongs  to  the  words  from  which  they  are  derived,  and 
is  used  also  in  all  the  derivatives. 


Ei — ie. 

These  combinations  give  endless  trouble.  It  will 
help  a  little  to  remember  that  c  is  followed  by  ei  and 
other  consonants  by  ie,  with  very  few  exceptions,  the 
important  ones  in  common  use  being  seize,  leisure. 
Weigh  and  neighbor  are  easily  remembered  by  their 
pronunciation. 

Ise — ize. 

As  to  the  terminations  ise  and  ize,  usage  varies. 
The  safest  way  is  to  memorize  those  words  in  which 
each  termination  occurs.  The  words  which  in  Eng- 
land terminate  in  ise  usually  in  the  United  States 
terminate  in  ize. 


Ise.  Ize. 

Advertise  Civilize 

apprise  criticize  (or  we) 

catechise  naturalize 

comprise  patronize 

compromise  characterize 

demise  anathematize 

disfranchise  dramatize 

emprise  tantalize 

premise  memorize 

merchandise  sensitize 

revise  jeopardize 
supervise 
surmise 


134  Spelling 

Ant — ent. 

The  same  rule  applies  to  words  terminating  in  ant  or 
ent.    The  following  are  in  most  common  use: 

Ant.  Ent. 

Confidant  Antecedent 

attendant  decedent 

defendant  dependent 

repentant  precedent 

affiant  superintendent 

abundant  correspondent 
observant 
assistant 


POETRY. 

Verse  may  be  put  into  artistic  form  from  manuscript 
by  indenting  the  short  lines,  which  are  usually  the 
alternate  rhyming  lines.  Center  the  longest  line  in 
the  middle  of  the  page. 

(Rhyming  short  lines  indented.) 

Resistance  will  meet  your  endeavor, 

When  striving  to  dare  and  to  do, 
But  be  like  the  meteor's  on-rush — 

Take  fire,  and  burn  your  way  through! 

(Indent  broken  lines  and  very  short  lines.) 

Lead,  kindly  Light!  amid  the  encircling  gloom 

Lead  thou  me  on; 
The  night  is  dark,  and  I  am  far  from  home; 

Lead  thou  me  on. 

Keep  thou  my  feet;  I  do  not  ask  to  see 
The  distant  scene;  one  step  enough  for  me. 

(Last  two  lines  of  equal  length  and  not  indented.) 

No  lines  need  be  indented  when  all  of  them  contain 
the  same  number  of  feet,  each  couplet  rhyming. 

Haste  thee,  nymph,  and  bring  with  thee 
Jest,  and  youthful  jollity, 
Quips  and  cranks  and  wanton  wiles, 
Nods  and  becks  and  wreathed  smiles. 

135 


136  Poetry 

(Two  rhyming  couplets  indented.) 

If  I  had  time  to  find  a  place, 
And  sit  me  down  full  face  to  face 

With  my  better  self,  that  cannot  show 

In  my  daily  life  that  rushes  so,— 
It  might  be  then  I  should  see  my  soul 
Was  stumbling  still  towards  the  shining  goal, 

I  might  be  nerved  by  the  thought  sublime, 
If  I  had  time! 

When  a  line  is  broken  the  part  carried  over  to  the 
next  line  is  not  commenced  with  a  capital. 


COURT  DOCUMENTS. 

The  preparation  of  law  papers  is  governed  by  the 
rules  of  the  courts  of  the  different  States.  Such  rules 
prescribe  the  size  and  weight  of  paper  and  the  style 
(whether  with  or  without  marginal  lines),  the  color  of 
ink,  etc. 

As  to  style,  the  simplest  arrangement  of  the  writing 
is  considered  the  best,  with  little  or  no  decoration. 

Complaints,  Answers,  Notices,  Stipulations,  Orders, 
etc.,  are  as  a  rule  written  upon  paper  thirteen  by  eight 
or  eight  and  one-half  inches,  plain  or  with  red  marginal 
lines,  as  may  be  required  by  the  rules  of  court. 

Three  copies  of  every  court  document  are  required 
where  there  are  one  plaintiff  and  one  defendant.  An 
additional  copy  is  made  for  each  additional  party. 

The  courts  of  some  States  require  all  court  docu- 
ments to  be  folioed,  the  figures,  representing  each 
hundred  words,  being  placed  in  the  left-hand  margin, 
outside  of  the  red  lines. 

Set  the  marginal  stop  at  the  left  two  spaces  inside 
of  the  red  lines  and  in  such  manner  at  the  right  that  no 
letters  run  beyond  the  red  lines. 

The  Caption  of  a  court  paper  is  the  title,  or  intro- 
ductory part,  containing  the  name  of  the  court  and 
of  plaintiff  and  defendant,  the  latter  connected  by  the 
word  "against"  or  "versus"  (abbreviated  "vs."). 

Make  a  "box"  running  to  45  or  50  of  the  scale,  as 
may  be  required  by  the  length  of  the  lines  of  the  title. 

137 


138  Court  Documents 

Place  the  name  of  the  Court  in  capitals  above  this  box, 
a  double  space  between. 

Inside  of  the  box  write  the  title  of  the  case,  the 
names  of  plaintiff  and  defendant  in  capitals. 

Do  not  write  the  name  of  the  document  at  the  right 
of  the  box  unless  instructed  to  do  so. 

Begin  all  court  papers  at  least  two  inches  from  the 
top  of  the  page. 

The  Venue  is  the  place  of  trial ;  also,  the  clause  at  the 
beginning  of  an  affidavit  showing  where  it  is  made  and 
sworn  to  is  called  the  Venue;  as,  "State  of  New  York, 
County  of  New  York,  ss. " 

"SS"  at  the  right  of  the  Venue  is  an  abbreviation 
of  scilicet,  a  contraction  of  scire  licet,  meaning,  literally, 
it  is  permitted  to  know.  It  calls  attention  to  what 
immediately  follows. 

The  Jurat  is  the  certificate  of  the  notary  or  other 
officer  who  "swears"  the  affiant,  and  is  placed  at  the 
end  of  an  affidavit,  verification  or  other  paper.  No 
jurat  follows  an  acknowledgment. 

Names  of  courts  should  commence  with  a  capital. 

Numbers,  sums  of  money,  rates,  dimensions,  etc., 
should  be  spelled  and  repeated  in  figures  in  parenthesis. 

The  common  forms  of  verification  and  acknowledg- 
ment, the  attestation  clause  to  a  will  and  similar 
paragraphs  in  frequent  use,  the  wording  of  which 
varies  but  slightly,  should  be  memorized. 

Write  all  court  documents  with  a  black  ribbon. 

Signature  lines  must  be  put  on  the  last  page  of  the 
document  with  the  concluding  paragraph,  never  on  a 
separate  page.  If  impossible  to  put  all  of  the  verifica- 
tion on  page  with  signature,  it  should  at  least  be 
started  on  that  page. 

Put  a  colored  "back"  on  each  copy  of  every  court 


Court  Documents  139 

paper,  endorsed  with  the  Caption,  the  name  of  the 
document,  and  the  name  and  address  of  the  attorney 
who  prepared  the  document,  in  form  similar  to  the 
following : 

SUPREME  COURT,  NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 


THOMAS  A.  GREENE  et  al, 

Plaintiffs, 
against 

WILLIAM  BROWN  COMPANY, 

Defendant. 


SUMMONS  AND  COMPLAINT. 


DANIEL  L.  BENTON, 

Attorney  for  Plaintiffs, 
27  Broad  Street, 
New  York  City. 


The  following  forms  of  arrangement  of  court  papers 
are  in  common  use,  the  "box"  on  page  140  being  the 
standard  form. 


140  Court  Documents 

SUPREME  COURT,  NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 
x 


JAMES  L.  WATKINS, 

Plaintiff, 
against 

ANDREW  W.  SCRANTON, 
Defendant. 


SUMMONS . 

Trial  desired  in 
New  York  County. 


TO  THE  ABOVE-NAMED  DEPENDANT: 

YOU  ARE  HEREBY  SUMMONED  to  answer  the 
complaint  in  this  action,  and  to  serve  a 
copy  of  your  answer  on  the  plaintiff's 
attorney  within  twenty  days  after  the 
service  of  this  summons,  exclusive  of 
the  day  of  service;  and  in  case  of  your 
failure  to  appear  or  answer,  judgment 
will  "be  taken  against  you  "by  default  for 
the  relief  demanded  in  the  complaint. 
Dated  March  27,  1811. 

EMERSON  BROWN, 
Attorney  for  Plaintiff, 
Office  and  Post-Off ice  Address: 
25  Pine  Street, 
Borough  of  Manhattan, 
New  York  City. 

(Bind  Summons  and  Complaint  together,  Summons  upper- 
most.) 


Court  Documents  141 


(Complaint.) 

(Caption.) 
SUPREME  COURT,  NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 


JAMES  L.  WATKINS, 

Plaintiff, 

against 

ANDREW  W.  SCRANTON, 

Defendant. 


COMPLAINT. 


(Introduction!) 

The    above-named   plaintiff,    complaining   of   the 
above-named  defendant,  alleges: 

(Allegations!) 

I.  That  between  January  4,  1904,  and  August  i, 
1904,  plaintiff,  at  the  special  instance  and  request 
of    the   defendant,   performed   work    and    rendered 
services  to  defendant  in  connection  with  the  forma- 
tion of  a  syndicate  by  means  of  which  the  defendant 
was  enabled  to  dispose  of  a  large  amount  of  stock  of 
the  Southern  Central  Railroad  Company  and  upon 
which  defendant  realized,  through  plaintiff's  efforts, 
a  very  large  profit. 

II.  That  defendant  promised  and  agreed  to  pay 
the  plaintiff  for  his  said  services  a  fair  and  reasonable 
compensation. 

III.  That  the  fair  and  reasonable  value  of  plain- 
tiff's said  services  is  the  sum  of  Ten  thousand  dollars, 
which  became  due  and  payable  by  defendant  on  or 
about  the  first  day  of  August,  1904. 


142  Court  Documents 

IV.  That  plaintiff  has  demanded  of  defendant 
payment  of  the  sum  aforesaid  but  defendant  has 
refused  to  pay  the  same  or  any  part  thereof. 

(Prayer.) 

WHEREFORE,  plaintiff  demands  judgment  against 
defendant  in  the  sum  of  Ten  thousand  dollars,  with 
interest  thereon  from  August  I,  1904,  together  with 
the  costs  of  this  action. 


(Venue.)  Attorney  for  Plaintiff, 

State  of  New  York     )  ss  .  25  Pine  Street, 

County  of  New  York  J  New  York,  N.  Y. 

(Verification.) 

JAMES  L.  WATKINS,  being  duly  sworn,  deposes 
and  says:  That  he  is  the  plaintiff  above  named; 
that  he  has  read  the  foregoing  complaint  and  knows 
the  contents  thereof;  that  the  same  is  true  to  his  own 
knowledge,  except  as  to  the  matters  therein  stated 
to  be  alleged  on  information  and  belief,  and  that  as 
to  those  matters  he  believes  it  to  be  true. 


(Jurat.) 

Sworn  to  before  me  this 
27th  day  of  March,  1905. 


Notary  Public  No. 


New  York  County,  N.  Y. 


For  Answers,  Demurrers,  Petitions,  Replications, 
Stipulations,  Notices,  Affidavits  (with  the  addition  of 
the  venue  following  the  caption),  etc.,  the  general 
form  of  the  Complaint  is  followed. 

An  affidavit  begins  with  a  Venue  following  the 
Caption  and  ends  with  a  Jurat. 


Court  Documents  143 

SUPREME  COURT,  NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 


JAMES  L.  WATKINS, 

Plaintiff, 

against 

ANDREW  W.  SCRANTON, 

Defendant. 


ANSWER. 


The  defendant  above  named,  by  Franklin  Simmons, 
his  attorney,  answering  the  complaint  of  the  plaintiff 
herein, 

1.  Denies  each  and  every  allegation  contained  in 
paragraph  I  of  said  complaint. 

2.  Denies  the  allegation  set  forth  in  paragraph  II 
of:  said  complaint. 

3.  Denies  that  he  has  any  knowledge  or  informa- 
tion sufficient  to  form  a  belief  as  to  the  allegations 
contained  in  paragraph  III  of  said  complaint. 

4.  Admits  the  allegation  contained  in  paragraph 
IV  of  said  complaint. 

WHEREFORE,  the  defendant  demands  that  the 
complaint  herein  be  dismissed,  with  costs  and  dis- 
bursements of  this  action. 


Attorney  for  Defendant, 
Office  and  Post-Office  Address: 
No.  27  William  Street, 
Borough  of  Manhattan, 
New  York  City. 

A  Complaint  or  an  Answer  without  a  verification  is 
in  some  States  void. 


144  Court  Documents 

(Notice) 

SUPREME  COURT,  NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 


JAMES  L.  WATKINS, 

Plaintiff, 

against 

ANDREW  W.  SCRANTON, 

Defendant, 


SIR: 

PLEASE  TAKE  NOTICE,  that  the  issues  of  fact 
in  this  action  will  be  brought  to  trial  and  a  motion 
made  to  dismiss  the  complaint  at  a  trial  term  of  this 
court  appointed  to  be  held  in  and  for  the  County  of 
New  York  at  the  County  Court  House  in  the  Borough 
of  Manhattan,  City  of  New  York,  on  the  first  Monday 
of  June,  1911,  at  10:30  o'clock  in  the  forenoon  of  that 
day. 

Dated  the  I5th  day  of  May,  1911. 
Yours,  etc., 

EARNER  &  GALLAND, 

Attorneys  for  Defendant, 
Office  and  Post-Office  Address : 
27  William  Street, 
Borough  of  Manhattan, 
City  of  New  York. 
To 

EMERSON  BROWN,  Esq., 
Attorney  for  Plaintiff, 
25  Pine  Street, 
New  York  City. 


Court  Documents  145 

(Judgment) 

SUPREME  COURT,  NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 


JAMES  L.  WATKINS, 

Plaintiff, 

against 

ANDREW  W.  SCRANTON, 

Defendant. 


JUDGMENT. 


The  issues  in  the  above-entitled  action  having  come 
on  for  trial  before  Honorable  Francis  M.  Belden  and  a 
jury  at  a  Trial  Term  of  this  court,  and  the  jury  having 
returned  a  verdict  in  favor  of  the  plaintiff  and  against 
the  defendant  for  the  sum  of  ten  thousand  dollars 
($10,000)  and  the  costs  of  the  plaintiff  having  been 
taxed  at  three  hundred  dollars  ($300), 

Now,  on  motion  of  Emerson  Brown,  attorney  for 
plaintiff, 

IT  is  ADJUDGED,  that  the  plaintiff,  James  L. 
Watkins,  do  recover  of  the  defendant,  Andrew  W. 
Scranton,  the  sum  of  ten  thousand  dollars  ($10,000), 
together  with  three  hundred  dollars  ($300)  costs  as 
taxed,  making  in  all  the  sum  of  ten  thousand  three 
hundred  dollars  ($10,300),  and  that  said  plaintiff  have 
execution  therefor. 

Dated,  July  17,  1908. 

(Signature  of  Judge) 
J.  S.  C. 


146  Court  Documents 

NEW  YORK  SUPREME  COURT 
NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 


JAMES  L.  WATKINS, 

Plaintiff. 

against 

ANDREW  W.  SCRANTON, 

Defendant. 


ORDER. 


Upon  reading  and  filing  the  annexed  petition  of 
James  L.  Watkins,  the  plaintiff  herein,  verified  the  5th 
day  of  June,  1906,  with  the  annexed  copies  of  the 
pleadings  and  the  annexed  affidavit  of  Oliver  Hobbs, 
verified  the  same  day, 

Now,  on  motion  of  Oliver  Hobbs,  of  counsel  for  the 
plaintiff, 

IT  is  ORDERED  that  the  defendant  herein  be  and 
he  is  hereby  directed  to  produce  and  discover  and  to 
allow  the  plaintiff  an  inspection  and  copy,  or  permis- 
sion to  take  a  copy,  of  such  contracts,  accounts,  papers 
and  other  documents  possessed  by  or  under  the  control 
of  the  defendant  as  will  show  all  transactions  involved 
in  this  action  between  May  1st,  1904,  and  May  ist, 

1905- 

AND  IT  is  FURTHER  ORDERED   that  all  proceed- 
ings on  the  part  of  the  defendant  be  and  hereby 
are  stayed  until  the  hearing  and  determination  of  this 
application. 
Dated,  New  York,  July  2,  1906. 

(Signature) 
Justice  of  the  Supreme  Court. 


Court  Documents  147 

(Trial  Term  and  Special  Term  Orders  begin  with  a 
"hanging  indention"  as  follows:) 

At  a  Trial  Term  of  the  Supreme  Court, 
held  in  and  for  the  County  of  New 
York,  at  the  County  Court  House 

in  said  County,  on  the  day  of 

,  1908. 

Present, 

Hon.  , 

Justice. 


JAMES  L.  WATKINS, 

Plaintiff, 

against 

ANDREW  W.  SCRANTON, 

Defendant. 


ORDER. 


The  issues  in  this  action  having  come  regularly  on 
for  trial,  etc. 

(The  arrangement  and  display  may  be  the  same  as 
in  the  preceding  order.) 


148  Court  Documents 

(Affidavit) 
SURROGATE'S  COURT,  NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 


IN  THE  MATTER 

of  the 

Application  of  AMOS  TRUE 
for  Letters  of  Guardianship  of 
the  person  and  property  of 
Edward  Leffingwell  True,  a 
minor. 


State  of  New  York     | 

r  ss  * 
County  of  New  York ) 

JOHN  CLAYTON,  being  duly  sworn,  says  that  he 
is  a  stenographer  and  typewriter;  that  on  the  nth  day 
of  March,  1906,  he  made  the  annexed  copies  of  the 
affidavits  of  Ernest  Keating  and  Joseph  Black,  filed 
in  the  office  of  the  Clerk  of  the  County  of  New  York 
on  the  loth  day  of  March,  1906,  and  referred  to  in  the 
affidavit  of  Amos  True  hereto  annexed;  that  he  has 
carefully  compared  the  annexed  copies  of  said  affida- 
vits with  the  originals  thereof,  and  that  said  copies  are 
true  and  correct  copies  of  said  originals. 


Sworn  to  before  me  this 
day  of  March,  1906. 


Notary  Public  No. 

New  York  County,  N.  Y. 


Court  Documents  149 

VERIFICATION — (By  Party). 
State  of  New  York      ) 

V  gg    • 

County  of  New  York ) 

JOHN  JONES,  being  duly  sworn,  deposes  and  says: 
That  he  is  the  plaintiff  herein;  that  he  has  read  and 
knows  the  contents  of  the  foregoing  complaint,  and 
that  the  same  is  true  to  his  own  knowledge,  except  as 
to  the  matters  therein  stated  to  be  alleged  upon 
information  and  belief,  and  as  to  those  matters  he 
believes  it  to  be  true. 


Sworn  to  before  me  this 
day  of  March,  1911. 


Notary  Public  No. 


New  York  County,  N.  Y. 


VERIFICATION — (By  One  of  Several  Parties). 
State  of  New  York 


County  of  New  York ) 


ss.: 


JOHN  JONES,  being  duly  sworn,  says  that  he  is 
one  of  the  plaintiffs  herein ;  that  he  has  read  the  fore- 
going complaint  and  knows  the  contents  thereof;  that 
the  same  is  true  of  his  own  knowledge,  except  as  to  the 
matters  therein  stated  to  be  alleged  on  information  and 
belief,  and  as  to  those  matters  he  believes  it  to  be  true. 

(Jurat  same  as  preceding.)        • 


150  Court  Documents 

VERIFICATION — (By  Officer  of  Domestic 
Corporation). 


State  of  New  York 
County  of  New  York 


[ss.; 


JOHN  JONES,  being  duly  sworn,  says  that  he  is 
President  of  the  Flushing  Terminal  Company,  the 
plaintiff  above  named,  a  domestic  corporation;  that 
he  has  read  and  knows  the  contents  of  the  foregoing 
complaint,  and  that  the  same  is  true  to  his  own 
knowledge,  except  as  to  the  matters  therein  stated  to 
be  alleged  on  information  and  belief,  and  as  to  those 
matters  he  believes  it  to  be  true. 


Qurat  as  preceding.) 


VERIFICATION — (By  Officer  of  Foreign 
Corporation). 

State  of  New  York     I 

(ss  * 

JOHN  JONES,  being  duly  sworn,  deposes  and  says: 
that  he  is  the  Secretary  of  the  Canton  Fire  Brick 
Company,  the  defendant  in  the  above-entitled  action ; 
that  he  has  read  and  knows  the  contents  of  the  fore- 
going answer;  that  the  same  is  true  to  his  own  know- 
ledge, except  as  to  the  matters  therein  stated  to  be 
alleged  on  information  and  belief,  and  as  to  those 
matters  he  believes  it  to  be  true.  Deponent  further 
says  that  the  reason  why  this  verification  is  not  made 
by  the  party  and  is  made  by  him  is  that  the  defendant 
is  a  foreign  corporation;  and  the  sources  of  deponent's 


Coxirt  Documents  151 

information  and  the  grounds  of  his  belief  as  to  all 
matters  not  therein  stated  upon  his  knowledge  are  as 
follows:  (Here  follows  an  appropriate  statement  of 
the  facts.) 


Sworn  to  before  me  this 
day  of  June,  1911. 


Notary  Public  No. 


New  York  County,  N.  Y. 


VERIFICATION — (By  Attorney). 

State  of  New  York      ) 

f  ss  * 
County  of  New  York ) 

JOHN  JONES,  being  duly  sworn,  says  that  he  is  one 
of  the  attorneys  for  the  Canton  Fire  Brick  Company, 
the  plaintiff  in  the  above-entitled  action;  that  he 
has  read  and  knows  the  contents  of  the  foregoing 
complaint,  and  that  the  same  is  true  to  his  own  knowl- 
edge, except  as  to  the  matters  therein  stated  to  be 
alleged  on  information  and  belief,  and  as  to  those 
matters  he  believes  it  to  be  true;  and  the  reason  that 
this  verification  is  not  made  by  the  party  and  is  made 
by  deponent  is  that  the  party  is  a  foreign  corporation. 
Deponent  further  says  that  the  sources  of  his  informa- 
tion and  the  grounds  of  his  belief  as  to  all  matters 
therein  not  stated  upon  his  knowledge  are  as  follows: 
(Statement  of  the  facts.) 


(Jurat  same  as  preceding.) 


152 


Court  Documents 


(Note  of  Issue.) 

SUPREME  COURT,  NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 


JOHN  DOE, 

Plaintiff, 

against 

RICHARD  ROE, 

Defendant. 


ISSUE  OF  LAW  TO  BE  TRIED 

BY  COURT  WITHOUT  JURY. 


CHARLES  J.  JONES,  Plaintiff's  Attorney. 
WILLIAM  P.  SMITH,  Defendant's  Attorney. 
Issue  joined  on  June  4,  1911. 
Notice  filed  by  plaintiff. 

Nature  and   object  of  action,   action  to  reform 
written  instrument. 

Noticed  for  trial  for  October  Term,  1911. 


Court  Documents  153 

(Arrangement  of  Captions  peculiar  to  different  States.) 

(Maine.) 
STATE  OF  MAINE. 


YORK,  SS. 


SUPREME  JUDICIAL  COURT. 

In  Equity. 


JOHN  DOE, 

Plaintiff, 

against 

RICHARD  ROE, 

Defendant. 


(Massachusetts.) 
COMMONWEALTH  OF  MASSACHUSETTS. 

PLYMOUTH,  SS. 


SUPERIOR  COURT. 

March,  1911. 


JOHN  DOE       \ 

VS.  V  PETITION. 

RICHARD  ROE  ) 


154 


Court  Documents 

(Illinois.) 


STATE  OF  ILLINOIS 


COOK  COUNTY 


JOHN  DOE, 

Plaintiff, 


vs. 


IN  THE  CIRCUIT  COURT 
SS.  OF  COOK  COUNTY. 

April  Term,  1911. 


RICHARD  ROE, 

Defendant. 


Gen.  No.  24560 
Term  No.  240 


In  Chancery. 


State  of  Illinois  ) 

f 
County  of  Cook  ) 

JOHN  DOE 

vs. 
RICHARD  ROE 


ss. 


IN  THE  CIRCUIT  COURT 
OF  COOK  COUNTY. 


Court  Documents 


155 


(Method  of  writing  Caption  for  consolidated  causes.) 

COURT  OF  APPEALS 
OF  THE  STATE  OF  NEW  YORK. 


CHARLES  M.  CAPEN,  individually  and 
as  Executor  of  the  Last  Will  and 
Testament  of  Frank  S.  Capen, 

Plaintiff -Respondent, 
against 
GEORGE  S.  CRANSTON, 

Defendant-Respondent. 
Impleaded  with  JAMES  TRUAX,   as 
Executor  of  the  Will  of  Frances 
Capen, 

Defendant- Appellant. 


CHARLES  M.  CAPEN,  individually  and 
as  Executor  of  the  Last  Will  and 
Testament  of  Frank  S.  Capen, 

Plaintiff-Respondent, 
against 
GEORGE  S.  CRANSTON, 

Defendant-Respondent, 
Impleaded  with  JAMES   TRUAX,  as 
Executor  of  the  Will  of  Frances 
Capen, 

Defendant-Appellant. 


FRANK  CAPEN 
WILL  SUIT. 


CRANSTON 
TRUST  SUIT 


BRIEF  ON   BEHALF    OF   PLAINTIFF-RESPONDENT 

UPON   MOTION  TO    DISMISS  THE   APPEALS 

IN   THE  ABOVE-ENTITLED   ACTIONS. 


156 


Court  Documents 

(Brief.) 


NEW  YORK  SUPREME  COURT 
NEW  YORK  COUNTY. 


WILLIAM  E.  DENISON.ES  Execu- 
tor of  and  Trustee  under  the 
Last  Will  and  Testament  of 
Henri  de  Granville, 

Plaintiff, 
against 

AUGUSTE  DE  GRANVILLE  and 
CHARLES  FRANCOIS  DE  GRAN- 
VILLE, 

Defendants. 


Before 
Hon.  B.  L.  Hill, 

Referee. 


BRIEF  FOR  DEFENDANTS. 


STATEMENT  OF  FACTS. 


Henri  de  Granville,  a  resident  of  the  City,  County 
and  State  of  New  York,  died  on  the  2Oth  day  of  July, 
1904  (Record,  fols.  2-4).  On  August  10,  1904,  his 
will  was  admitted  to  probate  by  the  Surrogate  of  the 
County  of  New  York  (Record,  fol.  5). 

Said  will,  after  directing  the  payment  of  all  just 
debts,  contained  the  following  provision: 


Court  Documents  157 

"In  case  of  the  death  of  my  said  son  Charles 
*  *  *  said  income  from  said  one-half  of  my  entire 
estate  hereinbefore  bequeathed  to  my  son  Charles, 
shall  be  divided  equally  between  my  said  brothers 
Alan  and  Auguste,  share  and  share  alike,  or  the 
descendants  of  such  as  may  have  died,  per  stirpes 
and  not  per  capita. " 


POINT  I. 

THE  AMOUNTS  THAT  HAVE  BEEN  PAH)  BY  THE  TRUS- 
TEE ON  ACCOUNT  OF  OBLIGATIONS  OF  HENRI  DE  GRAN- 
VILLE  SHOULD  BE  DEDUCTED  FROM  THE  PRINCIPAL  OF 
SAID  ESTATE  AND  NOT  FROM  THE  INCOME. 


Matter  of  Babcock,  115  N.  Y.  280. 

One  Detmold  left  a  will  by  which  he  devised  all 
of  his  property  to  his  daughters  for  life,  with  remain- 
der to  their  issue.  It  was  claimed  by  the  remainder- 
men that  the  taxes  assessed  on  the  property  before  the 
testator's  death  should  be  paid  from  the  portion  of  the 
estate  going  to  the  life  tenants.  The  Court  (at  page 
452)  said: 

"It  is  contended  by  the  appellants  that  in- 
asmuch as  current  taxes,  as  between  life  tenants 
and  remaindermen,  are  not  properly  chargeable 
to  the  former,  these  taxes  should  not  be  included 
in  the  inventory  of  the  debts  of  the  estate.  (Read 
v.  Solar,  72  N.  Y.  154.)  *  *  *  It  was  undoubtedly 
the  duty  of  the  executors  to  pay  them  from  the 
personal  property." 


158  Court  Documents 

So  an  obligation  to  pay  a  mortgage  on  land  which 
has  descended  to  a  devisee  or  an  heir  is  cast  upon  the 
devisee  or  heir  who  takes  the  land. 

Matter  of  Han,  144  N.  Y.  478. 

Halsey  v.  Reed,  9  Mass.  545;  34  Atl.  6ll. 

3  Redfield  on  Wills,  414,  Sec.  26. 

It  is  clear  that  the  real  estate  which  is  given  to  the 
wife  for  use  during  her  life  was  not  included  in  the 
"estate  and  property"  with  which  the  executors  were 
directed,  in  the  second  paragraph,  to  carry  on  the 
business. 

Respectfully  submitted, 

ALLEN  &  BUTLER, 

Attorneys  for  Defendants. 
James  Whittaker, 
Walter  Learned, 
Of  Counsel. 


(Flap.) 


w 


td 
P 

f 

§• 

S 
tt- 


8 


fog. 


2C 

33 

K|    W 

8  S 
*•  w 

O  n 

o   x 
pt   O 

&  ^ 
4  ^ 


Cu 
O 

3 
B 


159 


"BINDING"  LEGAL  DOCUMENTS. 

Legal  documents,  when  finished  and  ready  for  use 
in  court  or  elsewhere,  are  bound  in  a  stiff  backing- 
sheet  and  folded  twice.  Before  fastening  the  backing- 
sheet  to  the  document,  fold  it  properly  and  write  upon 
it  the  name  of  the  document,  names  of  the  parties, 
date  or  whatever  may  be  appropriate  to  designate  its 
character.  Turn  the  lower  edge  of  the  "back" 
upward  to  within  an  inch  of  the  top  and  press  the  fold 
flat.  Fold  again  from  the  bottom  as  before,  leaving 
the  inch  portion  at  the  top  free  to  be  turned  over  as  a 
flap  when  the  back  is  fastened  upon  the  document. 
Open  the  last  fold  and  place  in  the  machine  and  write 
the  endorsement  on  the  second  division  from  the  top 
— the  section  next  to  the  portion  with  the  flap.  This 
will  bring  the  printing  on  the  outside  when  the  docu- 
ment is  folded.  Turn  and  press  down  the  flap  and 
place  it  over  the  top  of  the  papers  to  be  bound  to- 
gether. If  McGill's  "round-head"  fasteners  are  used, 
put  them  in  from  the  back,  so  that  the  round  heads 
are  on  the  outside  when  the  document  is  folded.  This 
is  for  convenience  in  filing. 


Court  Documents  161 


INTERROGATORIES 
to  be  annexed  to  a  Commission. 


NEW  YORK  SUPREME  COURT. 


JAMES  L.  WATKINS, 

Plaintiff, 

against 

ANDREW  W.  SCRANTON, 

Defendant. 


Interrogatories  to  be  administered  to  Walter  Kip, 
a  witness  to  be  examined  under  the  annexed  commis- 
sion on  behalf  of  the  plaintiff  in  the  above-entitled 
action. 

FIRST  INTERROGATORY:  What  is  your  name,  age, 
occupation  and  place  of  residence? 

SECOND  INTERROGATORY:  Do  you  know  plaintiff 
in  this  action,  and  if  so,  how  long  have  you  known 
him? 

THIRD  INTERROGATORY:  Did  you  on  or  about 
December  9,  1910,  prepare  a  contract  for  execution 
by  both  the  plaintiff  and  the  defendant  in  this 
action? 


1 62  Court  Documents 

FOURTH  INTERROGATORY:  If  you  answer  the  third 
interrogatory  in  the  affirmative,  please  state  as  ac- 
curately as  you  can  the  substance  of  such  contract. 

LASTLY:  Do  you  know  anything  concerning  the 
matter  in  question  that  may  tend  to  the  benefit  and 
advantage  of  the  plaintiff?  If  so,  declare  the  same 
fully,  as  if  you  had  been  particularly  interrogated 
concerning  the  same. 

(Signature  of  Attorney.) 


In  some  cases  where  there  is  an  investigation  to  be 
made  and  testimony  to  be  taken,  the  court  appoints  a 
Referee  to  investigate  facts,  hear  evidence,  take  testi- 
mony and  report  his  decision  to  the  court.  At  such 
a  hearing  before  a  Referee  witnesses  are  examined  the 
same  as  at  a  trial  in  a  court-room.  The  testimony  of 
the  witnesses  is  taken  by  a  stenographer  in  the  office 
of  the  Referee  or  wherever  the  hearing  is  held. 

On  the  first  page  of  the  testimony  the  full  caption 
should  appear,  followed  by  the  appearances  of  counsel 
for  the  parties,  name  and  presence  of  the  Referee,  day 
and  hour  of  the  hearing. 

At  the  subsequent  sessions  the  full  caption  need  not 
appear,  if  it  be  long,  but  merely  the  names  of  the 
parties. 

The  following  shows  a  common  form  of  arrangement 
of  the  proceedings  and  testimony  on  a  hearing  before 
a  Referee: 


Court  Documents 

(First  day's  session.) 


163 


SUPREME  COURT  OF  THE  STATE  OF  NEW  YORK, 
COUNTY  OF  NEW  YORK. 


ALDINE  MANUFACTURING 
COMPANY, 

Plaintiff, 

against 

ARIZPE  MANUFACTURING 
COMPANY, 

Defendant. 


Before 

ALLEN  BROWN,  ESQ., 
Referee. 


New  York,  April  20,  1911. 

1:30  P.M. 

The  parties  met  this  day  at  the  office  of  the  Referee, 
No.  35  Wall  Street,  New  York  City. 
APPEARANCES : 

MESSRS.  GRAY  &  GREENE,  for  the  Plaintiff, 
M.  E.  LYNN,  ESQ.,  for  the  Defendant. 


The  Referee  states  that  he  has  taken  the  oath 
required  by  law. 

Mr.  Gray  opens  for  the  plaintiff  and  states : 

The  facts  briefly  stated  are  these:  On  May  24, 
1905,  one  George  Graham  entered  into  a  contract  with 
the  plaintiff.  The  contract  was  for  the 'sale  of  certain 
patents  by  Graham  to  plaintiff. 

REFEREE:  Who  signed  the  contract  for  the  plaintiff? 

MR.  GRAY:  A.  B.  Blackmap 

REFEREE:  Where  was  it  signed? 


164  Court  Documents 

MR.  GRAY:  At  Phoenix,  Arizona.  It  was  placed 
in  escrow  with  the  First  National  Bank  for  delivery  to 
plaintiff  upon  payment  of  certain  sums  to  the  bank. 

JAMES  SHERMAN,  sworn  as  a  witness  on  behalf  of 
the  plaintiff,  testifies  as  follows: 
DIRECT  EXAMINATION. 

By  Mr.  Gray: 

Q.  Are  you  familiar  with  the  signature  of  Mr.  A. 
B.  Blackman? 

MR.  LYNN  :     Objected  to  as  irrelevant. 

REFEREE:  He  is  entitled  to  answer  that  yes  or 
no.  Objection  overruled. 

A.     Yes,  sir. 

Q.  Will  you  please  look  at  the  signature  on  this 
paper  and  state  whether,  in  your  opinion,  it  is  the 
signature  of  Mr.  A.  B.  Blackman?  A.  Yes,  that  is 
Mr.  Blackman's  signature. 

MR.  LYNN:  I  should  like  to  defer  the  cross- 
examination  of  this  witness  until  to-morrow  at  n  in 
the  forenoon. 

Adjourned  to  to-morrow  at  1 1  A.M. 

(Second  day's  session.) 


ALDINE  MANUFACTURING 
COMPANY 

against 

ARIZPE  MANUFACTURING 
COMPANY 


New  York,  April  21,  1911. 

II  A.M. 

Met  pursuant  to  adjournment. 


Court  Documents  165 

PRESENT: 

The  Referee  and  respective  counsel. 
CROSS-EXAMINATION  BY  MR.  LYNN: 

Q.  Mr.  Sherman,  allow  me  to  ask  whether  you 
ever  met  Mr.  Blackman  after  this  alleged  contract 
was  signed?  A.  No,  I  did  not. 

Q.  Have  you  seen  this  contract  at  any  time  since 
May  24,  1905?  A.  No,  sir. 

The  testimony  may  be  continued  in  this  manner 
indefinitely. 

If  exhibits  are  offered  in  evidence,  the  stenographer 
makes  a  list  of  them  in  the  following  manner,  attaching 
the  list  to  the  testimony. 

EVIDENCE. 
Counsel  for  plaintiff  offers  in  evidence  the  following: 

EXHIBIT  A,     Copy  of  contract  dated  May  24,  1905, 

signed  by  George  Graham  and  A.  B. 

Blackman. 
Copy  of  escrow  agreement  dated  May 

24,  1905. 
Copy    of    letter    dated   June    3,    1905, 

signed  by  George  Graham. 


OTHER  LEGAL  PAPERS. 

There  are  various  other  legal  documents  not  classi- 
fied as  court  papers,  comprising  deeds,  contracts, 
agreements,  powers  of  attorney,  bills  of  sale,  wills,  etc. 

The  manner  of  displaying  these  documents  varies. 
The  following  forms  are  in  general  use.  Uniformity 
of  style  is  necessary  to  the  best  appearance. 

The  title  or  introductory  words  should  be  dis- 
tinguished by  full  capitals;  as,  THIS  DEED,  THIS 
AGREEMENT,  KNOW  ALL  MEN  BY  THESE 
PRESENTS.  With  the  exception  of  the  last  clause, 
these  words  may  also  be  written  with  a  space  between 
the  letters,  and  underscored. 

Numbers  of  paragraphs  may  be  in  capitals  or  in 
small  letters,  spaced  and  underscored  and  followed  by 
a  colon;  as,  FIRST:  First.—  First. 

Introductory  words  to  different  paragraphs  should 
be  in  full  caps;  as,  WHEREAS,  RESOLVED,  FUR- 
THER RESOLVED,  IT  IS  FURTHER  AGREED, 
TO  HAVE  AND  TO  HOLD,  IN  WITNESS  WHERE- 
OF, etc. 

The  names  of  parties  to  a  deed  or  other  agreement 
should  be  in  full  capitals  at  least  the  first  time. 

The  first  word  after  an  introductory  word  or  clause 
in  full  capitals  may  or  may  not  begin  with  a  capital. 
It  should  begin  with  a  capital  if  the  introductory  word 
or  clause  is  followed  by  a  colon. 

166 


Legal  Papers  167 

The  word  WITNESSETH  following  the  first  para- 
graph of  a  deed  or  agreement  may  be  in  the  last  line 
of  the  first  paragraph  or  may  be  the  first  word  of  the 
following  paragraph,  or  it  may  be  placed  in  a  line  by 
itself,  either  in  the  center  of  the  line  or  beginning  at 
the  paragraph  point,  and  should  be  followed  by  a 
colon.  It  may  be  in  full  caps  or  in  small  letters 
underscored  and  with  a  space  between  letters. 

The  following  are  the  best  forms  in  use: 


l68  Legal  Papers 


(Power  of  Attorney.) 

KNOW  ALL  MEN  BY  THESE  PRESENTS, 

That  I,  ABNER  BARNUM,  of  the  City  of  New 
York,  being  about  to  depart  from  said  city  and  state 
and  sojourn  temporarily  in  Europe,  have  made, 
nominated,  constituted  and  appointed  in  my  place 
and  stead,  and  by  these  presents  do  make,  nominate, 
constitute  and  appoint,  and  in  my  place  and  stead 
put  CHESTER  DARROW,  of  the  City  of  New  York, 
my  true  and  lawful  attorney,  for  me  and  in  my  name, 
place  and  stead,  and  to  my  use  during  my  said  absence 
from  the  said  city,  to  ask,  demand,  sue  for,  levy, 
require,  recover,  and  receive,  all  and  all  manner  of 
goods,  chattels,  debts,  duties,  rents,  sum  and  sums 
of  money  and  demands  whatsoever  due,  or  hereafter 
to  become  due  and  owing,  or  belonging  unto  me,  on 
account  of  the  business  now  carried  on  by  me  in  the 
said  City  of  New  York  as  real  estate  broker,  and  upon 
the  receipt  thereof,  or  of  any  part  or  parts  thereof,  to 
make,  give  and  execute  acquittances,  receipts,  releases 
or  other  discharges  for  the  same,  in  my  own  name,  or 
in  the  name  of  my  said  attorney,  and  all  other  instru- 
ments in  writing  of  whatever  nature,  as  to  my  said  at- 
torney may  seem  meet  for  carrying  on  the  said  business, 
and  make,  or  cause  to  be  made,  any  avowries  or  cogni- 
zances, and  for  me,  and  in  my  name,  to  commence  and 
prosecute  any  suits,  or  actions,  or  other  legal  proceed- 


Legal  Papers  169 

ings,  for  any  goods,  chattels,  debts,  duties,  demands, 
matter,  cause,  or  thing,  whatsoever,  due  or  belonging, 
or  to  be  due  and  belonging  unto  me,  or  to  be  demanded, 
or  that  may  be  demanded  by  me  in  any  court  of  law  or 
equity,  or  elsewhere ;  and  whatever  my  said  attorney 
shall  do,  or  cause  to  be  done,  in,  about,  or  concern- 
ing the  premises,  and  any  part  thereof,  I  hereby  ratify 
and  confirm. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  I  have  hereunto  set 
my  hand  and  seal,  the  5th  day  of  May,  in  the  year  one 
thousand  nine  hundred  and  eleven. 

(L.  S.) 

Signed,  sealed  and  delivered 
in  the  presence  of 


170  Legal  Papers 

(Bond.) 

KNOW  ALL  MEN  BY  THESE  PRESENTS, 
That  I,  JAMES  BLANK  of  Brooklyn,  New  York,  am 
held  and  firmly  bound  unto  JOHN  SMITH  of  Brook- 
lyn, New  York,  in  the  penal  sum  of  Three  thousand 
dollars  (#3,000),  lawful  money  of  the  United  States, 
to  be  paid  to  said  John  Smith,  his  executors,  adminis- 
trators or  assigns;  for  which  payment  well  and  truly 
to  be  made  I  bind  myself,  my  heirs,  executors  and 
administrators,  firmly  by  these  presents. 

SEALED  with  my  seal  and  dated  the  24th  day  of 
January,  in  the  year  of  our  Lord  one  thousand  nine 
hundred  and  eleven. 

THE  CONDITION  of  this  obligation  is  such  that 
should  James  Lynn  Watkins  well  and  truly  pay  to 
John  Smith  on  or  before  the  first  day  of  August,  1911, 
the  full  amount  of  a  judgment  for  Fifteen  hundred 
dollars  (#1500),  which  judgment  was  recovered  by 
said  John  Smith  against  the  said  James  Lynn  Watkins 
and  filed  and  docketed  in  the  office  of  the  Clerk  of 
Kings  County  on  the  4th  day  of  January,  1911,  then 
the  above  obligation  to  be  void,  otherwise  to  remain 
in  full  force  and  virtue. 

-(L.  S.) 

State  of  New  York, 
County  of  Kings, 

On  this  24th  day  of  January,  1911,  before  me  per- 
sonally came  James  Blank,  to  me  known  and  known 
to  me  to  be  the  person  described  in  and  who  executed 
the  foregoing  instrument,  and  he  acknowledged  to  me 
that  he  executed  the  same. 


:>  |ss.; 


Notary  Public  No. . 

Kings  County,  N.  Y. 


Legal  Papers  171 


(Proxy.) 

AUGUSTA  STEEL  AND  IRON  COMPANY. 


PROXY  FOR  SPECIAL  MEETING 
OF  STOCKHOLDERS. 


KNOW  ALL  MEN  BY  THESE  PRESENTS,  that 
the  undersigned  stockholder  in  AUGUSTA  STEEL 
AND  IRON  COMPANY,  a  corporation  of  the  State 
of  Maine,  hereby  constitutes  and  appoints  JAMES  E. 
MANTELL  and  ALBERT  F.  EATON  and  CLAR- 
ENCE E.  JONES,  and  any  one  or  more  of  them,  and 
such  person  or  persons  as  they  may  substitute  and 
appoint,  the  lawful  agents  and  attorneys  of  the  under- 
signed, for  and  in  the  name  and  stead  of  the  under- 
signed to  appear  and  vote  as  proxy  at  a  special  meeting 
of  the  stockholders  of  Augusta  Steel  and  Iron  Com- 
pany to  be  held  at  the  principal  office  of  the  Company, 
No.  281  Portland  Street,  Augusta,  Maine,  on  May  26, 
1911,  or  at  any  adjournment  thereof,  according  to  the 
number  of  votes  the  undersigned  would  be  entitled 
to  cast  if  then  personally  present,  upon  any  and  every 
question  that  may  arise  at  said  meeting,  as  set  forth 
in  the  notice  of  the  time,  place  and  purpose  of  said 
meeting,  dated  May  16,  1911,  and  in  considering  and 


172  Legal   Papers 

acting  upon  any  and  every  other  matter  that  may 
lawfully  come  before  said  meeting  and  any  adjourn- 
ment thereof,  notwithstanding  the  same  is  not  referred 
to  in  said  notice,  hereby  ratifying  and  confirming  all 
that  said  attorney  or  attorneys,  his  or  their  substitute 
or  substitutes,  may  lawfully  do  by  virtue  hereof. 

Dated  May  16,  1911. 


Signed,  sealed  and  delivered 
in  the  presence  of 


Legal  Papers  173 


(Notice.) 
AUGUSTA  STEEL  AND  IRON  COMPANY. 


NOTICE  OF  SPECIAL  MEETING 
OF  STOCKHOLDERS. 


By  order  of  the  President  a  special  meeting  of  the 
stockholders  of  AUGUSTA  STEEL  AND  IRON 
COMPANY,  a  corporation  of  the  State  of  Maine,  will 
be  held  at  the  principal  office  of  the  company,  No.  281 
Portland  Street,  Augusta,  Maine,  on  May  26th,  1911, 
at  10  o'clock  in  the  forenoon,  for  the  purpose  of  ratify- 
ing, approving  and  confirming  the  distribution  made 
among  the  stockholders  of  this  corporation  of  the 
stock  of  the  Augusta  Steel  Company,  a  corporation  of 
the  State  of  Maine,  and  the  acts  of  the  directors  and 
officers  of  this  corporation  in  connection  therewith. 

Dated  May  16,  1911. 

JAMES  BROWN, 

Secretary. 


174  Legal  Papers 


(Warranty  Deed.) 

THIS  INDENTURE,  made  the  ninth  day  of 
August,  in  the  year  one  thousand  nine  hundred  and 
eleven,  between  ENOS  NYE,  of  the  City,  County 
and  State  of  New  York,  party  of  the  first  part,  and 
HENRY  JONES,  of  the  same  place,  party  of  the 
second  part, 

WITNESSETH,  that  the  said  party  of  the  first 
part,  in  consideration  of  the  sum  of  one  hundred 
dollars  (#100),  lawful  money  of  the  United  States  of 
America,  paid  by  the  party  of  the  second  part,  does 
hereby  grant  and  release  unto  the  said  party  of  the 
second  part,  his  heirs  and  assigns  forever,  all  that 
certain  lot  or  parcel  of  land  situate,  lying  and  being 
in  the  Borough  of  Manhattan,  City  of  New  York,  and 
bounded  and  described  as  follows: 

BEGINNING  at  a  point  on  the  south  side  of 
Eighty-sixth  Street  about  twenty  (20)  feet  west  of 
the  southwest  corner  of  Eighty-sixth  Street  and  Sixth 
Avenue;  running  thence  south,  parallel  with  Sixth 
Avenue,  seventy  (70)  feet ;  thence  west,  parallel  with 
Eighty-sixth  Street,  thirty  (30)  feet;  thence  north, 
parallel  with  Sixth  Avenue,  seventy  (70)  feet  to  the 
south  side  of  Eighty-sixth  Street ;  and  thence  along 
Eighty-sixth  Street  thirty  (30)  feet  to  the  point  or 
place  of  beginning. 
TOGETHER  with  the  appurtenances,  and  all  the 

estate,  right,  title  and  interest  of  the  party  of  the  first 

part  in  and  to  said  premises. 

TO  HAVE  AND  TO  HOLD  the  above  granted 


Legfal  Papers  175 

premises  unto  the  said  party  of  the  second  part,  his 
heirs  and  assigns  forever. 

And  the  said  party  of  the  first  part  does  covenant 
with  the  party  of  the  second  part  as  follows: 

FIRST.  That  the  party  of  the  first  part  is  seized 
of  the  said  premises  in  fee  simple  and  has  good  right  to 
convey  the  same. 

SECOND.  That  the  said  premises  are  free  from 
encumbrances. 

THIRD.  That  the  party  of  the  first  part  will 
forever  warrant  the  title  to  said  premises. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  the  said  party  of  the 
first  part  has  hereunto  set  his  hand  and  seal  the  day 
and  year  first  above  written. 

.  (Seal) 

In  the  presence  of 


State  of  New  York      ) 

>  gg^  • 

County  of  New  York ) 

On  this  ninth  day  of  August  in  the  year  one  thou- 
sand nine  hundred  and  eleven,  before  me  personally 
came  Enos  Nye,  to  me  known  and  known  to  me  to  be 
the  individual  described  in,  and  who  executed,  the 
foregoing  instrument,  and  he  duly  acknowledged  to 
me  that  he  executed  the  same. 


Notary  Public  No. . 

New  York  County,  N.  Y. 


WILLS. 

When  a  Will  begins  in  the  old  style  with  the  phrase 
"In  the  Name  of  God,  Amen,"  this  phrase  may  be 
centered  in  a  line  at  the  top,  or  it  may  commence  the 
first  line  of  the  Will. 

IN  THE  NAME  OF  GOD,  AMEN. 

I,  HENRY  HAMILTON,  of  the  City,  County  and 
State  of  New  York,  being  of  sound  and  disposing 
mind  and  memory,  etc. 

Or, 

In  the  Name  of  God,  Amen.  I,  HENRY  HAMIL- 
TON, of  the  City,  County  and  State  of  New  York, 
etc. 

The  following,  however,  is  the  usual  form  for  Wills. 

I,  HENRY  HAMILTON,  of  the  City,  County  and  State 
of  New  York,  being  of  sound  and  disposing  mind  and 
memory,  and  wishing  to  make  just  disposition  of  all 
my  worldly  effects,  do  hereby  make,  publish  and 
declare  this  to  be  my  last  Will  and  Testament,  hereby 
revoking  all  former  or  other  wills  or  testamentary 
writings,  of  whatsoever  nature,  heretofore  made  or 
signed  by  me. 

176 


Wills  177 

FIRST.  I  direct  that  all  my  just  debts  and  funeral 
expenses  be  paid  by  my  executor  as  soon  after  my 
decease  as  possible. 

SECOND.  I  give  and  bequeath  to  my  brother, 
WILLIAM  HAMILTON,  should  he  survive  me,  the  sum 
of  ten  thousand  dollars  ($10,000).  In  the  event 
that  my  said  brother  WILLIAM  HAMILTON  shall  have 
died  before  me,  leaving  lawful  issue  him  surviv- 
ing, then  I  give  and  bequeath  a  like  sum  of  ten  thou- 
sand dollars  ($10,000)  to  the  surviving  lawful  issue  of 
my  said  brother,  the  same  to  be  distributed  among 
such  issue  share  and  share  alike,  per  stirpes  and  not 
per  capita. 

THIRD.  I  give,  devise  and  bequeath  all  the  rest, 
residue  and  remainder  of  my  estate,  real  and  personal, 
of  every  kind  whatsoever  and  wheresoever  situated,  to 
my  wife  MARY  HAMILTON,  absolutely  and  in  fee 
simple. 

FOURTH.  I  nominate  and  appoint  my  wife,  MARY 
HAMILTON,  and  my  brother,  WILLIAM  HAMILTON,  and 
the  survivor  of  them,  executrix  and  executor  of  this 
my  will. 

IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  I  have  hereunto  subscribed 
my  name  and  affixed  my  seal  this  eighteenth  day  of 
January,  one  thousand  nine  hundred  and  eleven. 

(L.  S.J 


Signed,  sealed,  published  and  de- 
clared by  Henry  Hamilton,  the  tes- 
tator, as  and  for  his  last  Will  and 
Testament  in  the  presence  of  us  and 
each  of  us,  and  we,  at  his  request 


178  Wills 

and  in  his  presence  and  in  the  pres- 
ence of  each  other,  have  hereunto  sub- 
scribed our  names  as  witnesses  this 
eighteenth  day  of  January,  one  thou- 
sand nine  hundred  and  eleven. 


residing  at • 

residing  at • 

residing  at 

The  Attestation  Clause  (the  part  beginning  "signed, 
sealed  and  delivered"  and  sometimes  erroneously 
called  the  Testimonium)  may  also  be  written  clear 
across  the  page  and  the  lines  for  the  names  and 
addresses  of  the  witnesses  put  in  the  same  position  as 
the  line  for  the  testator's  signature.  Some  lawyers 
prefer  one  form  and  some  the  other.  But  whichever 
form  is  used,  the  Attestation  Clause,  with  its  signa- 
tures, must  be  put  on  the  same  page  with  the  will  and 
not  on  a  separate  page. 

The  last  page  of  a  will  should  not  begin  with  the 
Testimonium  (the  paragraph  beginning  "In  witness 
whereof"),  but  should  contain  at  least  one  paragraph, 
or  a  portion  of  a  paragraph,  of  the  will  proper. 


Wills  179 

(Another  form  for  address  of  witnesses.) 

The  foregoing  instrument  consisting 
of  live  pages,  was  subscribed,  sealed, 
published  and  declared  by  Henry 
Hamilton  as  and  for  his  last  will 
and  testament  in  our  presence  and 
in  the  presence  of  each  of  us,  and 
we  at  the  same  time  at  his  request, 
in  his  presence  and  in  the  presence 
of  each  other,  hereunto  subscribe 
our  names  and  residences  as  attesting 
witnesses  this  sixteenth  day  of  Novem- 
ber, one  thousand  nine  hundred  and 
eleven. 


Residing  at- 


Residing  at- 


Residing  at- 


(Endorsement  for  the  "back"  or  cover.) 
LAST  WILL  AND  TESTAMENT 

of 
HENRY  HAMILTON 


Dated  November  16,  1911. 


1 8o  Wills 

TO  "TIE"  OR  "RIBBON"  A  WILL. 

First  put  the  "back,"  properly  endorsed,  in  place 
upon  the  will,  make  three  round  holes  (proper  instru- 
ments or  "punches"  are  made  for  the  purpose)  across 
the  top  where  the  flap  of  the  "back"  is  turned  over, 
one  exactly  in  the  center  and  one  on  each  side  about 
an  inch  from  each  margin  of  the  page ;  thread  a  blunt 
needle  with  the  tape  or  ribbon,  put  it  through  the 
center  hole  from  front  to  back,  leaving  an  end  long 
enough  to  reach  the  signature  line  on  the  last  page; 
then  through  one  marginal  hole  from  back  to  front, 
then  across  through  the  other  marginal  hole  from 
front  to  back,  then  again  through  the  center  from 
back  to  front,  keeping  the  ribbon  smooth  and  un- 
twisted. Tie  the  two  ends  at  the  center  hole  in  a 
small  knot,  put  the  free  end  of  the  ribbon  also  through 
the  needle,  work  the  needle  through  the  center  hole 
and  down  in  front  of  the  last  page  of  the  will  and  cut 
the  ribbon  about  an  inch  and  a  half  below  the  line  for 
the  testator's  signature.  Here  it  is  to  be  fastened  by 
the  testator  with  a  small  seal  when  he  signs  his  name. 
Frequently,  however,  the  stenographer  is  required  to 
fasten  the  ends  with  the  seal  just  over  the  letters 
"L.  S."  at  the  end  of  the  signature  line.  The  size  of 
the  seal  is  a  matter  of  taste.  One  about  an  inch  in 
diameter  is  a  good  size  for  a  will,  preferably  a  "gold" 
color. 


FORMS. 

(Title  Page.) 

ARTICLES  OF  INCORPORATION 

and 
BY-LAWS 

of  the 
MANHATTAN  TRANSIT  COMPANY 

Home  Office,  New  Ross,  N.  J. 
OFFICERS 

PHILIP  STANNARD,  JOHN  VAUGHN, 

President  Vice-President 

C.  L.  CLEMENT,  W.  L.  BRUNN, 
Secretary  Treasurer 

DIRECTORS 

WILLIAM  M.  MILLER 
SIMON  T.  L.  BLAIR 
LEONARD  D.  PHILLIPS 
CHARLES  F.  McGUIRE 
181 


1 82  Forms 

ARTICLES  OF  INCORPORATION 

of  the 
MANHATTAN  TRANSIT  COMPANY. 


We,  the  undersigned,  for  the  purpose  of  forming  a 
corporation  in  pursuance  of  an  Act  of  the  Legislature 
of  the  State  of  New  Jersey,  entitled  "An  Act  Concern- 
ing Corporations"  (Revision  of  1896)  and  the  various 
acts  amendatory  thereof  and  supplemental  thereto, 
do  make,  record  and  file  this  certificate: 

ARTICLE  I. 

The  corporate  name  of  the  Company  is  MAN- 
HATTAN TRANSIT  COMPANY. 

ARTICLE  II. 

The  objects  for  which  the  corporation  is  established 
are  as  follows:  To  construct,  or  promote  the  con- 
struction of,  and  to  purchase  or  otherwise  acquire 
railways,  whether  operated  by  steam,  electricity  or 
other  power;  to  condemn  lands  for  and  to  accept 
grants  of  or  otherwise  acquire  franchises  for  any  and 
all  of  such  purposes;  (etc.). 


Forms  183 

BY-LAWS 

of  the 
MANHATTAN  TRANSIT  COMPANY. 


ARTICLE  I. 

STOCK  AND  STOCKHOLDERS. 

Section  i.  The  principal  office  of  this  corporation 
in  New  Jersey  shall  be  No.  15  Exchange  Place,  New 
Ross,  New  Jersey. 

Sec.  2.  The  annual  meeting  of  the  stockholders  for 
the  election  of  a  Board  of  Directors  and  the  trans- 
action of  such  other  business  as  may  properly  come 
before  the  meeting,  shall  be  held  on  the  5th  day  of 
January  of  each  year. 

ARTICLE  II. 

DIRECTORS. 

Section  i.  The  business  and  property  of  the  cor- 
poration shall  be  managed  by  its  Board  of  Directors, 
nine  in  number,  who  shall  be  stockholders.  (Etc., 
etc.) 


184  Forms 


AMERICAN  TIRE  COMPANY. 


ADJOURNED  MEETING  OF  DIRECTORS. 
November  22,  1906. 

MINUTES  of  adjourned  meeting  of  the  Board  of 
Directors  of  AMERICAN  TIRE  COMPANY,  duly 
and  regularly  called  and  held  on  the  22nd  day  of 
November,  1906,  at  3  o'clock  in  the  afternoon,  at  85 
Duane  Street,  Jersey  City,  New  Jersey,  pursuant  to 
the  adjournment  of  November  2ist,  1906. 

The  following  Directors  were  present  in  person: 

Albert  R.  Brisbane, 
George  S.  Thomas, 
Morris  F.  Pollard, 
Henry  Bringolf, 
constituting  all  the  Directors  of  the  Company. 

The  Chairman  of  the  Board,  Mr.  Thomas,  acted  as 
Chairman  of  the  meeting. 

The  Secretary  of  the  Board,  Mr.  Bringolf,  acted  as 
Secretary  of  the  meeting. 

A  letter  from  Spencer  Garland,  a  copy  of  which  is 
set  out  in  the  resolution  that  follows,  was  presented  to 
the  meeting  by  a  representative  of  Mr.  Garland,  who 
stated  that  Mr.  Garland  was  about  to  retire  from 


Forms  185 

business  and  desired  to  dispose  of  his  property  and 
business. 

After  a  full  discussion,  the  following  preamble  and 
resolutions  were,  upon  motion  duly  made  and  seconded, 
unanimously  adopted: 

WHEREAS,    Spencer    Garland,    of    Columbus, 
Ohio,  has  made  the  following  offer  to  this  Company  : 
"I  hereby  offer  to  sell  to  the  American  Tire 
Company  all  the  property  and  good-will  of  my 
business   in  the  City  of   Columbus,   Ohio,  con- 
sisting of  the  mills  at  the  foot  of  Green  Street 
in  said  city  and  the  machinery  therein  located, 
for  the  sum  of  $126,000"; 

THEREFORE,  BE  IT  RESOLVED,  That  this 
Company  accept  said  offer  of  Spencer  Garland  to 
sell  to  this  Company  the  properties  and  business 
mentioned  in  said  offer  on  the  terms  therein  set 
forth. 

FURTHER  RESOLVED,  That  the  President- 
be,  and  he  is  hereby,  authorized  and  directed  to 
accept,  in  the  name  and  on  behalf  of  this  Company, 
said  offer. 

Upon  motion  the  meeting  thereupon  adjourned, 
to  reconvene  at  the  same  place  on  the  23rd  day  of 
November,  1906,  at  2  o'clock  P.M. 

Secretary. 
Approved: 

Chairman. 


LAW  TERMS,  FOREIGN  PHRASES. 
NAMES  OF  LEGAL  DOCU- 
MENTS, ETC. 


There  are  but  few  French  phrases  now  used  in 
business.  Those  commonly  current  are  given  in  this 
list. 


Accumulative  sentence 
or  judgment 

Ambulatory 


Ancillary 
Appellant 
Appellee 

Assignment  of  errors 
Bane 

Cestui  que  trust 


A  sentence  to  a  term  of  imprisonment 
to  commence  after  a  previous  term 
shall  have  expired. 

Alterable;  changeable;  as  a  contract, 
will  or  pleading  the  terms  of  which 
may  be  changed. 

Auxiliary;  subordinate;  as,  ancillary 
administration. 

The  party  making  an  appeal  from  one 
jurisdiction  to  another. 

The  party  against  whom  an  appeal  has 
been  taken. 

A  statement  by  the  plaintiff  in  error 
setting  forth  the  errors  complained  of. 

Bench;  a  seat  or  bench  of  justice. 
Court  in  bane — a  meeting  of  all  the 
judges,  or  such  as  form  a  quorum. 

One  for  whose  benefit  another  holds 
lands  or  goods. 
186 


Law  Terms  187 

Champerty  A    bargain    with    a    litigant    to    bear 

expenses  of  litigation  in  consideration 
of  a  share  of  the  property  sued  for. 

Charge"  d' Affaires  (PI.     The    officer   in    charge   of    diplomatic 

Charges  d' Affaires)          business  in  a  foreign  country  in  the 

absence  of  a  minister  or  ambassador. 

Chose  in  action  Personal  property  of  which  the  owner 

has  not  the  possession  but  merely  a 
right  of  action  for  its  possession. 

Cite  To  summon;  to  refer  to  legal  authority. 

Code  (Stock  or  stem;  originally  the  board  on 

which  the  ancients  wrote.)  A  body 
of  laws  established  by  the  legislative 
authority  of  the  state. 

Color  of  title  An    apparent    title    founded    upon    a 

written  instrument. 

Complainant  One  who  enters  a  complaint  before  a 

magistrate. 

Compounding  a  felony    The  act  of  a  person  aggrieved  who  agrees 
for  pay  not  to  prosecute  a  felon. 

Confession  and  avoid-      The  admission  in  an  answer  of  the  truth 
ance  of  statements  made  in  a  pleading. 

Coparcenary  The  joint  holding  of  lands  by  two  or 

more  persons  as  heirs. 

Co-respondent  Any  person  called  upon  to  answer  a 

petition  (or  other  proceeding)  jointly 
with  another. 

Corporeal  property          Tangible,  substantial  property. 

Count  A  plaintiff's  statement  of  his  cause  of 

action. 


1 88 

Curator 


Law  Terms 

A  guardian;  a  legally  appointed  cus- 
todian of  property  or  persons. 


Debenture  A  written  instrument  creating  a  charge 

on  a  certain  fund  or  property. 

Decretal  order  An   order   of   court   determining   some 

right  between  the  parties. 

Dedimus  (or  dedimus      ("We  have  given  power.")     A  writ  or 
potestatem)  commission  authorizing  the  perform- 

ance of  certain  acts. 

Deed  poll  A  deed  made  by  one  party  only. 

Defeasance  An  annulment ;  a  condition  which  defeats 

the   operation    of    a   deed   or   other 
instrument. 

Demurrer  A  pleading  denying  the  sufficiency  of 

the  pleading  demurred  to. 


Enfeoff 

En  route 
Escrow 


Esquire 


To  make  a  gift  of  corporeal  heredita- 
ments. 

On  the  way. 

A  written  instrument  (deed,  contract) 
deposited  by  the  grantor  with  a 
third  person  to  be  delivered  to  the 
grantee  on  the  happening  of  a  certain 
event. 

A  title  applied  by  courtesy  to  officers  of 
almost  every  description,  to  members 
of  the  bar  and  others. 


Feme  covert 
Feme  sole 
Feoffment 


A  married  woman. 
An  unmarried  woman. 

A  gift  or  grant  of  lands  by  deed  with 
delivery  of  possession. 


Law  Terms 


189 


Fiduciary 

Force  majeure 
Garnish 


Garnishee 


Holographic  will 

Hereditaments 

Hotchpot  (sometimes 
hotchpotch,  hodge- 
podge) 

Inchoate 
In  pais 
Interlocutory 


Pertaining  to  a  relation  of  trust;  a 
trustee;  guardian. 

Beyond  control. 

To  warn;  to  attach  money  or  property 
due  or  belonging  to  a  defendant  in 
the  hands  of  a  third  person.  The  past 
tense  of  this  word  is  properly  gar- 
nished; although  the  corrupt  forms 
garnisheed  and  garnisheeing  are  often 
used. 

A  debtor  who  has  been  warned  not  to 
pay  or  deliver  money  due  or  property 
belonging  to  his  creditor. 

A  will  wholly  in  the  testator's  hand- 
writing. 

Things  capable  of  being  inherited. 

The  commixture  of  property  belonging 
to  different  persons  in  order  to  secure 
an  equitable  division. 

Imperfect;  unfinished. 
Without  legal  formality. 

Intermediate  or  intervening;  not  deci- 
sive of  the  entire  matter  in  issue. 


Intervener  (often 
spelled  interoenor) 

Issuable 
Jeofail 


One  who  interposes  in  a  suit  and  becomes 
a  party  thereto. 

Leading  to  an  issue. 

"I  have  failed."     An  oversight;  the  ac- 
knowledgment of  an  error  in  pleading. 


190 

Jurat 

Juridical 
Jurisprudence 

Litigious 

Malfeasance 

Mandamus 

Maritime 
Martial  law 

Matter  in  pais 

Mesne 

Metes  and  bounds 

Misfeasance 

Misjoinder 

Mittimus 

Moiety 


Law  Terms 

That  part  of  an  affidavit  where  the 
officer  certifies  that  the  same  was 
"  sworn"  before  him. 

Relating  to  the  administration  of 
justice  and  judicial  proceedings. 

The  science  by  which  laws  are  reduced 
to  a  system  and  their  principles 
applied. 

Quarrelsome;  inclined  to  litigation. 
The  doing  of  a  wrongful  or  unlawful  act. 

A  writ  from  a  superior  court  to  an 
inferior  court  or  to  a  person  requiring 
the  performance  of  a  certain  act. 

Pertaining  to  navigation  or  commercial 
intercourse  upon  the  seas. 

Military  rule  and  authority  existing  in 
time  of  war  or  serious  civil  disturb- 
ance. 

Matter  of  fact  as  distinguished  from 
matter  of  law  or  of  record. 

Intermediate. 
Measures  and  boundary -lines  of  land. 

The  doing  of  a  lawful  act  in  an  unlawful 
manner. 

Improper  joining  of  parties  to  a  suit  or 
of  different  causes  of  action. 

"  We  send."  A  warrant  of  commitment 
to  prison. 

Half;  sometimes,  any  portion  or  share. 


Law  Terms 


191 


Nonfeasance 
Novation 

Nuncupative  will 
" On  all  fours" 

Ouster 

Over 

Oyer  and  terminer 

Oyez 


Omission  to  perform  a  required  duty. 

The  substitution  of  a  new  obligation  for 
an  old  one,  which  is  thereby  extin- 
guished. 

A  will  made  orally  before  witnesses, 
afterwards  reduced  to  writing. 

A  phrase  used  by  some  lawyers  to  indi- 
cate that  a  case  at  bar  is  in  all  points 
similar  to  another  case. 

Ejection;  dispossession. 
A  hearing;  a  trial. 

"To  hear  and  determine ";  applied  to 
certain  criminal  courts. 

;'Hear  ye."  An  introductory  word  to 
command  attention  at  the  opening  of 
court. 


Parcenary,  coparcenary 

Parol  (or  parole)  con- 
tract 

Personalty 
Personality  of  laws 

Petit  jury 
Praecipe  (precipe) 
Prothonotary 


The  joint  holding  of  lands  by  two  or 
more  persons  as  heirs. 

An  oral  contract,  or  one  not  wholly  in 
writing. 

Property  which  is  movable. 

That  quality  of  laws  which  concerns 
the  condition,  state  and  capacity  of 
persons. 

"Little"  jury,  so  called  to  distinguish  it 
from  the  grand  jury« 

A  written  order  for  the  issuance  of  a 

writ. 

Title  of  an  officer  of  some  courts. 


1 92       Latin  Words  and  Phrases 

Quash  To  annul,  or  overthrow. 

Quasi  As  if ;  to  a  certain  degree. 

Satisfaction  piece  'A  written  acknowledgment  of  payment 

or  satisfaction  of  a,  mortgage  or  judg- 
ment. 

Tort  A  wrongful  act. 

Tortfeasor  A  wrong-doer. 

To  wit  Namely;  that  is  to  say. 

Tripartite  Consisting  of  three  parts. 

Trover  An  action  at  law  to  recover  the  value  of 

goods  wrongfully  converted, 

Unilateral  Binding  on  one  party  only. 

Usufruct  The  right  to  use  another's  property. 


LATIN  WORDS  AND  PHRASES. 

The  Latin  words  and  phrases  in  common  use  in 
large  law  offices  are  given  in  this  list.  The  ambitious 
stenographer  will  memorize  the  spelling  and  meaning 
of  them  all. 


A  dato 
A  fortiori 
A  posteriori 

A  priori 

Ab  initio  (ab  init.) 


From  the  date. 
With  stronger  reason. 

From  that  which  follows;  from  effect  to 
cause. 

From  what  is  before;   from  cause  to 
effect. 

From  the  beginning. 


Latin  Words  and  PHrases       193 


Absente  re  (abs.  re)        Defendant  long  absent. 

Addendum  (pi. 

addenda)  Something  to  be  added. 

Ad  finem  (ad  fin.)  To  (or  at)  the  end. 

Ad  infinitum  (ad  inf.)     To  infinity. 

Ad  interim  (ad  int.)        In  the  meantime. 

Ad  inquirendum 

Ad  libitum  (ad  lib.) 

Ad  litem 

Ad  quod  damnum 

Ad  referendum 


Ad  rem 
Ad  valorem 
Ad  vitam 
Alias 
Alibi 


Aliundi 
Alma  mater 


For  inquiry;  a  writ  of  inquiry. 

At  pleasure. 

For  the  purpose  of  the  suit. 

At  what  damage. 

To  be  further  considered. 

To  the  thing,  point,  purpose. 

According  to  value. 

For  life. 

Formerly;  otherwise. 

In  another  place.  A  form  of  defense 
by  which  a  person  attempts  to  prove 
that  he  was  elsewhere  than  at  the 
place  alleged. 

From  another  source. 

Fostering  mother;  applied  to  the  institu- 
tion of  learning  where  one  has  been 
educated. 


Alumna  (pi.  alumnae)      A  woman  who  has  been  graduated  from 
an  institution  of  learning. 

Alumnus  (pi.  alumni)     A  man  who  has  been  graduated  from  an 

institution  of  learning. 
13 


194      Latin  Words  and  PKrases 

Amanuensis  (pi.  -ses)  One  who  copies  manuscripts  for  another; 
one  who  writes  from  another's  dicta- 
tion. 

Amicus  curiae  A  friend  of  the  court. 

Amor  patriae  Love  of  one's  country. 

Animus  The  animating  purpose;  grudge,  hostile 

feeling. 

Anno  Domini  (A.D.)  The  year  of  our  Lord. 

Anno  mundi  The  year  of  the  world. 

Ante  Before. 

Ante  bellum  Before  the  war. 

Ante  meridiem  (A.M.)  Before  noon. 

Ante  mortem  Before  death. 

Argumentum  ad  absur-  An  argument  directed  to  show  the  ab- 
dum  surdity  of  an  opponent's  case. 

Assumpsit  He  assumed;  in  law,  a  promise  to  dc 

some  act,  or  pay  something  to  another. 

Bona  fide  In  good  faith 

Bonus  An  extra   consideration  for  something 

received. 

Capias  A  writ  of  attachment  or  arrest. 

Caveat  "Let  him  beware."    A  warning. 

Caveat  actor  Let  the  doer  beware. 

Caveat  emptor  Let  the  buyer  beware. 

Caveat  vendor  Let  the  seller  beware. 

Centum  A  hundred. 


Latin  \STords  and  PHrases       195 


Certiorari  To  be  certified.     A  writ  commanding  a 

court  to  certify  and  return  records  to 
a  superior  court. 

Commune  bonum  A  common  good. 

Compos  mentis  Of  sound  mind. 

Contra  Against. 

Coram  non  judice  Acts  done  by  a  court  which  has  no 

jurisdiction. 

Coram  vobis  A  writ  of  error. 

Corpus  Body;  substance. 

Corpus  comitatus  The  inhabitants  of  a  county. 

Corpus  delicti  The  body  of  the  offense;  the  essence  of 

the  crime. 


Corpus  juris  civilis 
Crimen  falsi 
Crux 

Cui  bono?1 
Cui  malo? 
Cum  grano  salis 


The  body  of  the  civil  law. 

Forgery;  perjury;  false  dealing. 

A  cross;  difficult  point  to  settle. 

What  good  will  it  do? 

Whom  will  it  harm? 

With  a  grain  of  salt. 
Cum  testamento  annexo  With  the  will  annexed. 
Custodia  legis  In  the  custody  of  the  law. 

Damnum  absque  Injury  without  wrong;  loss  without  legal 

injuria  injury. 

Data  Facts;  things  given  or  granted. 

De  bene  esse  Conditionally  or  provisionally. 

De  bonis  non  Of  the  goods  not  yet  administered  upon. 


196      Latin  W^ords  and  PKrases 

Dedimus  potestatem 


De  facto 
De  jure 
Dele  (delete) 


A  writ  empowering  a.  private  person  to 
act  in  the  place  of  a  judge. 

In  fact;  in  deed. 
Lawfully;  by  legal  title. 

Blot  out;  a  printer's  term  applied  to 
proof. 


De  lunatico  inquirendo    A  writ  directing  an  inquiry  as  to  a 
person's  sanity. 


De  novo 

Deovolente(D.V.) 
De  son  tort 
Deus  ex  machina 
Devastavit 
Devisavit  vel  non 

Dictum 
Dies  non 
Dramatis  personae 


Anew 

God  willing. 

Of  his  own  wrong. 

A  god  out  of  a  machine. 

Waste;  mismanagement. 

An  order  from  a  court  of  chancery  to  a 
court  of  law  to  try  the  validity  of  a 
will. 

A  saying;  maxim. 

A  day  on  which  judges  do  not  sit. 

Characters  represented  in  a  drama. 


One  out  of  many. 
Of  the  same  kind. 
To  err  is  human. 
An  error. 


E  pluribus  unum 

Ejusdem  generis 

Errare  est  humanum 

Erratum  (pi.  errata) 

Et  alios,  or  alii  (et  al.)      And  others. 

Et  alius  (et  al.)  And  another. 

Et  caetera  (etc.,  &c.)        And  others;  and  other  things. 


Latin  "Words  and  PHrases       197 


Et  sequentia  (et  seq.)        And  following. 


Et  uxor  (et  ux.) 

Ex 

Ex  animo 

Ex  cathedra 

Ex  contractu 

Ex  curia 

Ex  delicto 


And  wife. 

Out  of;  from. 

Heartily,  sincerely. 

From  the  chair  (of  authority). 

From  the  contract. 

Out  of  court. 

From  the  crime. 


Exempli  gratia  (ex  gri.)    For  example. 


Exeunt  omnes 

Exit 

Ex  officio 

Ex  parte 

Ex  post  facto 

Expressio  verbis 

Expressio  unius  est 
exclusio  alterius 

Ex  relatione  (ex  rel.) 

Extempore 

Ex  vi  termini 

Facias 
Falsi  crimen 

Felo  de  se 

Fiat 

Fieri  facias  (fi.  fa.) 


All  go  out. 
He  goes  out. 
'  By  virtue  of  his  office. 
Of  the  one  part. 
By  a  subsequent  act. 
In  express  terms. 

The  express  mention  of  one  thing  is  the 
exclusion  of  the  other. 

At  the  relation  of. 
Without  premeditation. 
By  force  of  the  term. 

To  make;  to  do. 

A  fraudulent  subornation  or  conceal- 
ment of  truth. 

A  suicide.     (A  felon  upon  himself.) 
A  command. 
Cause  it  to  be  done. 


198      Latin  Words  and  PHrases 


Finis 

Flagrante  delicto 

Genius  loci 

Gratis 

Gravamen 

Habeas  corpus 
Habendum 

Hie  jacet 

Ibidem  (Ib.  Ibid.) 

Idem  (Id.) 

Id  est  (i.e.) 

Imprimis 

In  esse 

In  extremis 

Infra 

In  futuro 

In  loco  parentis 

In  medias  res 

In  pari  delicto 

In  pari  materia 

In  personam 

In  posse 


End. 

In  the  commission  of  crime. 

The  genius  of  the  place. 

Free;  for  nothing. 

The  grievance  complained  of. 

A  writ  commanding  that  the  body  of  the 
prisoner  be  produced. 

In  deeds,  the  clause  defining  the  extent 
of  the  ownership  of  the  grantee  and 
commencing,  "  To  have  and  to  hold. " 

Here  lies. 

In  the  same  place. 

The  same. 

That  is. 

In  the  first  place. 

In  being,  or  existence. 

At  the  point  of  death. 

Below;  within. 

In  the  future. 

In  the  place  of  a  parent. 

In  the  midst  of  things. 

In  equal  fault. 

Upon  the  same  matter  or  subject. 

Against  the  person. 

In  possible  being;  not  in  actual  existence. 


Latin  Words  and  PHrases      199 


In  propria  persona 

In  re 

In  rem 

In  statu  quo 

Inter  alia 

Inter  alios 

Interim 

Inter  se 

Inter  vivos 

In  toto 

In  transitu 

Intra  vires 

Ipse  dixit 

Ipso  facto 

Ipso  jure 

Jeofail 

Jurat 

Jus 

Jus  ad  rem 
Jus  civile 
Laches 
Lex  loci 


In  person. 

In  the  matter  of. 

Against  the  thing. 

As  it  was;  in  the  same  position. 

Among  other  things. 

Between  other  parties. 

In  the  meantime. 

Among  themselves. 

Between  living  persons. 

All;  entirely 

In  the  course  of  transit. 

Within  the  power. 

He  himself  said  it. 

By  the  act  itself. 

By  the  law  itself. 

An  error  or  mistake;  an  oversight  in 
pleading. 

That  part  of  an  affidavit  or  other  docu- 
ment where  an  officer  certifies  that  it 
was  sworn  before  him. 

Law;  right;  equity. 
A  right  to  a  thing. 
The  civil  law. 
Negligence;  delay. 
The  law  of  the  place. 


2OO      Latin  Words  and  PHrases 


Lex  non  scripta 
Lex  scripta 
Lex  talionis 
Lex  terras 
Lis  alibi  pendens 
Lis  pendens 
Locum  tenens 
Locus  in  quo 

Locus  sigilli  (L.  S.) 


Magna  Charta 

Magnum  bonum 
Mai 

Mala  fides 
Malum  in  se 
Malum  prohibitum 

Mens  sana  in  corpore 
sano 

Modo  et  forma 
Modus  operandi 
Multum  in  parvo 
Mutatis  mutandis 


The  unwritten  law. 

Statute,  or  written,  law. 

The  law  of  retaliation. 

The  law  of  the  land. 

A  suit  pending  elsewhere. 

A  pending  suit. 

A  proxy;  a  substitute,  or  deputy. 

The  place  in  which.  (Where  anything 
is  alleged  to  have  been  done.) 

Place  of  the  seal.  (In  deeds  and  other 
documents  the  letters  L.  S.  are 
usually  placed  at  the  right  of  the 
signature,  indicating  the  place  where 
a  small  paper  seal  is  to  be  attached.) 

Great  Charter.  Specifically,  the  Great 
Charter  of  English  liberties  forced 
from  King  John  by  his  barons. 

A  great  good. 

Evil;  bad. 

Bad  faith. 

Bad  in  itself. 

An  offense  or  evil  prohibited  by  law. 

A  sound  mind  in  a  sound  body. 

In  manner  and  form. 

Manner  of  working. 

Much  in  little. 

Necessary  changes  being  made. 


Latin  Words  and  PHrases      201 


Ne  exeat 

Ne  plus  ultra 
Nihil  debet 

Nil 

Nisi  prius 

Nolens  volens 

Nolle  prosequi  (nol/ 
pros.) 

Nolo  contendere 
Non  assumpsit 

Non  compos  mentis 
Non  constat 
Non  est 

Non  prosequitur  (non 
pros.) 

Non  sequitur 

Non  vult  contendere 


(Let  him  not  depart.)  A  writ  issued  to 
prevent  a  debtor  or  other  person  from 
leaving  the  state. 

Nothing  beyond. 

(He  owes  nothing.)  A  plea  denying  a 
debt. 

Nothing. 

A  term  applied  to  those  courts  which  try 
civil  causes  with  the  aid  of  a  jury. 

Willing  or  unwilling. 


Not  willing  to  prosecute. 

"I  will  not  contest."  An  implied  con- 
fession of  guilt  in  a  criminal  action. 

(He  did  not  undertake  or  assume.)  A 
denial  of  obligations  sought  to  be 
enforced  by  the  suit. 

Not  of  sound  mind. 
It  does  not  appear. 
Not  in  being;  not  to  be  found. 

(He  does  not  prosecute.)  When  the 
plaintiff  abandons  his  suit  the  defen- 
dant enters  a  non  pros,  and  obtains 
costs  against  the  plaintiff. 

It  does  not  follow;  an  unwarranted 
conclusion. 

He  (the  defendant  in  a  criminal  case) 
will  not  contest  it.  A  plea  equivalent 
to  that  of  guilty.  Sometimes  abbre- 
viated "non  vult." 


2O2       Latin  Words  and  Phrases 


Nota  bene  (N.  B.) 
Nudum  pactum 
Nulla  bona 

Nunc  pro  tune 


Obiter  dictum 

Onus 

Onus  probandi 

Pan  delicto 

Pari  materia 

Pan  passu 

Parol 

Particeps  criminis 

Passim 

Pendente  lite 

Per 

Per  annum 

Per  capita 

Per  centum 

Per  contra 

Per  curiam 


Note  well;  take  notice. 

A  contract  without  a  consideration. 

No  goods.  A  return  made  by  a  sheriff 
that  he  has  found  no  goods  on  which 
to  levy. 

Now  for  then.  A  phrase  used  to 
express  that  a  thing  is  done  at  one 
time  which  should  have  been  done  at 
another. 


(Said  by  the  way.)  An  incidental  opin- 
ion expressed  by  a  judge,  but  which 
has  not  the  force  of  an  adjudication. 

A  burden. 

The  burden  of  proving. 

Equal  in  guilt. 

On  the  same  subject. 

With  equal  pace;  by  the  same  gradation. 

Word;  verbal. 

Partner  in  crime. 

Here  and  there. 

While  litigation  continues. 

By;  through. 

By  the  year. 

By  the  head;  share  and  share  alike. 

By  the  hundred. 

On  the  contrary. 

By  the  court. 


Latin  Words  and  PHrases      203 


Per  diem 
Per  se 
Persona  grata 

Persona  non  grata 
Per  stirpes 

Posse  comitatus 

Post  meridiem  (P.M. 
Post  mortem 
Post  scriptum 
Prima  facie 
Pro  bono  publico 
Pro  confesso 
Pro  et  con 
Pro  forma 
Pro  hac  vice 
Propria  persona 
Proprio  vigore 
Pro  rata 
Pro  tanto 
Pro  tempore 


By  the  day. 

By  itself  or  himself. 

A  diplomatic  representative  who  is 
acceptable  to  the  government  to 
which  he  is  accredited. 

A  diplomatic  representative  not  accept- 
able to  the  government  to  which  he 
is  accredited. 

According  to  the  root  or  stock.  De- 
scendants take  per  stirpes  when  they 
take  the  share  which  their  parent 
would  have  taken,  if  living. 

The  power  of  the  county.  Citizens 
summoned  to  assist  a  sheriff. 

)       After  noon. 
After  death. 
Written  afterwards. 
At  first  view. 
For  the  public  good. 
As  if  conceded. 
For  and  against. 
As  a  matter  of  form. 
For  this  occasion. 
His  own  proper  person. 
Of  (one's  or  its)  own  strength  or  vigor. 
According  to  the  rate  or  proportion. 
For  so  much. 
For  the  time  being. 


204      Latin  "Words  and  PHrases 

Quare 

Quantum  meruit 
Quasi 
Quia  timet 


Why?     For  what  reason? 
As  much  as  he  deserved. 
As  if ;  in  a  manner. 


(Because  he  fears.)     Applied  to  a  bill 
to  prevent  expected  injury. 

Quid  pro  quo  (One   thing   for   another.)     A    mutual 

consideration. 

Quoad  hoc  With  respect  to  this;  to  this  extent. 

Quo  jure  By  what  right? 

Quo  warranto  (By  what  authority?)     A  writ  inquiring 

by  what  warrant  a  person  or  corpora- 
tion acts. 


Remittitur 
Res 

Res  gestae 

Res  judicata  (or  adjudi- 
cata) 

Retraxit 


A  sending  back;  a  remission. 

Things;    includes    real    and    personal 
property. 

Things  done;  the  subject-matter. 


Matters  adjusted  or  decided. 

(He  has  withdrawn.)     The  withdrawal 
of  a  suit  by  a  plaintiff. 


Scienter 
Scilicet  (ss.) 
Scire  facias 


Scire  feci 


Knowledge  of  the  wrong. 
Namely;  to  wit: 

(Do  you  make  known.)  A  writ  founded 
on  some  record  and  requiring  a  party 
to  show  cause  why  another  should  not 
have  the  benefit  of  the  record. 

(I  have  made  known.)  The  return  of 
the  sheriff  or  other  officer  to  the  writ 
of  scire  facias. 


Latin  Words  and  PHrases      205 

Semper  idem  Always  the  same. 

Sic  So;  thus. 

Sine  die  Without  a  day  being  appointed. 

Sine  qua  non  An  indispensable  condition. 

Stare  decisis  Abiding   by,   or  adhering  to,   decided 

cases. 

Status  quo  (The    state   in   which.)     The    existing 

state  of  things  at  any  given  date. 

Stet  Let  it  stand. 

Sub  judice  Under  consideration. 

Subpoena  duces  tecum     A  writ  requiring  a  witness  to  attend  and 
bring  certain  documents. 

Sui  generis  Of  his  or  its  own  kind  or  class. 

Sui  juris  Of  his  own  right;  possessing  all  the 

rights  to  which  a  freeman  is  entitled. 

Supersedeas  A  writ  commanding  a  stay  of  proceed- 

ings. 

Supra  Above. 

Tempus  fugit  Time  flies. 

Ultima  Thule  Most  distant  land;  farthest  limit. 

Ultra  vires  Beyond  power. 

Una  voce  With  one  voice. 

Uno  animo  With  one  mind;  unanimously. 

Usus  loquendi  The  usage  of  speech. 

Vade  mecum  "Go  with  me."    A  thing  carried  as  a 

constant  companion. 


206      Latin  Words  and  PKrases 


Vale 

Veni,  vidi,  vici 

Venire  facias 

Venue 

Verbatim  et  literatim 

Verbum  sat  sapienti 

Versus 

Via  media 

Vice  versa 

Vide 

Videlicet,  or  scilicet 
(viz.,  ss.) 

Vincit  que  se  vincit 
Viva  voce 
Vox  populi 


Farewell. 

"I  came,  I  saw,  I  conquered." 

The  writ  for  summoning  a  jury. 

Place  of  trial. 

Word  for  word  and  letter  for  letter. 

A  word  is  enough  for  a  wise  man. 

Against. 

A  middle  course. 

The  terms  being  exchanged;  the  reverse. 

See. 

Namely;  to  wit. 

He  conquers  who  overcomes  himself. 

By  the  living  voice;  orally. 

The  voice  of  the  people. 


THE  CORRECT  WORD. 

The  art  of  choosing  quickly  the  right  words  to 
express  the  thought  and  of  putting  them  together  with 
reference  to  grammatical  correctness  and  clearness,  is 
mastered  only  by  study  and  practice. 

The  following  list  of  words  and  phrases  frequently 
misused  is  by  no  means  a  complete  one ;  it  is  suggestive 
merely,  and  every  reader  can  easily  increase  it  by 
additions  of  his  own. 

Affect,  effect.  These  words  are  not  interchangeable. 
Affect  means  to  influence,  to  impress,  to  change. 
Effect  means  to  accomplish,  to  bring  about,  to  achieve. 
"Changes  in  temperature  do  not  affect  (change, 
influence)  this  plant."  "The  tariff  will  effect  (bring 
about  or  accomplish)  a  reform."  Affect  is  used  only 
as  a  verb.  Effect  is  used  both  as  a  verb  and  a  noun. 

Agreeable,  agreeably.  The  adverb  agreeably  is  the 
proper  word  to  use  in  such  construction  as  "Agreeably 
to  your  request  we  send  you  four  machines,"  "Agree- 
ably to  the  order  of  the  day  the  House  took  up  the 
report  of  the  Committee. " 

And,  to.  "Try  to  learn  your  lesson, "  " Try  to  come 
at  five  o'clock," — not  "Try  and  learn  your  lesson," 
"  Try  and  come  at  five  o'clock. " 

Any  place,  anywhere.  "  I  cannot  find  it  anywhere, " 
not  "  I  cannot  find  it  any  place. " 

As — as,  so — as.  A  s  precedes  as  in  the  comparison  of 
207 


208  TKe  Correct  Word 

equals.  "This  book  is  as  large  as  that  one."  So 
precedes  as  in  the  comparison  of  unequals,  or  where  a 
negative  precedes.  "This  book  is  not  so  large  as 
that." 

As,  like.  As  is  the  correct  word  when  a  verb  fol- 
lows or  is  understood  to  follow.  "She  does  not  sing 
as  he  does,"  not  "like  he  does."  "Be  calm,  as  we 
are,"  not  "like  we  are."  Where  no  verb  is  implied, 
like  may  be  used.  "She  does  not  look  like  him." 

As  long  as,  so  long  as.  As  long  as  is  correct  when 
the  extent  or  degree  implied  by  the  phrase  is  not 
intended  to  be  emphasized;  so  long  as,  when  the  extent 
or  degree  implied  is  intended  to  be  emphasized. 

At,  in.  One  arrives  at  a  city  or  town,  whether  one 
arrives  by  steamer,  by  train,  on  foot,  on  horseback,  or 
by  any  other  method;  one  arrives  upon  the  scene;  a 
vessel  arrives  in  port. 

At,  to.  "He  has  been  at  the  theatre,"  not  to  the 
theatre. 

At,  with.  Not  angry  at,  but  angry  with,  is  proper, 
with  reference  to  a  person.  One  is  angry  with  a 
person,  at  or  about  a  thing  or  an  occurrence. 

Avocation,  vocation.  Avocation  means  an  occa- 
sional diversion  from  regular  business  or  vocation. 
Vocation  means  regular,  constant  business  or  employ- 
ment. The  two  words  are  not  interchangeable. 

Bad,  badly.  The  expressions  "I  feel  badly,"  "You 
look  nicely,"  are  not  correct  according  to  the  best 
authorities.  Here  the  words  feel  and  look  do  not 
refer  to  an  action,  but  to  the  state,  or  condition,  or 
appearance  of  the  person.  Therefore  the  adjective 
forms  are  required,  and  the  proper  expressions  are 
" I  feel  bad, "  "You  look  nice. "  If  it  is  correct  to  say 


THe  Correct   Word  209 

"I  feel  badly,"  then  why  not  "I  feel  sadly"  or  "I 
feel  gladly"?  See  Century  and  Standard  Diction- 
aries, Maxwell's  Grammar,  "Correct  English." 

Badly  used  in  the  sense  of  very  much,  is  recorded  by 
Standard  Dictionary  as  colloquial  and  inelegant.  "I 
need  it  very  badly"  is  equivalent  to  "  I  need  it  in  a  bad 
manner." 

Beside,  besides.  Not  interchangeable.  Beside 
means  close  by,  or  near,  and  is  not  now  used  in  the 
sense  of  in  addition  to.  Besides  means  in  addition  to. 
"There  were  two  beside  him"  means  that  there  were 
two  by  the  side  of  him.  "There  were  two  besides 
him"  means  that  there  were  two  in  addition  to  him. 

Between,  among.  Between  applies  to  two;  among 
to  more  than  two. 

But  that,  but  what.  But  in  connection  with  that 
is  often  redundant  and  should  be  omitted.  "I  have 
no  doubt  but  that  he  will  come"  should  be  "  I  have  no 
doubt  that  he  will  come. "  But  what  is  properly  used 
when  the  meaning  is  but  that  which.  It  is  incorrect 
in  the  expression  "  I  don't  know  but  what  this  book  is 
as  good  as  that  one." 

By  and  by,  by  the  by.  We  may  write  either  by  the 
by  or  by  the  bye,  but  only  by  and  by,  never  by  and 
bye. 

Company.  When  meaning  a  business  corporation 
or  association,  singular  number,  requiring  a  singular 
verb. 

Compare  to,  compare  with.  One  thing  is  compared 
with  another  to  note  points  of  agreement  or  difference. 
One  thing  is  compared  to  another  which  it  resembles. 
Compare  to  implies  likeness;  compare  with  brings  out 
the  respective  merits  of  each  thing. 

14 


2io  TKe  Correct  Word 

Corporal,  corporeal.  Corporal  means  relating  to 
the  body,  as  opposed  to  the  mind ;  as  corporal  punish- 
ment. Corporeal  means  having  a  body;  material; 
opposed  to  immaterial  or  spiritual;  as,  "The  corporeal 
eye  sees  material  things." 

Corporation,  incorporation.  Both  words  mean  "an 
artificial  body  established  by  law  for  public  or  private 
purposes. "  Corporation  is  the  word  in  general  use  to 
designate  such  a  body. 

Cotemporary.     Not  so  good  usage  as  contemporary. 

Customs.  In  the  sense  of  a  tariff,  always  used  in 
the  plural;  as,  customs  duty,  customs  authorities. 

Depositary,  depository.  In  the  best  usage,  deposi- 
tary denotes  a  person  with  whom,  and  depository 
denotes  a  place  in  which,  anything  is  deposited. 

Differ  from,  differ  with.  Differ  from  expresses  a 
difference  in  quality  or  appearance;  properly  the  cor- 
relative of  different  from.  Differ  with  expresses  dis- 
agreement, dispute  or  dissent;  have  a  difference  with. 
Persons,  things,  and  opinions  differ  from  each  other; 
persons  differ  in  opinion  with  each  other.  Standard 
Dictionary  gives  this  illustrative  sentence;  "Washing- 
ton differed  from  Hamilton  in  temperament,  but  he 
did  not  differ  with  him  in  political  theory. " 

Distinctively,  distinctly.  Distinctively  means  "in  a 
way  to  distinguish  one  thing  from  others."  Distinctly 
means  "plainly." 

Each,  every,  require  singular  verbs.  "Each  of  the 
men  was  paid  a  dollar."  "The  words, . every  one  of 
which  was  in  print  before  I  used  it,  are  these." 

Elder,   eldest.     Apply  to   persons  only,   and  are 


The  Correct  Word  211 

limited  to  members  of  the  same  family.  When  the 
comparative  than  is  used,  older,  and  not  elder,  is 
required;  as,  "James  is  the  elder  of  the  two  boys"; 
but,  "James  is  older  than  John."  Older  and  oldest 
apply  to  both  persons  and  things. 

Else.  Should  be  followed  by  than,  not  by  but;  as, 
"No  one  else  than  John  came,"  not,  "No  one  else  but 
John  came." 

Emigrant,  immigrant.  Not  interchangeable.  Emi- 
grant means  a  person  moving  away  from  a  country. 
An  immigrant  moves  into  the  country  where  he  takes 
up  his  abode. 

Employee.  This  word  is  now  fully  Anglicized, 
spelled  with  ee,  pronounced  as  an  English  word,  and  is 
applicable  to  either  sex. 

Etc.,  &c.  These  terms  may  be  used  interchange- 
ably to  indicate  "and  other  things,"  "and  the  rest," 
"and  so  forth." 

Expect.  Often  misused  in  the  place  of  suppose. 
We  expect  that  which  is  to  come,  not  that  which  has 
happened.  Therefore,  "I  suppose  John  went  to  New 
York  yesterday,"  not  "I  expect  John  went  to  New 
York  yesterday." 

Farther,  further.  Farther  refers  to  distance,  fur- 
ther to  that  which  is  more,  or  additional;  as,  "The 
eagle  flies  farther  than  the  sparrow."  "He  said 
nothing  further." 

Few,  less.  Few  refers  to  number,  less  to  quantity. 
"No  man  had  fewer  friends"  (not  less  friends). 

First  two,  two  first.  First  two  is  correct  whenever 
the  two  form  a  first  pair  of  objects,  corresponding  to 
or  distinct  from  a  last  pair.  Two  first  is  correct  when 
reference  is  made  to  two  objects  each  of  which  is  at  the 


212  TKe  Correct  Word 

head  of  its  own  series,  or  both  of  which  are  foremost 
in  the  same  class  not  divided  into  pairs. 

Had  better,  had  rather.  Forms  disputed  by  some 
critics,  who  say  that  would  better  and  would  rather 
are  the  correct  forms;  others  argue  for  equal  rights 
for  had  better  and  had  rather.  The  forms  would 
better  and  would  rather  conform  to  the  grammar  of 
the  language,  and  in  this  have  an  advantage ;  but  had 
better  and  had  rather  conform  to  the  idiom  of  the 
language  and  are  sanctioned  by  good  authorities — the 
dictionaries,  the  Bible,  and  other  literary  usage. 

Half.  A  thing  may  be  cut  in  halves,  not  in  half. 
Everything  has  two  halves. 

Hanged,  hung.  Criminals  are  hanged,  pictures  are 
hung. 

I,  me.  Which  is  correct:  "You  are  taller  than  /," 
or  "You  are  taller  than  me"?  The  meaning  is,  You 
are  taller  than  I  am  tall.  Omitting  the  last  two  words, 
the  sentence  stands,  "You  are  taller  than  7." 

"You  like  him  better  than  me."  The  objective 
form  me  is  correct,  as  the  object  of  the  preposition 
than.  Supplying  the  omission,  the  sentence  is  "You 
like  him  better  than  you  like  me."  It  is  correct  to 
say,  "You  like  him  better  than  /,"  only  when  the 
meaning  is  "You  like  him  better  than  /  like  him." 

If,  whether.  //  is  used  to  introduce  a  supposition, 
whether,  to  introduce  an  alternative.  The  use  of  if 
for  whether  is  condemned  except  in  poetic  or  collo- 
quial language.  The  expressions, ' '  He  asked  if  our  com- 
pany was  incorporated,"  "I  do  not  know  ifhe  will 
come, "  are  not  so  good  English  as,  "  He  asked  whether 


THe  Correct  Word  213 

our  company  was  incorporated,"  "I  do  not  know 
•whether  he  will  come." 

In,  into.  In  denotes  position,  state;  as,  "They 
kept  in  line."  Into  denotes  direction,  destination; 
as,  "Go  into  the  house." 

In,  to.  "I  have  been  in  New  York,"  not  to  New 
York.  In  indicates  within  the  limits  of;  to  indicates 
motion  towards. 

Lay,  lie.  The  principal  parts  of  these  verbs  are: 
lay,  laid,  laid;  lie,  lay,  lain.  Lie  is  intransitive  and 
does  not  require  an  object.  Lay  is  transitive  and  has 
an  object.  One  lies  down  to  sleep;  one  lays  a  book 
on  the  table.  "  I  lay  awake  last  night, "  not,  "  I  laid 
awake  last  night";  but,  "I  laid  a  book  on  the  table." 

Lengthways,  lengthwise.  Lengthwise,  endwise, 
sidewise,  etc.,  are  preferable  to  lengthways1,  endways, 
sideways. 

Liable,  likely.  Liable  implies  obligation,  respon- 
sible, and  refers  to  an  unfavorable  event.  Likely 
implies  probability,  inclination.  "We  are  likely  (not 
liable)  to  accept  favors  as  our  just  dues. "  "A  surety 
is  liable  for  the  debt  of  his  principal. " 

ly — (when  to  add  it).  Agreeable,  previous,  and  such 
words  should  not  be  used  as  adverbs.  Not  previous 
to,  but  previously  to;  not  agreeable  to  your  letter,  but 
agreeably  to  your  letter,  comformably  to  your  orders, 
etc. 

Myself.  Myself,  himself,  themselves,  etc.,  are  prop- 
erly used  only  in  an  emphatic  or  a  reflexive  sense; — 
reflexive  sense  meaning  an  object  signifying  the  same 
person  as  the  subject.  Not,  "He  met  James  and  my' 
self, "  but,  "He  met  James  and  me. " 


214  THe  Correct  Word 

Near.  Should  not  be  used  in  the  sense  of  nearly. 
"  It  is  not  nearly  so  large  as  this, "  not,  "  It  is  not  near 
so  large  as  this." 

Neither — nor.  When  a 'subject  consists  of  two  or 
more  singular  nouns  or  phrases  disjoined  by  neither- 
nor  or  either-or,  the  verb  should  be  singular;  as, 
"Neither  John  nor  James  is  going." 

None,  while  properly  meaning  no  one,  not  one,  is 
construed  in  the  singular  or  plural  as  the  sense,  or  the 
best  expression  of  the  meaning  intended,  may  require; 
as,  "None  of  these  bills  are  now  in  circulation"; 
"None  of  these  things  move  me";  "None  but  the 
brave  deserves  the  fair. " 

Nor.  Whether  to  use  or  or  nor  after  no  or  not  is 
often  a  puzzling  question.  Pairs  of  words  meaning 
the  same  thing  require  or;  as,  "He  has  no  money  or 
credit."  Here  "credit"  is  made  a  mere  equivalent 
of  money  and  amplifies  the  expression.  ' '  He  has  no 
money  nor  credit "  presents  "  credit "  as  an  alternative, 
an  additional  resource. 

Number.  When  the  word  number  is  used  to 
express  a  unit  of  some  sort,  it  is  singular;  as,  "The 
number  of  men  was  small."  "The  number  of  mem- 
bers is  increasing."  Used  in  the  sense  of  several,  it 
is  plural;  as,  "A  large  number  of  men  speak  in  favor 
of  single  tax. " 

On,  upon.  Interchangeable  in  some  instances.  On 
is  preferable  when  merely  rest  or  support  is  indicated ; 
upon,  when  motion  into  position  is  involved.  When 
upon  means  up  and  on,  that  is,  ascent  into  position, 
it  is  written  as  two  words;  as,  "Let  us  go  up  on  the 
roof." 

Only.     The    most    carelessly    used    word    in    the 


The  Correct  Word  215 

language.  To  avoid  ambiguity,  only  should  be  placed 
next  to  the  word  or  phrase  to  be  qualified;  as, 

"He  only  saw  the  prisoner"  (did  not  speak  to  him). 

"He  saw  only  the  prisoner"  (saw  no  one  else). 

" Only  he  saw  the  prisoner"  (no  one  else  saw  him). 

"He  saw  the  prisoner  only"  (saw  no  one  else). 

Ought,  should.  Ought  expresses  moral  obligation. 
"You  ought  to  pay  your  debts."  Should  expresses 
propriety  or  expediency.  "You  should  not  go  out  in 
the  storm." 

Per.  Critics  say  that  the  proper  use  of  per  is  only 
in  connection  with  other  Latin  words;  but  business 
usage  has  established  the  word  in  such  expressions  as 
"per  day,"  "per  invoice,"  "per  steamship  'Star." 

People,  persons.  Persons  is  the  proper  word  to 
designate  a  small  number  of  individuals.  "Three 
persons  entered  the  room."  People  indicates  a 
crowd  or  a  large  number. 

Personality,  personalty.  Personality  means  the 
attributes  that  make  up  the  character  of  an  individual. 
"He  is  a  man  of  pleasing  personality. "  Personalty  is 
a  legal  term  signifying  personal  property  as  distin- 
guished from  real  property;  as,  "His  real  estate  was 
valuable,  his  personalty  was  insignificant. " 

Practicable,  practical.  Practical  is  used  of  persons 
who  show  skill,  practice,  knowledge  or  experience;  as, 
"a  practical  printer."  Used  of  a  thing,  practical 
means  useful,  opposed  to  theoretical;  as,  "man's 
practical  understanding."  Practicable  is  not  used  of 
persons,  but  of  things,  and  means  capable  of  being  put 
into  practice;  as,  "Deeming  the  plan  practicable,  we 
attempted  to  carry  it  out. " 

Principal,  principle.     The  difference  in  the  meaning 


216  THe  Correct  Word 

of  these  words  is  illustrated  as  follows:  principal 
(adjective)  means  highest  in  character,  rank,  or  impor- 
tance; as,  the  principal  men  of  the  city;  principal 
(noun)  means  a  leader  or  chief;  the  employer  of  one 
who  acts  as  agent;  a  sum  on  which  interest  accrues; 
as,  the  principal  of  a  note.  Principle  is  used  only  as  a 
noun,  and  means  a  rule  of  conduct,  a  general  truth, 
an  opinion  or  belief;  as,  "He  reasoned  from  false 
principles."  "The  principles  of  geometry  are  not 
generally  understood. " 

Provided,  providing.  The  participle  providing  is 
often  erroneously  used  instead  of  the  conjunction 
provided.  The  correct  usage  is,  "He  will  go  provided 
he  has  the  money, "  not  "He  will  go  providing  he  has 
the  money." 

Raise,  rear.  Animals  are  raised;  human  beings  are 
brought  up  or  reared. 

Rise,  arise.  Rise  means  to  move  upward;  arise,  to 
begin  existence,  to  appear.  Literal  meanings  have 
become  associated  with  rise;  figurative  meanings  with 
arise;  as,  "  The  smoke  rises. "  "  New  questions  arise. ' ' 

Set,  sit.  Hens  do  not  "set,"  they  "sit."  One 
may  set  a  hen  on  eggs,  just  as  one  may  set  a  cup  on  the 
table;  but  the  hen  and  the  cup  sit.  "The  girl  sits, " 
"The  hen  sits,"  "The  coat  sits  well,"  are  the  correct 
expressions. 

Shall,  will.  Shall  in  the  first  person  and  will  in  the 
second  and  third  denote  simple  futurity.  Will  in  the 
first  person  and  shall  in  the  second  and  third  denote 
determination.  "I  shall  be  pleased  to  go"  is  the 
correct  form,  not  "I  will  be  pleased  to  go."  One  is 
happy,  delighted,  pleased,  or  displeased,  because  the 


THe  Correct  Word  217 

condition  is  beyond  the  control  of  the  will;  hence 
shall  is  the  proper  auxiliary.  Should  and  would  fol- 
low the  usage  of  shall  and  will. 

Sirname.     The  correct  word  is  surname. 

Some.  Often  erroneously  used  for  somewhat.  "This 
book  is  somewhat  larger  than  that"  (not  some  larger). 

Some  place.  Erroneously  used  for  somewhere. 
"Let  us  go  somewhere,"  not  "Let  us  go  some 
place." 

Summonsed.  Summons  is  the  noun,  summon  and 
summoned  the  verbs.  Standard  Dictionary  says  that 
summons  as  a  verb  and  its  past  tense,  summonsed,  are 
useless  colloquialisms  for  summon  and  summoned, 
which  are  the  established  words  in  legal  and  literary 
usage. 

These  kind,  those  sort.  Standard  Dictionary  says 
these  expressions  are  an  inexcusable  vulgarism.  Kind, 
a  singular  noun,  requires  a  singular  adjective.  The 
correct  form  is  "this  kind  of  apple,"  ''these  kinds  of 
apples,"  ''this  sort  of  book,  "those  kinds  of  books." 

Through.  Not  correctly  used  in  the  sense  of 
finished.  Not  " He  is  through  speaking,"  but  "He  has 
finished  speaking." 

Till,  until.  These  words  are  interchangeable  when 
the  meaning  is  to  the  time  of. 

To-day,  to-morrow,  to-night.  Today,  tomorrow, 
tonight.  Both  forms  are  in  current  use,  but  that  in 
which  the  hyphen  is  used  is  given  preference  in  Cen- 
tury and  Standard  Dictionaries. 

Toward,  towards.  Interchangeable,  but  Standard 
gives  preference  to  the  first  form. 

Transpire.  Not  correctly  used  in  the  sense  of 
occur  or  happen. 


218  The  Correct  Word 

Was,  were.  Were,  not  was,  is  required  after  as  if, 
as  though,  or  wish.  "He  looked  as  if  he  were  flying," 
not  "He  looked  as  if  he  was  flying. "  "I  wish  I  were 
a  sailor." 

Whether.  May  be  used  to  introduce  a  single 
alternative,  the  second  alternative,  introduced  by  or, 
being  implied;  as,  "I  do  not  know  whether  I  shall  go " 
("or  not"  being  understood). 

Whoever,  whomever.  When  the  pronoun  is  at  the 
same  time  the  subject  of  a  clause  and  the  object  of  a 
verb,  it  should  be  put  in  the  nominative  case,  its 
position  as  the  subject  being  more  important  than  its 
position  as  the  object  of  the  verb;  as,  "He  decided  to 
employ  whoever  applied  before  nine  o'clock." 

Without.  Should  not  be  used  in  the  sense  of 
unless.  "He  said  he  would  not  come  unless  (not 
without)  I  sent  for  him. " 

USELESS  WORDS. 

The  English  language  could  be  simplified  and 
improved  by  the  separation  of  certain  couples  and 
groups  of  words  too  frequently  bound  together  in 
unnecessary  and  inharmonious  relations  by  careless 
or  undiscerning  speakers  and  writers.  In  the  hurry 
of  speech  it  is  easy  to  err,  but  in  writing  one  can 
certainly  use  care. 

This  list  of  such  groups  is  not  complete.  It  is  only 
a  reminder.  The  discriminating  will  add  to  it. 

Accept  of.     Omit  of. 

Ate  up.     Leave  out  up.     One  really  eats  downward. 
Better  than  you  think  for.     Omit  for. 
Both  alike.     Not  "they  are  both  alike,"  but  "they 
are  alike. " 


The  Correct  Word  219 

Continue  on.     Omit  on. 

Equally  as.  "It  is  as  large  as  this  and  equally  as 
broad. "  Omit  as  after  equally. 

Every  now  and  then.     Omit  every. 

Every  once  in  a  while.     Omit  every. 

Month  of  July.  July  is  always  a  month.  The 
word  "month"  is  not  necessary  to  distinguish  it. 
Why  not  "the  day  of  Tuesday"? 

New  beginner.  Omit  new.  Every  beginner  is  new 
in  his  work. 

Off  of.  Standard  grammars  say  the  use  of  these 
two  words  together  is  "extremely  inelegant." 
Say,  "Cut  a  yard  off  the  piece. " 

Other  alternative.  Leave  out  other  in  such  expres- 
sions as  "There  is  no  other  alternative. "  Alterna- 
tive refers  to  two  things.  Alter  means  other. 
"There  is  no  alternative"  is  the  correct  expres- 
sion. 

Returned  back.     Omit  back. 

Rose  up.  Omit  up.  Rose  or  arose  alone  is  suffi- 
cient to  indicate  the  upward  direction.  Nothing 
rises  down. 

Taste  of,  feel  of,  smell  of.  Omit  of.  "Taste 
the  onion"  and  "Taste  of  the  onion";  "Smell 
the  rose"  and  "Smell  of  the  rose"  have  very 
different  meanings. 

Where  are  you  going  to?     Omit  to. 

Widow  woman.  Omit  woman.  Widow  is  suffi- 
cient; the  word  does  not  refer  to  men. 


"INDEX  EXPURGATORIUS." 

It  is  said  that,  years  ago,  William  Cullen  Bryant, 
then  editor  of  a  New  York  newspaper,  framed  an 
"Index  Expurgatorius "  for  the  guidance  of  reporters, 
in  which  were  included  some  of  the  following  words 
and  phrases,  the  use  of  which  he  considered  beneath 
the  dignity  of  a  first-class  newspaper.  That  journal 
is  still  famous  for  the  elegance  of  its  diction. 

It  would  be  well  for  every  secretary,  amanuensis, 
and  stenographer  to  commit  to  memory  the  following 
"Index  Expurgatorius"  and  to  add  to  it  from  time  to 
time  such  other  expressions  as  deserve  expulsion  from 
the  "Society  of  Correct  English." 

Above  statement,  or  it  appears  from  the  above. 

"The  foregoing"  or  "preceding  statement"  or  para- 
graph is  preferable. 

Aggravate.  Not  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  provoke 
or  exasperate.  Aggravate  properly  means  "to  make 
heavier." 

Agriculturalist.     The  correct  word  is  agriculturist. 

All  over.  Not  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  over  all. 
Not  "all  over  the  country,"  but  "over  all  the  coun- 
try." 

Anybody's  else.  The  correct  form  is  anybody  else's. 
Both  Standard  and  Century  Dictionaries  are  authority 
for  this  latter  form.  The  phrases  anybody  else,  some- 

220 


"Index  Expurgatorius **         221 

body  else,  nobody  else,  etc.,  have  a  unitary  meaning,  as 
if  one  word,  and  properly  take  a  possessive  case  (with 
the  suffix  at  the  end  of  the  phrase) :  as,  this  is  some- 
body else's  hat;  nobody  else's  children  act  so. 

At  twenty  minutes  to  three.  At  twenty  minutes  of 
three  is  the  correct  expression.  The  idea  to  be  con- 
veyed is  that  it  lacks  twenty  minutes  of  being  three 
o'clock.  Century  gives  the  following  example  under 
"obsolete,  provincial  or  colloquial  uses":  "At  twenty 
minutes  to  three,  Her  Majesty  entered  the  House." 

Balance.  Not  to  be  used  for  remainder.  Standard 
says  these  expressions,  "the  balance  of  one's  dinner, " 
"the  balance  of  the  evening,"  are  objectionable 
colloquialisms.  Say  "the  rest"  or  "the  remainder." 

Between  you  and  I.  Both  of  the  pronouns  in  this 
phrase  must  be  in  the  objective  case — objects  of  the 
preposition  "between;"  therefore,  "between  you  and 
me.1' 

Bursted.  A  false  formation.  The  imperfect  and 
past  participle  of  "burst"  are  the  same  as  the  present. 
' '  The  gun  burst. "  "  The  bubble  has  burst. ' ' 

Can.  Not  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  may.  Can 
always  refers  to  some  form  of  possibility.  "  Can  I  use 
your  ruler?"  means,  Am  I  able  to  use  it?  "May  I 
use  your  ruler?"  means,  Have  I  permission  to  use  it? 

Demean.  Not  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  degrade. 
Demean  means  to  behave  or  conduct  (oneself). 

Died  from,  died  with.  A  person  dies  of  a  fever,  not 
from  or  with  a  fever. 

Different  to,  different  than.  Different  from  is  the 
only  correct  usage.  (Standard.) 


222        "  Index  E-xpurgatorius  " 

Doctress.  This  word  is  not  now  used  to  distinguish 
a  woman  physician;  poetess,  authoress  and  editress  are 
almost  obsolete,  the  forms  doctor,  poet,  author  and 
editor  being  preferred. 

Don't.  Not  to  be  used  as  the  predicate  of  a  noun 
singular.  Don't  is  a  contraction  of  do  not,  which  is 
plural.  " He  does  n't, "  "they  don't, "  are  the  proper 
forms. 

Enthuse.  An  ill-formed  word;  a  vulgarism.  (Stand- 
ard.) 

Every.  Not  to  be  used  for  entire  or  all;  as,  "  I  have 
every  confidence  in  him."  Say  "I  have  entire  confi- 
dence in  him. " 

Fix.  In  the  sense  of  repair,  or  adjust,  a  collo- 
quialism. 

Foot.  Not  to  be  used  in  the  sense  of  pay;  as,  "He 
will  foot  the  bill. "  A  colloquialism. 

Got.  Not  to  be  used  to  express  mere  possession; 
as,  "I  have  got  a  bill  to  collect."  Got  is  to  be  used 
only  when  there  has  been  a  getting.  It  is  proper  only 
when  gotten  may  be  substituted  for  it;  as,  "The  man 
has  got  (gotten)  the  amount  which  he  went  out  to 
collect." 

Healthy.  Not  to  be  used  in  describing  climate, 
food,  etc.  A  person  is  healthy,  the  climate  is  health- 
ful,  and  food  is  wholesome — or  the  reverse. 

Heighth.  There  is  no  such  word,  although  it  is 
frequently  heard.  The  proper  word  is  height.  "  I  do 
not  know  the  height  of  the  tower." 


*'  Index  Expurgatorius  "         223 

If.  Not  to  be  used  instead  of  whether  in  introducing 
an  indirect  question  or  object  clause;  as,  "Go  and  see 
if  (whether)  the  package  has  come."  Standard  says 
this  use  can  be  sanctioned  only  in  colloquial  and 
poetic  language. 

I  meant  to  have  gone.  This  expression  and  similar 
ones — "  I  should  like  to  have  gone, "  "  I  meant  to  have 
written,"  are  common  errors  of  educated  persons. 
The  rule  is,  "When  the  infinitive  verb  refers  to  a 
time  coincident  with  or  after  that  of  the  principal 
verb,  the  present  infinitive  is  used."  The  correct 
form  of  the  preceding  expressions  is,  "I  should  have 
liked  to  go,"  "I  meant  to  write,"  and  "I  meant  to 
go. "  The  doubling  of  the  past  tenses  with  have  and  a 
past  participle  is  proper  only  when  the  completion  of 
the  future  act  was  intended  before  the  occurrence  of 
something  else;  as,  "I  meant  to  have  written  before 
you  arrived. " 

In  our  midst.  The  better  expression  is,  "among 
us;"  or,  if  a  more  literal  expression  is  desired,  "in  the 
midst  of  us. " 

Know  as.     Incorrectly  used  for  "know  that." 

Lit.     Incorrect  usage  for  lighted. 

Loan.  Not  to  be  used  as  a  verb.  It  is  colloquial 
and  not  in  good  usage.  "I  will  lend  you  money"  is 
the  proper  form. 

Over-above.  Not  correct  when  the  meaning  is 
more  than,  in  referring  to  numbers;  as,  "More  than 
fifty  (not  over  or  above  fifty)  were  present." 

Party.  Not  to  be  used  when  one  person  is  meant. 
Party,  meaning  one  person,  is  properly  a  legal  term, 


224          "  Index  Expurgatorixis  " 

signifying  one  who  participates  in  a  lawsuit,  contract 
or  transaction.  "Party  in  the  sense  of  person  is  now 
only  vulgar." — Century. 

Posted.     Not  good  usage  for  well  informed. 

Quantity.  Not  properly  used  for  number.  Not  "a 
quantity  of  books, "  but  "a  number  of  books." 

Quite  a  number.  It  is  meaningless.  Several  is  the 
proper  and  sufficient  term. 

Real.  Not  properly  used  for  really.  Not  "real 
good,"  but  "really  good."  More  correctly,  "It  is 
very  good." 

Seldom  or  ever.  A  solecism.  "  Seldom,  if  ever, "  or 
"seldom  or  never"  is  the  proper  phrase. 

Such  a.  Improperly  used  in  the  sense  of  so;  as,  "I 
never  have  seen  such  a  tall  man. "  Say  "  I  never  have 
seen  so  tall  a  man. " 

Such  another.  The  coirect  expression  is  "another 
such. " 

Suicided.  There  is  no  such  word  in  good  literary 
usage. 

Unbeknown.     A  provincialism. 
Was  taken  ill.     Say,  "became  ill." 

Years  of  age.  The  correct  expression  is,  "Ten 
years  old"  or  "aged  ten  years." 

Xmas.  Should  not  be  used  in  place  of  "Christ- 
mas. " 


TELEGRAMS. 

The  Western  Union  Telegraph  Company  and  the 
Commercial  Cable  Company  furnish  the  following 
regulations  governing  the  counting  and  charging  of 
domestic  Telegrams  passing  between  points  within  the 
United  States  and  Canada,  International  Telegrams 
between  Mexico  and  the  aforenamed  countries,  and 
Cable  messages  between  the  Eastern  and  Western 
Hemispheres. 

Telegrams  must  be  written  upon  the  "form"  or 
"blank"  prescribed  by  the  Telegraph  administration 
for  that  purpose  or  must  be  attached  to  that  form  in 
such  a  manner  as  to  leave  the  printed  caption  in  full 
view  above  the  message  when  written. 

Registered  Cable  Code  Addresses  are  not  accepted 
as  sufficient  address  in  Domestic  telegrams.  Full  and 
ample  addresses  must  be  furnished. 

WORDS  TO  BE  COUNTED  AND  CHARGED  FOR. 

The  minimum  charge  is  for  ten  words.  An  addi- 
tional charge  is  made  for  each  additional  word. 

The  address  (including  a  title  following  or  preceding 
the  name)  is  free. 

The  signature  is  free,  but  a  title  in  the  signature  is 
charged  for. 

More  than  one  signature  appended  to  a  telegram 
will  be  charged  for.  only  one  signature  being  sent  free. 
is  225 


226  Telegrams 

Messages  are  received  and  transmitted  in  various 
languages,  including  English,  French,  German,  Dutch, 
Latin,  Italian,  Spanish  and  Portuguese. 

Each  and  every  word,  exclusive  of  address  and 
signature,  is  counted  and  charged  for. 

Initial  letters,  surnames  of  persons,  names  of  cities, 
towns,  villages,  states,  territories,  and  of  the  Canadian 
Provinces,  or  abbreviations  of  such  names,  are  each 
counted  and  charged  as  one  word.  (For  instance,  the 
name  "East  St.  Louis"  or  "New  Mexico"  is  one 
word.) 

'In  order  to  shorten  telegrams,  initials  of  a  long 
name  may  be  combined  and  used  as  one  word,  pro- 
vided the  word  is  pronounceable.  (Example,  Carl  A. 
Fenlon— C.  A.  P.— Caf.) 

Names  of  countries  or  counties,  though  composed 
of  more  than  one  word,  are  counted  as  one. 

Abbreviations  of  weights  and  measures,  figures, 
decimal  points,  bars  of  division  (such  as  the  line  in  the 
fraction  ^),  are  each  separately  counted  and  charged 
for  as  one  word. 

Compound  words,  with  or  without  the  hyphen,  if 
recognized  as  compounds  in  dictionaries,  count  as  one 
word. 

Avoid  dividing  a  word  at  the  end  of  a  line. 

As  punctuation-marks  are  neither  counted  nor  sent 
except  on  written  instructions  to  send  them,  these 
marks  may  be  omitted,  with  the  exception  of  the 
period  and  interrogation-point. 

But  in  important  telegrams,  where  a  direct  quota- 
tion is  to  be  transmitted,  the  safest  method  is  to  name 
the  marks  of  punctuation,  including  the  quotation- 
marks,  as  in  the  following  example : 


Telegrams  227 

WILLIAM  DAWSON, 
San  Francisco,  Cal. 

Insert  m  mortgage  on  page  nine,  end  of  first  paragraph,  these 
words  quote  in  case  of  default  in  payment  of  the  bonds  comma 
or  any  coupon  thereto  belonging  comma  the  trustee  shall 
retain  possession  of  the  property  period  end  quote. 

A.  M.  SMITH 

Write  all  numbers  in  words. 

Write  the  abbreviations  F.  0.  B..  C.  O.  D.,  etc., 
fob,  cod,  etc. 

Write  signatures  to  telegrams  on  the  typewriter. 

The  message:  "Shipped  you  May  loth  C.  0.  D. 
1,000  Ibs.  No.  3  cotton  at  #20.50"  should  be  written: 
"Shipped  you  May  tenth  cod  one  thousand  pounds 
number  three  cotton  at  twenty  dollars  fifty." 

GROUPS  OF  LETTERS  AND  FIGURES. 

Each  letter  and  each  figure  of  a  group  are  counted 
and  charged  for  as  one  word. 

In  ordinal  numbers  the  affixes  st,  d,  nd,  rd  and  th 
are  each  counted  as  one  word. 

Groups  of  letters,  when  such  groups  do  not  form 
dictionary  words,  are  counted  at  the  rate  of  five 
letters,  or  fraction  of  five  letters,  to  a  word.  When 
groups  are  formed  by  combining  dictionary  words, 
each  dictionary  word  is  counted  as  one  word. 

The  following  examples  illustrate  the  application 
of  this  rule: 

Excursion  (English  dictionary)   .  I  word 

Nous  arriverons  dimanche  (French  "      )   .  3  words 

G.W.E.A.  (Initials)  ...  4     " 

Van  Dome  (Surname)          .         .  .1  word 


228  Telegrams 

W.  H.  Brown,  Jr.    .         .         .         .         .         .         .4  words 

East  St.  Louis  (City)  I  word 

New  York  (State)      .         .         .         .  I    " 

District  of  Columbia  (or  D.  C.) I     " 

Lbs.  (Abbreviation  of  weight)          .         .  I     " 

looooooo       (Figures)      ......  8  words 

Ten  millions  (Amount  expressed  in  dictionary  words)    .  2     " 

44.42  (Figures  and  decimal  point)     .          .          •  5     ' 

74%  (Figures  and  bar  of  division)    .          .  5     " 

A I  (Letters  and  figures)       .         .         .  2     " 

loth  (Ordinal  number  and  affix)       .          .          •  3     " 

No.  l8sWest22dSt 9     " 

Ababa  (Artificial  group  0*5  letters)    .          .          .  I  word 

Ccghxo          (      "  "     of   6     "      )  .         .2  words 

Dutimerodal(      "  "     ofii     "      )  .         .  3     " 

Dothe  (Improperly  combined)  .  2     " 

Allright  or  alright  (         "  )  .  2     " 

Havyu          (Two   dictionary  words   mutilated   and 

ir -.properly  combined)          .         .  2  _" 

Exceptions. 

....  I  word 


A.M. 

. 

P.M. 

.         . 

F.  O.  B. 

(or  fob)  . 

C.  O.  D. 

(or  cod)  . 

C.I.F. 

(or  cif  )    . 

C.A.F. 

(or  caf  )    . 

O.K. 

.          . 

Per  cent 

(or  percent.) 

It  will  be  seen  from  the  foregoing  list  that  it  is  bet- 
ter to  spell  the  word  "  tenth  "  than  to  write  it  "  I  oth ; ' ' 
to  write  "ten  million"  than  to  write  "10,000,000;" 
"  ten  degrees  "  rather  than  "  10° ; "  "  ten  by  twenty  " 
rather  than  "  10  x  20." 

Night  messages,  written  on  night-message  blanks, 
are  sent  for  about  15%  less  than  day  rates,  are  trans- 


Telegrams  229 

mitted  after  six  o'clock  P.M.,  and  not  delivered  before 
eight  A.M.  the  following  morning. 

"Night  Letters"  are  received  up  to  midnight  and 
transmitted  for  delivery  on  the  morning  of  the  next 
ensuing  business  day  at  the  following  rates:  the 
standard  day  rate  for  10  words  is  charged  for  50  words 
or  less  and  of  such  standard  day  rate  for  10  words 
for  each  additional  10  words  or  less. 

"Day  Letters"  (long  telegrams)  are  received,  sub- 
ject to  slight  delays  in  transmission  and  delivery,  at 
the  rate  of  one  and  one-half  times  the  standard  night- 
letter  rate  for  50  words  or  less  and  of  the  initial  rate 
for  such  50  words  for  each  additional  10  words  or 
less. 

At  the  option  of  the  Telegraph  Company,  night 
letters  may  be  mailed  and  day  letters  telephoned,  at 
destination,  to  the  addressee. 

Code  language  is  not  permitted  in  day  letters  or 
night  letters. 

CODE  AND  CIPHER  TELEGRAMS. 

In  large  offices  the  stenographer  deciphers  code 
and  cipher  telegrams  and  puts  them  in  proper  and 
readable  form.  The  following  is  one  method  of  doing 
this: 

Place  the  Code  words  in  a  column  at  the  left  margin 
of  the  paper  and  follow  each  of  the  Code  words  at  the 
right  with  its  translation,  taken  from  the  printed 
Code  book  in  use  or  whatever  private  Code  is  used. 
Thus,  a  telegram  reading  "  Bridge  begabtheit  delivered 
earlier  aliquibus  ladle"  is  translated  from  the  Code 
thus: 


230  Telegrams 

Copy  of  Telegram  from  Grinnell  &  Co.,  San  Francisco. 
Dated  Dec.  24,  1910. 
Rec'd  Dec.  24,  1910. 
John  J.  Simmons, 

19  Broadway,  New  York. 
Bridge  Bridge 

Begabtheit  Proposal  accepted 

Delivered  Delivered 

Earlier  Earlier 

Aliquibus  Details  by  letter 

Ladle  Can    you    make    earlier 

delivery? 

If  there  is  a  word  in  the  telegram  for  which  no  exact 
equivalent  is  found  in  the  Code,  place  it  in  the  left- 
hand  column  and  immediately  below  it  place  the 
nearest  equivalent  Code  word,  with  an  interrogation- 
point  after  it  and  place  the  translation  opposite  the 
Code  word. 

If  there  is  a  word  in  the  telegram  for  which  no 
reasonable  translation  can  be  found  in  the  Code,  place 
the  word  in  the  left-hand  column  with  an  interroga- 
tion-point after  it  and  put  no  word  in  the  right-hand 
column. 

CABLE  MESSAGES. 

All  words,  except  the  date  and  name  of  office  of 
origin,  are  counted  and  charged  for. 

Name  and  address  of  receiver  must  contain  at  least 
two  words. 

Sender  is  responsible  for  incorrect  or  insufficient 
address.  Corrections  can  be  made  only  by  another 
message  which  must  be  paid  for. 


Cable  Messages  231 

In  messages  in  plain  language  the  maximum  length 
of  a  chargeable  word  is  15  letters.  Should  a  word 
contain  more  than  15  letters,  every  15,  or  fraction  of 
15,  letters  is  counted  as  a  word. 

When  the  letters  ch  come  together  in  a  word  they 
are  counted  as  one  letter,  except  in  code. 

Code  words  must  not  exceed  10  letters. 

Code  language  is  composed  of  (a)  real  words  not 
forming  comprehensible  phrases  and  (b)  combinations 
of  letters  having  the  appearance  of  real  words. 

Real  words  may  be  in  any  of  the  following  lan- 
guages: English,  French,  German,  Dutch,  Italian, 
Spanish,  Portuguese  or  Latin. 

Combinations  of  letters  (within  the  limit  of  10 
letters)  must  be  pronounceable  according  to  one  of  the 
above-named  languages. 

Combinations  of  letters  not  pronounceable  are 
counted  at  5  letters  to  the  word. 

Commercial  marks  and  abbreviations  in  current 
use  (as  tmrl,  cif,  fga,  sags,  rsvp)  are  counted  at  5 
letters  to  the  word. 

Combinations  or  alterations  of  words  contrary  to 
the  usage  of  the  language  are  counted  as  if  they  were 
written  in  the  usual  manner. 

Cipher  messages  may  be  composed  wholly  or  partly 
of  figures,  or  of  letters  or  groups  of  letters,  or  of  a 
combination  of  words  and  figures,  or  of  words  and 
letters.  Groups  of  figures  are  counted  at  the  rate  of 
5  figures  to  a  word,  plus  one  word  for  any  excess. 
The  same  rule  applies  to  groups  of  letters.  But 
figures  and  letters  written  in  the  same  group  must  be 
counted  separately. 

Plain  words  inserted  in  code  messages  are  counted 
at  10  letters  to  the  word. 


232  Cable  Messages 

Surnames  of  one  person,  names  of  ships,  of  towns 
and  countries,  of  places,  squares,  streets  and  other 
public  places;  whole  numbers,  fractions,  decimal  or 
fractional  numbers  written  entirely  in  letters  and 
compound  words  can  be  grouped  as  one  word  each. 
They  are  counted  at  the  10  or  15  letter  limit. 

Words  joined  by  a  hyphen  or  separated  by  an 
apostrophe  are  counted  as  so  many  separate  words. 

The  following  are  counted  as  a  word:  Each  initial 
to  a  personal  name ;  each  separate  letter ;  each  separate 
figure;  each  supplementary  instruction,  such  as  =R. 
P.  15=  ;  an  underline ;  parentheses ;  quotation-marks. 

Signs  of  punctuation,  hyphens  and  apostrophes  are 
not  counted  or  transmitted. 

Decimal  points,  commas,  bars  and  dashes  used  in 
the  formation  of  numbers  and  bars  of  division,  are 
each  counted  as  a  figure. 

Letters  added  to  figures  to  torm  ordinal  numbers, 
or  to  designate  the  number  of  a  house  in  an  address, 
are  each  counted  as  a  figure  in  the  group  in  which  they 
occur;  thus  i2Qth  (5  figures),  I  word;  195 A  (4  figures), 
i  word. 

The  following  examples  illustrate  the  application 
of  the  rules  in  plain  messages. 

In  the  Address    In  the  Text. 

New  York I  word  2  words 

Newyork I     "  I  word 

Hydepark  Square   2  words  2  words 

Hydeparksquare   2     "  2      " 

Saint  James  Street   3     "  3      " 

Saintjamesstreet   2     "  2      " 

Ruedelapaix 2     "  2      " 

Princeof wales  (Ship,  13  letters)    ....  I  word 

44  Yz  (5  characters)    I      " 


Cable  Messages  233 


444-55  (6  characters)    2  words 

£  i 2      " 

14x14 3     " 

I7th    i  word 

2%.. I       " 

Two  hundred  and  thirty-four 5  words 

Twohundredandthirtyfour  (23  letters)    2     " 

Elevenandahalf I  word 

2  words 


GENERAL  POSTAL  INFORMATION. 

The  following  information  regarding  the  mailing  of 
ordinary  matter  is  furnished  by  the  Post-Office 
Department.  More  detailed  information  may  be 
obtained  from  a  printed  pamphlet  issued  by  the 
Department  and  furnished  free  by  it  on  application. 

Domestic  mail  matter  includes  matter  deposited 
in  the  mails  for  local  delivery,  or  for  transmission 
from  one  place  to  another  within  the  United  States,  or 
to  or  from  or  between  the  possessions  of  the  United 
States. 

Porto  Rico  and  Hawaii  are  included  in  the  term 
"  United  States. "  The  Philippine  Archipelago,  Guam, 
Tutuila  (including  all  adjacent  islands  of  the  Samoan 
group  which  are  possessions  of  the  United  States),  and 
the  Canal  Zone  are  included  in  the  term  "Possessions 
of  the  United  States."  The  term,  "Canal  Zone" 
includes  all  the  territory  purchased  from  the  Republic 
of  Panama,  embracing  the  "Canal  Zone"  proper  and 
the  islands  in  the  Bay  of  Panama  named  Perico,  Naos, 
Culebra,  and  Flamenco. 

Domestic  rates  of  postage  apply  to  mail  matter  sent 
from  the  United  States  to  Canada,  Cuba,  Mexico,  the 
Republic  of  Panama,  and  the  United  States  postal 
agency  at  Shanghai,  China,  and  matter  addressed  to 
officers  or  members  of  the  crew  of  vessels  of  war  of  the 
United  States. 

234 


General  Postal  Information         235 

RATES  OF  POSTAGE  ON  DOMESTIC  MAIL   MATTER. 

FIRST  CLASS.  Includes:  Letters,  United  States  postal  cards, 
private  post  cards,  all  matter  sealed  or  closed  against  in- 
spection, all  matter  wholly  or  partly  in  writing,  sealed  or 
unsealed,  typewriting  and  letter-press  copies  thereof. 

Rate:  2  cents  for  each  ounce  or  fraction  thereof.  Postal 
cards  and  post  cards,  i  cent  each.  Prepayment  of  at  least 
one  full  rate  (2  cents)  required,  except  a  letter  bearing  only 
a  special  delivery  stamp.  Unpaid  postage  collected  on 
delivery  at  single  rates.  Limit  of  weight,  4  pounds. 

SECOND  CLASS.  (Unsealed.)  Includes:  Newspapers  and 
periodicals  (complete  copies;  partial  or  incomplete  copies 
are  third-class  matter). 

Rate:  I  cent  for  each  4  ounces  or  fraction  thereof,  when 
mailed  by  the  public.  Rates  to  publishers  one  cent  a  pound. 
Full  prepayment  required.  No  limit  of  weight. 

THIRD  CLASS.  (Unsealed.)  Includes:  Circulars,  Photo- 
graphs, Blue  Prints,  Press  Clippings,  and  a  great  variety  of 
other  "printed  matter";  proof  sheets,  corrected  proof  sheets 
accompanied  by  manuscript,  and  matter  in  raised  characters 
used  by  the  blind. 

Rate:  i  cent  for  each  2  ounces  or  fraction  thereof.  Full 
prepayment  required.  Limit  of  weight,  4  pounds. 

FOURTH  CLASS.  (Unsealed.)  Parcel  Post.  Includes: 
Books  and  all  other  matter,  including  farm  and  factory 
products,  not  included  in  the  first,  second,  or  third  class, 
which  is  not  greater  in  size  than  72  inches  in  length  and  girth 
combined,  nor  in  form  or  kind  likely  to  injure  the  person 
of  any  postal  employee  or  damage  the  mail  equipment,  and 
not  of  a  character  perishable  within  a  period  reasonably 
required  for  transportation  and  delivery.  The  limit  of 
•weight  for  parcels  intended  for  delivery  at  other  post-offices 
within  the  first  and  second  zones  is  fifty  pounds;  for  parcels 
in  other  than  the  first  and  second  zones  is  twenty  pounds. 

Rates:  Parcels  (except  those  containing  books)  weighing 
four  ounces  or  less  are  mailable  at  the  rate  of  one  cent  for 
each  ounce  or  fraction  of  an  ounce  regardless  of  distance. 
Parcels  weighing  more  than  four  ounces  are  mailable  at  the 
pound  rates  shown  in  the  table  on  the  next  page,  a  fraction 
of  a  pound  being  considered  a  full  pound.  On  packages  of 
books  weighing  8  ounces  or  less  the  rate  will  be  one  cent  for 
each  2  ounces;  on  those  weighing  over  8  ounces  the  zone 
rates  will  apply 


236 


General  Postal  Information 


Parcel  Post  Schedule  of  Zone  Rates 


Weight 

Miles 
not  over 

1st  zone 

2d 
zone 
rate 

150 

3d 

zone 
rate 

300 

4th 
zone 
rate 

600 

5th 
zone 
rate 

1000 

6th 
zone 
rate 

1400 

7th 
zone 
rate 

1800 

8th 
zone 
rate 
over 
1800 

Local 
rate 

zone 
rate 

50 

1  pound 
2  pounds 
3  pounds 
4  pounds 
5  pounds 
6  pounds 
7  pounds 
8  pounds 
9  pounds 
10  pounds 
11  pounds 
12  pounds 
13  pounds 
14  pounds 
15  pounds 
16  pounds 
17  pounds 
18  pounds 
19  pounds 
20  pounds 
21  pounds 
22  pounds 
23  pounds 
24  pounds 
25  pounds 
26  pounds 
27  pounds 
28  pounds 
29  pounds 
30  pounds 
31  pounds 
32  pounds 
33  pounds 
34  pounds 
35  pounds 
36  pounds 
37  pounds 
38  pounds 
39  pounds 
40  pounds 
41  pounds 
42  pounds 
43  pounds 
44  pounds 
45  pounds 
46  pounds 
47  pounds 
48  pounds 
49  pounds 
50  pounds 

$0.05 
.06 
.06 
.07 
.07 
.08 
.08 
.09 
.09 
.10 
.10 
.11 
.11 
.12 
.12 
.13 
.13 
.14 
.14 
.15 
.15 
.16 
.16 
.17 
.17 
.18 
.18 
.19 
.19 
.20 
.20 
.21 
.21 
.22 
.22 
.23 
.23 
.24 
.24 
.25 
.25 
.26 
.26 
.27 
.27 
.28 
.28 
.29 
.29 
.30 

10.05 
.06 
.07 
.08 
.09 
.10 
.11 
.12 
.13 
.14 
.15 
.16 
.17 
.18 
.19 
.20 
.21 
.22 
.23 
.24 
.25 
.26 
.27 
.28 
.29 
.30 
.31 
.32 
.33 
.34 
.35 
.36 
.37 
.38 
.39 
.40 
.41 
.42 
.43 
.44 
.45 
.46 
.47 
.48 
.49 
.50 
.51 
.52 
.53 
.54 

$0.05 
.06 
.07 
.08 
.09 
.10 
.11 
.12 
.13 
.14 
.15 
.16 
.17 
.18 
.19 
.20 
.21 
.22 
.23 
.24 
.25 
.26 
.27 
.28 
.29 
.30 
.31 
.32 
.33 
.34 
.35 
.36 
.37 
.38 
.39 
.40 
.41 
.42 
.43 
.44 
.45 
.46 
.47 
.48 
.49 
.50 
.51 
.52 
.53 
.54 

$0.06 
.08 
.10 
.12 
.14 
.16 
.18 
.20 
.22 
.24 
.26 
.28 
.30 
.32 
.34 
.36 
.38 
.40 
.42 
.44 

$0.07 
.11 
.15 
.19 
.23 
.27 
.31 
.35 
.39 
.43 
.47 
.51 
.55 
.59 
.63 
.67 
.71 
.75 
.79 
.83 

$0.08 
.14 
.20 
.26 
.32 
.38 
.44 
.50 
.56 
.62 
.68 
.74 
.80 
.86 
.92 
.98 
1.04 
1.10 
1.16 
1.22 

$0.09 
.17 
.25 
.33 
.41 
.49 
.57 
.65 
.73 
.81 
.89 
.97 
1.05 
1.13 
1.21 
1.29 
1.37 
1.45 
1.53 
1.61 

$0.11 
.21 
.31 
.41 
.51 
.61 
.71 
.81 
.91 
1.01 
1.11 
1.21 
1.31 
1.41 
1.51 
1.61 
1.71 
1.81 
1.91 
2.01 

$0.12 
.24 
.36 
.48 
.60 
.72 
.84 
.96 
1.08 
1.20 
1.32 
1.44 
1.56 
1.68 
1.80 
1.92 
2.04 
2.16 
2.28 
.2.40 

General  Postal   Information         237 

RATES  OF  POSTAGE  APPLICABLE  TO  FOREIGN 
COUNTRIES. 

Cents 

Letters,  for  the  first  ounce  or  fraction  of  an  ounce 5 

And  for  each  additional  ounce  or  fraction  of  an  ounce 3 

Single  postal  cards  (including  souvenir  cards),  each 2 

Double  postal  cards,  each 4 

Letters  for  Great  Britain  and  Ireland,  per  ounce 2 

Letters  for  Germany  by  steamers  sailing  for  Germany  direct 
per  ounce 2 

Ordinary  letters  for  any  foreign  country  (except  Canada, 
Mexico,  or  the  City  of  Shanghai,  China)  will  be  forwarded  whether 
any  postage  is  prepaid  on  them  or  not.  All  other  matter  must  be 
prepaid  at  least  partially.  But  on  wholly  unpaid  letters  and  on 
insufficiently  paid  articles  of  all  kinds  double  the  amount  of  the 
deficient  postage  is  collectible  on  delivery. 

WRAPPING. 

Second,  Third  and  Fourth  Class  matter,  when  so  wrapped  that 
it  cannot  be  examined  easily,  or  when  containing  writing  not 
authorized  by  law,  is  subject  to  first-class  rates. 

PERMISSIBLE  ADDITIONS  TO  ADDRESS 

SECOND-CLASS  MATTER.  On  the  wrapper  or  on  the 
matter  itself,  in  addition  to  the  name  and  address  of  the 
addressee,  there  may  be  placed  the  name  and  address  of  the 
sender,  preceded  by  the  word  "from,"  the  words  "sample 
copy,"  or  "marked  copy,"  and  marks  (but  not  words)  to 
call  attention  to  any  passage.  Other  writing  will  subject 
the  package  to  the  first-class  rate. 

THIRD-CLASS  MATTER.  On  the  wrapper  or  on  the  matter 
itself  may  be  placed  the  name  and  address  and  occupation 
of  the  sender,  preceded  by  the  word  "from,"  written  desig- 
nation of  contents,  such  as  "printed  matter,"  "photo," 
and  any  other  matter  mailable  as  third  class. 
A  card  or  envelope  bearing  the  name  and  address  of  the  sender 
may  be  enclosed  with,  or  a  dedication  or  inscription  not  in 
the  nature  of  personal  correspondence,  and  such  expressions 
as  "  My  dear  friend,"  "  Yours  truly,"  may  be  placed  upon  the 
photograph  or  other  third-class  matter.  But  such  words  as 
"  Please  send  out,"  or  "  Post  up,"  written  upon  the  wrapper 
will  subject  third-class  mail  to  letter  postage. 


238          General  Postal  Information 

FOURTH-CLASS  MATTER.  On  the  wrapper  or  on  the  matter 
itself  must  be  placed  the  name  and  address  of  the  sender, 
preceded  by  the  word  "from";  any  marks,  numbers,  names 
or  letters  necessary  for  description,  and  any  printed  matter 
not  in  the  nature  of  personal  correspondence,  may  be  placed 
on  the  inside. 

The  card  of  the  sender  may  be  enclosed  bearing  such  inscrip- 
tion as  "Merry  Christmas,"  "With  best  wishes,"  etc. 

FORWARDING. 

FIRST  CLASS.  Matter  paid  at  first-class  rates  is  forwarded 
without  a  new  prepayment  of  postage.  Also,  mail  matter 
of  all  classes  addressed  to  persons  in  the  service  of  the  United 
States  whose  change  of  address  is  caused  by  official  orders 
will  be  forwarded  until  it  reaches  the  addressee  without  a 
new  prepayment  of  postage. 

SECOND,  THIRD  and  FOURTH  CLASSES.  A  new  pre- 
payment on  mail  of  any  one  of  these  three  classes  must  be 
made  every  time  it  is  forwarded. 

Mail  matter  of  all  kinds  received  from  any  foreign  country 
(including  Canada,  Mexico  and  Cuba  and  the  Republic  of 
Panama)  will  be  forwarded  at  request  of  addressee  and  (except 
parcels-post  packages)  to  any  foreign  country  without  additional 
charge  for  postage. 

MISCELLANEOUS  ITEMS. 

Letters  and  other  first-class  matter  prepaid  one  full  rate  are 
returnable  to  sender  without  additional  postage. 

Unclaimed  letters  bearing  card  of  hotel,  school,  or  other  public 
institution,  will  be  returned  thereto  only  upon  request. 

United  States  Government  postal  cards  are  entitled  to  all  the 
privileges  of  letters  except  that  of  return  to  sender  when  unde- 
liverable. 

Mail  intended  to  be  delivered  through  the  general  delivery 
should  be  marked  "General  Delivery." 

Mail  addressed  to  persons  in  a  city,  but  not  to  a  street  and 
number,  should  be  marked  "Transient,"  or  "General  Delivery." 


General  Postal   Information         239 

For  enclosing  any  matter  of  a  higher  class  in  that  of  a  lower 
class,  and  depositing  or  causing  the  same  to  be  deposited  for  con- 
veyance by  mail  at  a  less  rate  than  would  be  charged  for  both 
such  higher  and  lower  class,  the  offender  will  be  liable  for  every 
such  offense  to  a  fine  of  $10. 

Matter  of  a  higher  class  enclosed  with  matter  of  a  lower  class 
subjects  the  whole  package  to  the  higher  rate. 

United  States  postage  stamps  are  good  for  postage  in  Guam, 
Hawaii,  Porto  Rico,  and  Tutuila,  but  not  in  the  Philippine  Islands 
or  in  the  Panama  "  Canal  Zone."  Postage  stamps  of  the  Philip- 
pine Islands  or  Canal  Zone  are  not  good  for  postage  or  redeemable 
in  the  United  States. 

Stamps  cut  or  otherwise  severed  from  postal  cards,  embossed 
United  States  stamped  envelopes,  or  newspaper  wrappers  are 
not  redeemable  or  good  for  postage. 

SPECIAL  DELIVERY 

Ten  cents'  worth  of  ordinary  postage  stamps  in  addition  to 
the  lawful  postage  may  be  used  in  place  of  a  special-delivery 
stamp.  In  such  case  the  words  "Special  Delivery"  should  be 
written  upon  the  envelope. 

Special-delivery  matter  must  be  delivered  on  Sundays  also 
if  post-office  is  open  on  Sundays. 

Special-delivery  matter  may  be  forwarded,  but  is  not  entitled 
to  special  delivery  at  the  second  office  unless  forwarded  before 
an  attempt  has  been  made  to  deliver  at  the  original  address. 

REGISTERED  MAIL 

To  insure  special  care  in  transmission  and  correct  delivery, 
valuable  papers,  letters  or  other  articles  should  be  registered. 

Letters  or  packages  containing  first,  second  or  third  class  mat- 
ter only  are  accepted  for  registration.  Those  of  the  fourth  class 
(parcel  post)  are  insured.  (See  below.) 

The  registry  fee  is  10  cents  for  each  separate  letter  or  parcel, 
in  addition  to  the  postage,  both  to  be  fully  prepaid  with  postage 
stamps  attached  to  the  letter  or  parcel.  Two  or  more  letters  or 
parcels  cannot  be  registered  as  a  single  piece  unless  enclosed  in 
one  envelope  or  wrapper. 


240          General  Postal   Information 

Any  piece  of  first,  second  or  third  class  matter  may  be  regis- 
tered at  any  post-office  or  station  thereof,  and  by  any  rural 
carrier.  In  residential  districts  of  cities,  letters  and  packages 
of  first-class  matter  that  are  not  cumbersome  on  account  of  size, 
shape,  or  weight  can  be  registered  by  letter  carriers  at  the  house 
door  as  safely  as  if  taken  to  the  post-office. 

In  order  to  have  a  letter  or  parcel  registered,  it  must  bear  in 
serviceable  stamps  the  necessary  postage  and  registry  fee  (or 
money  sufficient  therefor  must  be  handed  to  the  carrier,  if  regis- 
tration be  by  carrier),  must  be  legibly  and  correctly  addressed, 
bear  upon  the  envelope  or  wrapper  the  name  and  address  of  the 
sender,  and  the  envelope  or  wrapper  must  be  of  such  strength 
as  safely  to  carry  the  contents  in  the  mails  without  breaking 
under  ordinary  conditions.  It  should  be  handed  to  the  post- 
master, clerk  or  carrier,  who  will  give  a  registration  receipt  to 
the  sender.  Letters  or  parcels  intended  to  be  sent  in  the  regis- 
tered mails  should  not  be  placed  in  street  letter-boxes  or  in  the 
ordinary  mail-drops  at  the  post-office. 

The  sender  of  registered  mail  may  reclaim  or  recall  it  at  any 
time  before  its  delivery,  by  applying  to  the  mailing  postmaster. 

In  case  of  the  loss  of  a  registered  article  prepaid  at  the  letter 
rate  of  postage,  mailed  at  and  addressed  to  a  post-office  in  the 
United  States,  the  sender  is  indemnified  for  its  value  up  to  fifty 
dollars. 

Parcels  prepaid  at  the  letter  rate  should  be  sealed. 


INSURANCE  OF  PARCEL-POST  PACKAGES. 

Fourth-class  matter  (parcel-post  packages)  for  domestic  des- 
tinations cannot  be  registered,  but  may  be  insured.  Each 
package  is  insured  against  loss  in  an  amount  equivalent  to  its 
actual  value,  but  not  to  exceed  $25.00,  on  payment  of  a  fee  of 
five  cents,  and  in  an  amount  equivalent  to  its  actual  value  in 
excess  of  $25.00,  but  not  to  exceed  $50.00,  on  payment  of  a  fee 
of  ten  cents  in  stamps,  such  stamps  to  be  affixed.  The  amount 
of  the  insurance  fee  shall  be  placed  on  the  receipt  given  the  sender 
and  on  the  coupon  retained  at  the  mailing  office.  The  insurance 
covers  loss  or  theft  only,  not  damage  or  injury  or  the  spoiling  of 
perishable  articles. 


General  Postal  Information         241 

MISCELLANEOUS  PARCEL-POST  INFORMATION 

The  sender  of  a  parcel-post  package  on  which  the  postage  is 
fully  prepaid  may  have  the  price  of  the  article  and  the  charges 
thereon  collected  from  the  addressee  on  payment  of  a  fee  of  10 
cents  in  postage  stamps  affixed,  provided  the  amount  to  be  col- 
lected does  not  exceed  $100.00.  Such  a  parcel  will  be  insured 
against  loss  without  additional  charge  in  an  amount  equivalent 
to  its  actual  value,  but  not  to  exceed  $50.00. 

Parcel-post  packages  weighing  over  four  ounces  must  be  mailed 
at  the  General  Post-Office  or  at  a  lettered  or  local  named  station 
or  branch  post-office,  or  such  numbered  stations  as  have  been 
designated  to  receive  parcel-post  matter.  Uninsured  parcels 
weighing  Jour  ounces  or  less  may  be  mailed  at  any  convenient 
point. 

Articles  classified  as  third-class  matter  cannot  be  sent  by  parcel- 
post. 

A  parcel-post  package  may  be  sent  "  Special  Delivery,"  tinder 
the  same  conditions  as  a  letter. 

Parcel-post  packages  for  foreign  points  cannot  be  insured,  but 
may  be  registered.  The  registration  fee  is  10  cents  in  adddition 
to  the  postage,  which  is  12  cents  a  pound.  Foreign  parcel-post 
packages  are  subject  to  a  number  of  special  provisions  according 
to  the  country  to  which  they  are  addressed. 


List  of  Signs  and  Abbreviations  Used  in  Correcting  Proof 


D 
O 

j?6  <rr  space  out 

ep# 

A 

**~or*f 
X  . 

vlX 
Stetj 

<T 

Tlotf 
C 

O 

V 

^xx 

vy 

Z.  c. 

cop. 

ital. 

rom. 

tr. 


(dele)     Take  away. 

Turn  an  inverted  letter. 

Indent. 

Directs  that  space  be  taken  out. 

Indicates  more  space  between  -words  or  letters. 
Equalize  spacing. 

Indicates  an  insertion. 

Indicates  less  space  between  words  or  letters. 

Indicates  broken  or  imperfect  type. 

Indicates  a  space  or  "  quadrat  "  which  improperly  appears. 

Let  it  remain  as  set ;  change  made  was  wrong. 

Make  a  new  paragraph. 

Run  in  "without  paragraph. 

Indicates  that  a  word  or  line  is  to  be  moved  towards  the  face 

of  the  bracket,  whichever  way  turned. 
Insert  a  hyphen. 
Insert  a  period. 

Insert  an  apostrophe. 

Use  double  quotation  marks. 

Use  single  quotation  marks. 

(lower  case)  Directs  that  a  letter  or  word  printed  in  capitals 
be  made  small. 

Use  a  capital  letter. 
Set  in  italics. 
Set  in  roman  type. 
Transpose  letters  or  •words. 

(wrong  foot)  Directs  attention  to  a  letter  of  a  wrong  size  01 
style. 

242 


List  of  Signs  and  Abbreviations 


243 


Qyorf 

s.  c. 

centre 

run  in 

overrun 

lead  or  Id 

white  line 


Query  as  to  spelling  or  use  of  language. 

Compare  with  copy. 

Set  in  middle  of  line  or  page. 

Set  full  line  without  break. 

Carry  forward  to  next  line. 

Insert  a  lead  (a  narrow  strip  of  metal  used  for  spacing  between  lines). 

Leave  a  space  between  lines  equal  to  a  line  of  type. 

Correct  the  alignment. 
Straighten  lines  at  margin. 


Specimen  of  Proof  with  Marks 

CPRANKLIN    AND   MEREDITH. 
,i^lftereditb.    came    accordingly    in    the    evening, 
when   we  talked   my  affair   over.      He  had  con- 
&  .ceived  a  great  rfgard  for  me,  and  was  very  un« 
'      willing    that^  "^should  Jeave^e^house  -'while^e 
01    remained  in  it,_    He  dissuaded  'me  from  returning 
/     to  my  native  country,  which  I  began  to  think  of; 
he  reminded  me  his  creditors  began  to  be  uneasy ; 
that  he  kept  his  shop  miserably,  sold  often  without 
if  profit  for  ready  money/  and  often  trusted  without 
/     trusted   without  keeping   accounts ;    that   he   must 
*   therefore  fa.il,  which  would  make  a  vacancy  I  might 
profitj2£_  I  objected^^rny  want  of  ready  money^ 

Qjetnen  leT  me  knjw  that  his  father  had  a  high 
opinion  of  me,  and  from  some  discourse  that  had 
passed  juween  them  he  was  sure  he  would  advance 
money  to  set  us  up  if  I  would  enter  into  partnership  /  A 
with  him.  ^'  MY  time^says  he,  ^ill  be  out  with 
Keimer  in  the  $pring;  oy  that  time  we  may  have 
our  presses  and  types  in  from  London.  I  am  sensi- 
ble I  am  no  workman  ;  if  you  like  it  your-ek^J-in  the 
^  business  shall  be^et  against  the  stock  I  furnish,  and 


him  to  abstain  long  from-  dramdrinking,  and  he 
hop'cl  might  break  him  ,of  that  wretched  habit  entirely 
when  we  come  to  be  so  closely  connected.  I  gave  an 
inventory. to-  the  father,  who  carried  it  to  a  merchant ; 
the  things  were  sent  for,  the  secret  was  to  be  kept 
till  they  should  arrive,  and  in  the  mearQime  I  was 
to  get  work,  if  I  could,  at  the  other  printing-house. 
^But  I  found  no  vacancy,  and  so  remained  idle  a  few 
Jlays,  when  Keimer,  on  a  prospect  of  being  employ^ 
jecy  to  print  some  paper-money  in  jilew  Jersey,  -which 
would  require  various  types  and  cuts  that  I  only 
could  supply,  and  apprehending  Bradford  might  en. 
gage  me  and  get  the  job  from  him,  sent  me  a  very 
civil  message,  that  old  fremds  should  not  part  for  a 

244 


Specimen  of  Proof  witH  MarKs 


245 


JK? 


few  words,  the  effect  of  sudden  passion,  and  wishing 
me  to  return.  Meredith  persuaded  trie  to  comply, 
as  it  would  give  more  opportunity  for  his  improve- 

Iment  under  my  daHy  instructions ;  so  I  returned,  and 
we  went  on  than  foj  sonic,  time  Jbefore.    The  New 
Jersey  job  was[cQnmved|;nJobtained)a 
press  for  it,  the  first  that  had  been  seen  in  thejcountry. 
I  cut  several  ornaments  and  checks  for  thejbills.  - 
went  Jtogether  to  Burlington,  where  I  executed 
whole  to  satisfaction ;  and  he  received  so  large  a  sum 
for  the  work,  forty  or  fifty  pounds,  as  tojbe  enabled 
thereby  to  keep  his  head  much  longer  [above  water 
We  continued  there  nearv|hnonths. 

^ 


INDEX 


Abbreviations,  116-126 

Abbreviations       universally 
allowable,  116 

by     omission     of     one 

letter,  117 

of  books  of  the  Bible,  117 
Christian  names,  117 
days,  118 

geographical  divi- 
sions, 117 

in  telegrams,  226,  23 1 
measures  of  distance, 
time,     capacity, 
weight,  43,  226 
months,  118 
names  of  states,  terri- 
tories, 125,  126 
points  of  compass,  117 
points   of    time,    117 
scholastic  degrees,  1 16 
titles,  63,   116 
towns,  117 

Commercial     abbreviations, 
signs,     contractions,     118 
Punctuation     of     abbrevia- 
tions, 118 

Accent,  marks  of,  ill 
Address,  2,  3,  4 
additions  to,  237 
forms  of  4,  5,  20-35 
in  letters  to  the  President, 
Congressmen,  etc.,  60-62 
in  letters  to  clergymen,  63-66 
punctuation  of,  4 
registered,  225 
Affidavit,  148 
Answer,  143 

Appellation  of  state  or  nation, 
83 


Apposition,  nouns  in,  88 
Apostrophe,  105 
Arabic  notation,  46 
Articles  of  Incorporation,  181, 

182 
Asterisk,  in 

Backing  sheet,  159 

Bills,  30 

Binding  legal  papers,  160 

Body  of  letter,  5-9 

Bond,  170 

Botanical  names,  8 1 

Box,  the,  137,  139 

Brace,  no 

Brackets,  103 

Brief,  156-158 

By  and  per  in  signature,  1 1 

By-laws,  183 

Cablegrams,  230-233 

combinations  of  words  in, 
231 

commas,  decimal  points,  232 

commercial  signs,  233 

groups  of  figures,  231 

groups  of  letters,  231 

length  of  words,  231 

punctuation,  232 

two  words  written  as  one, 
232-233 

what  words  charged  for,  230 
Capitalization,  75-83 

appellations  of  states  and 
nations,  83 

compound  titles,  78 

courts,  8 1 

days  of  week,  78 

Deity,  76 


247 


248 


Index 


Capitalization — Continued 
ex,  prefixed  to  titles,  78 
Fates,  Furies,  Graces,  Muses, 

79 

for  the  sake  of  emphasis,  77 

geographical  lines  of  posi- 
tion, 83 

geographical  names,  82 

heathen  divinity,  76 

/  and  O,  79 

months,  78 

names  indicating  office,   80 

names  of  political  parties,  77 

names  of  religious  sects,  77 

names  from  foreign  lan- 
guages, 82 

numbered  phrases,  79 

official  titles,  77 

"oh"  when  not  capitalized, 

79 

personification,  79 

poetry,  76 

proper  adjectives,  79 

proper  nouns,  78 

question,  75 

quotation,  75 

reports  of  committees,  clubs, 
etc.,  80 

Roman  notation,  77 

seasons,  78 

sentence,  75 

specific  names,  83 

state,  territory,  county,  82 

tabulations,  79 

"the"  forming  part  of  cor- 
porate name,  78 

titles  of  books,  etc.,  77 

titles  used  alone,  78 

toasts,  80 

words  denoting  division  of 

time,  epoch,  etc.,  81 
Capitals  of  states  and  territo- 
ries, 125 

Captions,  137,  153,  154 
Caret,  no 

Carrying  over  lines,  7 
"Cent"  sign,  38 
Cipher  telegrams,  229,  230 

how  to  write  translation,  230 
Classified  mail  matter,  235,  238 
Closing  sentence,  8 


Clubs,  reports  of,  80 
Code  and  cipher  telegrams,  229 
Comma,  uses  of,  84-91 
Commercial  "and,"  37 
Commercial   correspondence, 

i-35 

Committees,  reports  of,  80 
Company  of  women,  32 
Compass,  points  of,  71,  82,  117 
Complaint,  form  of,  141 
Compound  modifier,  70 
Compound  words,  68-74 
elimination  of  hyphen,  68 
ellipsis  and  inversion,  69 
formed  of  verb  and  adverb, 

71 

general  principles,  68 

modern  usage,  68 

numeral  and  noun,  70 

possessive  phrases,  70 

prefixes  and  suffixes,  71—74 

rules   for   compounding,    69 

two     adjectives     preceding 
noun,  70 

two  nouns  forming  one  name, 
70 

two  numerals,  71 
Conclusion,  to  a  letter,  9 

capitalization  of,  10 

models  of,  10 

titles  in,  II 

Consolidation  of  captions,  155 
Contractions,  116 
Contractions  commonly  used, 

124 

Copying,  40 
Correct  Word,  the,  207 
Court  Documents,  137-165 

affidavit,  148 

answer,  143 

brief,  156 

captions,  153,  154 

complaint,  141 

consolidated  captions,  155 

judgment,  145 

minutes  of  hearing,  163 

note  of  issue,  152 

notice  of  motion,  144 

order,  146 

summons,  140 
Court  testimony,  162 


Index 


249 


Current   Law   Phrases,     186- 
192 

Dash,  103-105 

Date  line,  3 

Day  letter,  229 

Degrees,  scholastic,  59,  62,  63 

Display  headings,  181,  184 

Ditto-mark,  III 

Division,  sign  of,  38 

Domestic  mail  matter,  234 

Double  spacing,  6 

Ellipsis,  marks  of,  no 

Envelopes,  13-16,  39 
forms  of  address,  13,  1 6 
punctuation  of  address,  4 
putting  in  machine,  39 
superscription,  13,  16,  39 

Equality,  sign  of,  38 

Exclamation-point,  99,  100 
how  to  make,  38 

Family  names,  37,  82 

plurals  of,  58 
Figures  and  signs,  46-50 

Arabic  and  Roman  numerals, 
46 

double  numbers  require  hy- 
phen, 48 

fractions  require  hyphen,  48 

fractions  spelled,  48 

hyphen  between  numbers,  48 

methods  of  writing  "cents," 
48 

names  of  streets,   avenues, 
etc.,  47 

not  to  begin  sentences,  46 

numbers  spelled,  46 

omission  of  punctuation,  49, 
50 

ordinal  numbers,  48 

points  of  time,  49 

punctuation  of  numbers,  47, 

49 

series  of  numbers,  48 
signs  in  statistical  tables,  49 
signs     not     used     without 

figures,  49 
spacing  signs  and  figures.  48, 

49 


statistical  tables,  etc.,  49 
whole  number  and  fraction, 

48 
with  the  contraction  "No.," 

47 

"x"  instead  of  "by,"  49 
Fine  for  improper  mailing,  239 
Firm  name,  possessive  form  of, 

52 

Flagging,  44 
Folding  letters,  39 
Foreign  mail  matter,  236 
Foreign  words,  37,  56,  58,  82 
Forms  for  heading,  2,  3 
Forwarding  mail,  238 
Fractions,  48,  49 

General    Postal    Information 

234^241 
General  Remarks,  36-39 

addresses,  36 

division  of  syllables,  36 

envelopes,  cards,  etc.,  39 

folding,  39 

foreign  names,  37 

"Gents.,"  "Mess.,"  37 

margins,  37 

paragraphs,  37 

postal  cards,  39 

signature  lines,  37 

spacing  after  punctuation,  38 

symbols,  how  to  make,  38 

Hanging  indention,  147 
Heading,  1-3 

forms  of,  2 

punctuation  of,  3 
Honorable,  title  of,  59 
House  number  and  street,  3, 15 
Hyphen,  106 

Indenting  lines  of  address,  4 
Indenting    paragraphs,  5,  36 
Indention,  hanging,  147 
"Index  Expurgatorius, "  220 
Initial  letters  in  telegrams,  226 
Initialing  pages,  6 
Inst.,  prox.,  ult.,  7,  8 
Interrogation-point,  98-99 
Interrogatories,  161 


250 


Index 


Introduction,  in  letters,  3-5 

indenting  lines  of,  4 

in  two  lines,  4 

models  of,  4 

position  of,  4 

punctuation  of,  4 

titles  in,  60 
Introduction,  letters  of,  17 

Judgment,  form  of,  145 
Jurat,  138,  199 

Latin  Words  and  Phrases,  192- 

206 

Law  Phrases,  186-192 
Legal  Documents,  137-175 
Legislative  body,  petition  to, 

10,  62 

Letter-press  Copying,  40 
Letters,  in  general,  1-42 

address  of,  3-5 

backing-sheet,  36 

body  of ,  5-9 

carrying  over  lines,  7 

closing  sentence,  8 

complimentary  close,   titles 
in,  9,  II 

conclusion  of,  9 

construction  of,  41 

copying,  40 

date,  position  of,  2-3 

dating  pages,  6 

delivery  by  messenger,  16 

division  of  syllables,  36 

enclosures,  8 

envelopes,  13-17,  39 

folding,  39 

forms  of,  20-31 

half-sheet  letters,  7 

heading  of,  I 

important  parts  of,  I 

initialing  pages,  6 

initials  of  stenographer,  6 

inst.,  prox.,  ult.,  7 

introduction,  3 

in  third  person,  42 

lists  of  items,  7 

margins,  5,  7,  36 

"Messrs.,"  use  of,  14 

model  forms,  20-31 

notation  of  dictator,  6 


note  in  third  person,  42 
numbering  pages,  6 
of  introduction,  17 
of  recommendation,  18 
paragraphing,  5,  36,  37 
postscript,  8 
protection  of  roller,  36 
reply  to  note  in  third  person, 

42 

return  postage,  37 
second  and  succeeding  pages, 

37 

separation  of  topics,  37 
signature  lines,  how  to  make, 

.37 

signatures,  styles  of,  12 
of  widow,  12 
of  women,  12 
with  title,  12 
single-spaced  matter,  6 
space  between  sentences,  38 
spacing  for  address,  4 
spacing  for  letters,  6 
spacing    after    punctuation  - 

marks,  38 

subject,  placing  of,  6 
superscription,  13—16 
titles,  9,  12 

to  department  manager,  5 
uniform  paragraphs,  5 
Letters  of  Introduction,  1 7 
Letters    of    Recommendation, 

18 

Letters  requiring  return  post- 
age, 37 

Letters  to  clergymen,  63-66 
Letters  to  government  officials, 

60-62 

Letters  to  Women,  31-35 
address      to      company     of 

women,  32 
to  company  of  man  and 

woman,  34 
to  company  of  unmarried 

women,  34 
models  of  introduction,  32- 

34 

salutation,  forms  of,  34 
to   members   of  a   religious 

order,  35 
to  a  physician,  35 


Index 


251 


Letters  to  Women — Continued 
to    women    with    scholastic 

degree,  35 
use  of  husband's  title,  31 

Lines  for  signatures,  37 


"Madam,"  use  of,  31 
Mail  matter,  234 

classified,  234-5 

domestic,  234-5 

fine  for    improper    mailing, 

239 

foreign  mail,  236 

forwarding,  238 

postage,  235-6 

registered  mail,  240 

special  delivery,  239 

unclaimed,  238 

wrapping,  236 
Manifolding,  39 
Mesdames,  use  of,  32 
Messrs.,  use  of,  14 
Minutes  of  hearing,  162-5 
Minutes  of  meeting,  184 
Miss,  use  of,  34 
Mister,  use  of ,  14 
Misused  words,  207-224 
Model     forms     for     business 

letters,  20-29 
Model  forms  for  legal  papers, 

139-185 
affidavit,  148 
answer,  143 

articles  of  incorporation,  181 
bond,  170 
brief,  156 
by-laws,  183 
captions,  i53-!55 
complaint,  141 
consolidated  captions,  155 
endorsement  on  back,  139 
judgment,  145 
minutes  of  hearing,  162 
note  of  issue,  152 
notice  of  motion,  144 
notice  of  special  meeting,  173 
order,  146-147 
power  of  attorney,  168 
proxy, 171 
verifications,  149-151 


warranty  deed,  174 
wills,  176 

Names,  family,  37,  58,  82 
Nicknames,  96 
Night  letters,  229 
Night  telegrams,  228 
Nota  bene,  202 
Note  of  Issue,  152 
Notes  of  invitation,  42 
Notice  of  meeting,  173 
Notice  of  motion,  144 
Number,  use  of ,  2 14 

Official  titles,  59 

Orders,  Special  Term,  147 

Ordinal  numbers,  48 

Paging,  6 

Paper,  for  legal  documents,  137 

Paragraphs,  5,  7,  36,  37 

Parenthesis,  marks  of,  101,  103 

Parenthetical  words,  87 

Parts  of  a  letter,  i 

Period,  use  of,  95-97 

Petition,  to  legislative  body,  10 

Plurals,  54-58 

common  words,  54 

composed  of  two  nouns,  55 

compound  words,  55-56 

family  names,  58 

foreign  words,  56-58 

irregular  plurals,  56 

nouns  ending  in  ful,  56 

nouns  ending  in  man,  58 

nouns    used    only    in    the 
plural,  56 

regular  plurals,  54 

same  form  for  both  singular 
and  plural,  56 

words  ending  in  o,  54 

two  forms  of,  57 
Poetry,  135 
Points  of  the  compass,  71,  82, 

117 
Possessive  case,  51-53 

abbreviations  in,  53 

apposition,  nouns  in,  52 

compound  nouns,  51 

double  possessive,  53 

of  firm  name,  52 


252 


Index 


Possessive  Case — Continued 

pronouns,  15 

pronoun  before  verbal  noun, 
52 

somebody  else's  —  some- 
body's else,  52 

when  omission  of  s  causes 
ambiguity,  51 

when  possession  is  several, 
not  joint,  52 

when  5  may  be  omitted,  51 
Postal  cards,  37,  39 

gauging    space    in   writing, 

39 
Postal  information,  234 

classified   mail   matter,   235 
classified   rates   of   postage, 

235  . 
domestic  mail  matter,  234— 

235 
domestic   rates   of   postage, 

235 
fine   for   improper   mailing, 

239 

forwarding,  238 
miscellaneous    items,     238- 

239 

parcel-post  zone   rates,  236 
parcel-post  information,  240, 

241 

permissible  additions  to  ad- 
dress, 237 

postage  on  letters,  239 
prepayment  on  foreign  mail, 

237 
prepayment  when  necessary, 

235 

rates  to  Great  Britain  and 
Ireland,  237 

rates  to  possessions  of  United 
States,  234 

registration,  239 

returnable  mail  matter,  238 

special  delivery,  239 

unclaimed  letters,  238 

wrapping  of  mail  matter,  237 
Postscript,  8 

Pounds  sterling,  sign  of,  38 
Power  of  attorney,  168 
Prefixes  and  suffixes,  71-74 
Proofreading,  242 


Proposals  for  contracts,  21-24 
Proximo,  use  of,  7,  8 
Proxy,  171 
Punctuation,  84 

apostrophe,  105-106 

colon,  94-95 

comma,  84 

dash,  103-105 

exclamation-point,  99 
how  made,  38 

interrogation-point,  98 

miscellaneous  marks,  1 10-1 1 1 

parenthesis,  101-103 

period,  95-97 

principal  marks  used  in,  84- 
no 

quotation-marks,  106-110 

semicolon,  92-94 
Punctuation  of  address  of 
letter,  4 

of  body,  7,  8, 

of  heading,  3 

of  introduction,  4 

Rates  of  postage,  235 
Receipt,  31 
Registered  mail,  240 
Riders,  44 

Salutation,  3,  4 

for  firm  of  women,  34 

forms  of,  31-35 

in  letters  to  clergymen  and 

officials,  60-66 

Scholastic  degrees,  35,  59,  116 
Second  and  succeeding  pages,  6 
Section-mark,  no 
Semicolon,  92^94 
Sign  of  possession,  51 
Signatures,  to  letters,  II 

lines  for,  1 1 

of  women,  12 

on  legal  papers,  11,  12 

position  of,  12 

styles  of,  12 

titles  in,  u,  12,  225 
Signatures,  to  telegrams,  225 
Somebody   else's — somebody's 

else,  52 

Spacing  after  punctuation,  38 
Spacing  between  sentences,  38 
Special  delivery  letters,  239 


Index 


253 


Spelling    rules    tor,     127-134 

able,  Me,  132 

ant,  ent,  134 

ei,  ie,  133 

en,  in,  132 

final  e,  127 

final  ee,  128 

ise,  ize,  133 

Statement  of  account,  22—23 
Subject  of  letters,  6 
Substance  of  letters,  41 
Suffixes,  71-74 

Suggestions  in  general,  36-39 
Summons,  140 
Superscription,  13 

abbreviations  in,  14-16 

capitalization  of,  14 

models  of,  13-16 

position  of,  15 

punctuation  of,  15 

titles  in,  14,  15,  16 
Syllabication,  112-115 
Symbols,  how  made,  38 

cent  sign,  38 

division,  degree,  equality,  38 

pounds  sterling,  38 

Tabulations,  49,  50 
Telegrams,  225-230 

abbreviations    in,     226-7-8 

compound    words    in,    226 

day  letters,  229 

examples  illustrating  rules, 
228 


figures  in,  226 

groups  of  letters,  227 

how     words     counted     and 

charged,  225 
initial  letters,  226 
night  letters,  229 
night  messages,  228 
punctuation-marks,  226 
signatures,  225 
titles,  225 

Testimony,  162 

Time-saving  expedients,  43-44 
no  punctuation,  43 
ordinal  endings  dropped,  43 
symbols  used,  44 

Titles,  59 

abbreviations  of,  59,  62 
classification  of,  59 
ecclesiastical  titles,  63 
heads  of  religious  orders,  66 
when    not    abbreviated,    59 

Trial  Term  Order,  147 

Unclaimed  Letters,  238-239 
Underline,  in 
Useless  Words,  218 

Venue,  138 

Verification,  forms  of,  149-151 

Warranty  deed,  form  of,   174 

Wills,  176 

Wrapping    mail    matter,    236 


library 
Cfraduate  School  of  Business  Administration 

Uni    ^rB"4-;r  of  California 
Los  Angeles  24,  California 

UNIVERSITY  of  CALIFORNIA 

AT 

LOS  ANGELES 
LIBRARY 


UC  SOUTHERN  REGIONAL  LIBRARY  FACILITY 


A     000179638     2 


